QME-1 Edtn 2007

Copyrighted material licensed to Stanford University by Thomson Scientific (www.techstreet.com), downloaded on Oct-05-2010 by Stanford University User.
No further reproduction or distribution is permitted. Uncontrolled when printed

ASME QME-1–2007
(Revision of ASME QME-1–2002)
Qualification of
Active Mechanical
Equipment Used in
Nuclear Power Plants
A N A M E R I C A N N AT I O N A L STA N DA R D
Copyright c 2007 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
Copyrighted material licensed to Stanford University by Thomson Scientific (www.techstreet.com), downloaded on Oct-05-2010 by Stanford University User. No further reproduction or distribution is permitted. Uncontrolled wh
ASME QME-1–2007
(Revision of ASME QME-1–2002)
Qualification of
Active Mechanical
Equipment Used in
A N A M E R I C A N N AT I O N A L S TA N D A R D
Three Park Avenue • New York, NY 10016

Date of Issuance: November 28, 2007
The next edition of this Standard is scheduled for publication in 2010. There will be no addenda
issued to this edition.
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning interpretations of technical aspects of this
Standard. Interpretations are published on the ASME Web site under the Committee Pages at
http://cstools.asme.org as they are issued.
ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
This code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National
Standards. The Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from
competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made
available for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia,
regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly
advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is
entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established
ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2007 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.

CONTENTS
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Committee Roster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Organization of QME-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Section QR General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
QR-1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
QR-2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
QR-3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
QR-4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
QR-5000 Qualification Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
QR-6000 Qualification Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
QR-7000 Qualification Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
QR-8000 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Nonmandatory Appendices to Section QR
QR-A Seismic Qualification of Active Mechanical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
QR-A1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
QR-A2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
QR-A3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
QR-A4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
QR-A5000 Earthquake Environment and Equipment Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
QR-A6000 Seismic Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
QR-A7000 Qualification Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
QR-A8000 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Attachment A Guidelines for Qualification by Similarity (Indirect Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Attachment B Examples of Qualification of Pumps and Valves by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Attachment C Qualification of Pumps and Valves Using Natural Earthquake
Experience Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Appendix QR-A Figures
B-1 Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
B-2 Finite Element Formulation of Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
B-3 Butterfly Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B-4 Finite Element Formulation of Butterfly Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
C-1 Seismic Motion Bounding Spectrum Horizontal Ground Motion . . . . . . . . 39
C-2 Limits of Experience Data for Motor-Operated Valves and
Substantial Piston-Operated Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
C-3 Limits of Experience Data for Air-Operated Diaphragm Valves, Spring-
Operated Pressure Relief Valves, and Piston-Operated Valves of
Lightweight Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Appendix QR-A Tables
QR-A6210-1 Damping Values: Percent of Critical Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
QR-A7422-1 Reduction Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
A-1 List of Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
A-2 Comparative List of Physical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
B-1 Calculated Frequencies for Pump/Motor Assembly: Print of
Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
B-2 Evaluation of Behavior at Critical Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
B-3 Allowable Stresses at 200°F for 4-in. Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
iii
B-4 Beam Stresses, psi, for ASME Service Level B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
B-5 Beam Stresses, psi, for ASME Service Level C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
B-6 Plate Stresses, psi, for ASME Service Level B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
B-7 Plate Stresses, psi, for ASME Service Level C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
B-8 Other Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
B-9 4-in. Valve Nodal Displacements, in., for ASME Service Level C . . . . . . . . 37
QR-B Guide for Qualification of Nonmetallic Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QR-B1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QR-B2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QR-B3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QR-B4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QR-B5000 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QR-B6000 Methods of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
QR-B7000 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Section QDR Qualification of Dynamic Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QDR-1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QDR-2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QDR-3000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QDR-4000 Qualification Principles and Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
QDR-5000 Functional Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
QDR-6000 Qualification Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
QDR-7000 Documentation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Nonmandatory Appendices to Section QDR
QDR-A Functional Specification for Dynamic Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
QDR-A1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
QDR-A2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
QDR-A3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
QDR-A4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
QDR-A5000 Functional Specification Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
QDR-A6000 Filing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
QDR-B Restraint Similarity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
QDR-B1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
QDR-B2000 Examples of Design Similarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
QDR-C Typical Values of Restraint Functional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
QDR-C1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
QDR-C2000 Functional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
QDR-C3000 Aging and Service Condition Simulation Qualification Program . . . . . . . . 63
Section QP Qualification of Active Pump Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QP-1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QP-2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QP-3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QP-4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
QP-5000 Qualification Principles and Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
QP-6000 Qualification Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
QP-7000 Qualification Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
QP-8000 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Nonmandatory Appendices to Section QP
QP-A Pump Specification Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
QP-A1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
QP-A2000 Applicable Documents, Codes, and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
QP-A3000 Design and Construction Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
iv
QP-A4000 Structural, Seismic, and Environmental Qualification Requirements . . . . . 70
QP-A5000 Material and Manufacturing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
QP-A6000 Testing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
QP-A7000 Documentation, Instructions, and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
QP-B Pump Shaft-Seal System Specification Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-B1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-B2000 Applicable Documents, Codes, and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-B3000 Design and Construction Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-B4000 Structural, Seismic, and Environmental Qualification Requirements . . . . . 72
QP-B5000 Materials and Manufacturing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-B6000 Testing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-B7000 Documentation, Instructions, and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
QP-C Pump Turbine Driver Specification Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-C1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-C2000 Applicable Documents, Codes, and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-C3000 Design and Construction Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-C4000 Structural, Seismic, and Environmental Qualification Requirements . . . . . 73
QP-C5000 Material and Manufacturing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-C6000 Testing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-C7000 Documentation, Instructions, and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
QP-D Pump Similarity Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
QP-D1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
QP-D2000 Pump Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
QP-D3000 Process Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
QP-E Guidelines for Shaft-Seal System Material and Design Consideration . . . . . . 75
QP-E1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
QP-E2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
QP-E3000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
QP-E4000 Material Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
QP-E5000 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Appendix QP-E Tables
QP-E1 Shaft-Seal System Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
QP-E2 Limits for Unbalanced Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Section QV Functional Qualification Requirements for Active Valve Assemblies
for Nuclear Power Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
QV-1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
QV-2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
QV-3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
QV-4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
QV-5000 Qualification Principles and Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
QV-6000 Qualification Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
QV-7000 Qualification Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
QV-8000 Documentation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Section QV Table
QV-7300 Valve Assembly Qualification Requirement Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Mandatory Appendix to Section QV
QV-I Qualification Specification for Active Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
QV-I1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
QV-I2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
QV-I3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
QV-I4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
QV-I5000 Functional Specification Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
v
QV-I6000 Actuator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
QV-I7000 Self-Operated Check Valve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
QV-I8000 Pressure Relief Valve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Nonmandatory Appendix to Section QV
QV-A Functional Specification for Active Valves for Nuclear Power Plants . . . . . . . . 92
QV-A1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
QV-A2000 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
QV-A3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
QV-A4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
QV-A5000 Functional Specification Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
QV-A6000 Functional Specification Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
QV-A7000 Filing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Section QV-G Guide to Section QV: Determination of Valve Assembly Performance
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
QV-G1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
QV-G2000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
QV-G3000 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
QV-G4000 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
QV-G5000 Valve Assembly Performance Characteristic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
QV-G6000 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
QV-G7000 Power-Actuated Valve Assembly Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
QV-G8000 Valve Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
vi
FOREWORD
Federal regulations applicable to nuclear power plants require that measures be established to
ensure that certain equipment operates as specified. This Standard sets forth requirements and
guidelines that may be used to ensure that active mechanical equipment is qualified for specified
service conditions. As determined by federal regulators and/or nuclear power plant licensees,
this Standard may be applied to future nuclear power plants, or existing operating nuclear power
plant component replacements, modifications, or additions.
In the early 1970s, initial development of qualification standards was assigned to the ANSI N45
Committee. The N45 Committee in turn established a task force to prepare two series of standards
to ensure that pumps and valves used in nuclear plant systems would function as specified.
The N45 Committee’s valve task force (N278) was reassigned in 1974 to the American National
Standards Committee B16 and designated Subcommittee H. The first qualification standard
to be issued for valves was ANSI N278.1-1975, which covered the preparation of functional
specifications. In 1982, the task force was reassigned to the ASME Committee on Qualification
of Mechanical Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Plants (QME) and designated the Subcommittee
on Qualification of Valve Assemblies. As an interim measure, in 1983, ANSI B16.41 was issued
to cover functional qualification requirements for power-operated active valve assemblies for
nuclear power plants.
The N45 Committee’s pump task force (N551), established in 1973, was assigned to ASME
Nuclear Power Codes and Standards along with N278 as part of the Subcommittee QNPE,
Qualification of Nuclear Plant Equipment. Both N551 and N278 operated as Subcommittee QNPE
until 1982, when they were reassigned to the ASME Committee on Qualification of Mechanical
Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Plants (QME) and designated as the Subcommittee on
Qualification of Valve Assemblies and the Subcommittee on Qualification of Pump Assemblies.
In June 1977, an IEEE/ASME agreement was formulated giving primary responsibility for
qualification standards to IEEE and quality assurance standards to ASME. This arrangement
remained in effect until ASME established the current Committee on Qualification of Mechanical
Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Plants.
During 1985, the Committee on Qualification of Mechanical Equipment Used in Nuclear Power
Plants researched the various formats this Standard could take. Based on the wide acceptance
of ASME Section III’s format for multiple classes, the Committee adopted a similar organizational
format to accommodate multiple equipment types covered by this Standard. As IEEE Standards
323 and 627 had already been in use many years for electrical equipment, these standards
were also studied for appropriate content that should be addressed for mechanical equipment.
Subsequently, the following Organization Guide was developed for this Standard and submitted
to the ASME Board on Nuclear Codes and Standards for approval. On January 16, 1986, the
Board on Nuclear Codes and Standards approved QME’s approach and outline for this Standard.
Consistent with the guidance in ASME SI-9 [ASME Guide for Metrication of Codes and
Standards SI (Metric Units)] regarding metrication, SI units have been provided in narrative
portions of QME-1 for general information only, and the U.S. Customary units are the standard.
Either U.S. Customary units or SI units may be used, but one system shall be used consistently
throughout construction of the component. Should the owner or his agent desire metric units, it
sill be set forth in the design specifications.
The various parts of ASME QME-1–1994 were approved by the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) on the following dates: Section QP, September 22, 1992; Section QR, June 8, 1993;
Section QR, Appendix A, October 7, 1993; Section QR, Appendix B, May 14, 1993; and Section
QV and its Appendix A, February 17, 1994. Section QV is a revision and redesignation of
ANSI B16.41-1983.
In 1996 the Board of Nuclear Codes and Standards requested all committees reporting to it to
add SI (metric) units to all documents by replacing Customary (English) units with SI units or
by showing SI units in a dual format with Customary units. The decision as to the extent of the
vii
conversion and format was left to the various committees. The Committee on Qualification of
Mechanical Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants voted in 1996 to present SI units in the QME
document, with Customary units in parentheses. A group of proposed changes was prepared at
that time. The changes encountered a good deal of opposition. The Committee on Qualification
of Mechanical Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants revisited this decision at its February 29, 2000
meeting and voted to publish QME-1 with dual units, Customary as the primary units, with SI
units in parentheses. This decision was further modified by the Committee to make the change
apply to textual material only. Tables and figures were not to be modified. The changes made
herein confirm with those decisions. The changes apply to the text as it appeared in the 1997
edition of QME-1.
Requests for interpretation or suggestions for improvement of this Standard should be
addressed to the Secretary of the ASME Committee on Qualification of Mechanical Equipment
Used in Nuclear Power Plants, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Three Park Avenue,
New York, NY 10016-5990.
The 2002 edition of this Standard was approved as an American National Standard on
October 31, 2002.
This Standard was approved as an American National Standard on June 25, 2007.
viii
COMMITTEE ON QUALIFICATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
USED IN NUCLEAR FACILITIES
(The following is the roster of the Committee at the time of approval of this Standard.)
STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

T. P. Ruggiero, Jr., Chair
O. Martinez, Secretary
STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

T. M. Adams, Stevenson & Associates W. N. McLean, Newco Valves
R. W. Barnes, Anric Enterprises, Inc. R. E. Richards, Anvil International, Inc.
J. R. Holstrom, Val-Matic A. G. Smyth, Wyle Laboratories, Inc.
H. S. Koski, Jr., Southern Nuclear Operating Co. H. R. Sonderegger, Anvil International, Inc.
K. A. Manoly, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission D. C. Stanze, Fisher Controls International
SUBCOMMITTEE ON QUALIFICATION OF VALVE ASSEMBLIES

H. R. Beck, Areva T. P. Ruggiero, Jr., American Energy Oyster Creek
R. J. Gradle, Flowserve S. N. Shields, Weir Valves & Controls USA, Inc.
H. I. Gregg, Consultant H. R. Sonderegger, Anvil International, Inc.
J. R. Holstrom, Val-Matic J. C. Watkins
SUBCOMMITTEE ON QUALIFICATION OF ACTIVE DYNAMIC RESTRAINTS

H. S. Koski, Jr., Chair R. E. Fandetti, Lisega, Inc.
R. E. Richards, Vice Chair D. V. Hoang, Constellation Energy
D. C. Boes, Nebraska Public Power District M. A. Pressburger, JFMC Facilities Corp.
D. Egonis, North Atlantic Energy Services Co. M. D. Shutt, Duke Energy Corp.
SUBGROUP ON QDR DEVELOPMENT

R. L. Portmann, Jr., Progress Energy
M. A. Pressburger, JFMC Facilities Corp.
SUBCOMMITTEE ON GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

T. M. Adams, Stevenson & Associates H. C. Shaffer, III
C. L. Hoffmann, Westinghouse Electric Co. LLC H. R. Sonderegger, Anvil International, Inc.
SUBCOMMITTEE ON DYNAMIC QUALIFICATION

G. A. Antaki, Becht Nuclear Services D. P. Moore, Southern Company Services, Inc.
P. D. Baughman, ABS Consulting J. M. Richards, Duke Power Co.
K. A. Manoly, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
ix
ORGANIZATION OF QME-1
1 GENERAL 5 SUBSUBARTICLES
ASME QME-1 is divided into sections that are desig- Subsubarticles are numbered in units of 10, such as
nated by capital letters: the letter Q, which stands for QR-8310, and generally have no text. When a number
qualification, followed by a second letter that generally such as QR-8320 is followed by text, it is considered
indicates the subject matter of the section. This Standard a paragraph. When more than nine subsubarticles are
consists of three major sections as follows: required, numbering is done by paragraph and units of
(a) Section QR: General Requirements 1 starting with 10.
(b) Section QP: Qualification of Pump Assemblies
(c) Section QV: Qualification of Valve Assemblies 6 PARAGRAPHS
Paragraphs are numbered in units of 1, such as
2 SECTIONS QR-8321 or QV-8322.
Sections are divided into articles, subarticles, para-
graphs, and, where necessary, subparagraphs and sub- 7 SUBPARAGRAPHS
subparagraphs.
Subparagraphs, when they are major subdivisions of
a paragraph, are designated by adding a decimal fol-
3 ARTICLES lowed by one or more digits to the paragraph number,
such as QR-8321.1 or QV-8321.2. When they are minor
Articles are designated by the applicable letters indi-
subdivisions of a paragraph, subparagraphs may be des-
cated above for the sections, followed by Arabic num-
ignated by lowercase letters in parentheses, such as
bers, such as QR-1000, QP-2000, and QV-6000. Whenever
QR-8321(a) and QV-8321(b).
possible, articles dealing with the same topics are given
the same number in each section in accordance with the
following general scheme: 8 SUBSUBPARAGRAPHS
Article Number Title Subsubparagraphs are designated by adding lower-
1000 Scope case letters in parentheses to the major subparagraph
2000 Purpose numbers, such as QR-8321.1(a) and QV-8321.1(b). When
3000 References further subdivisions of minor subparagraphs are
4000 Definitions necessary, subsubsubparagraphs are designated by
5000 Qualification Principles and Philosophy adding Arabic numbers in parentheses to the sub-
6000 Qualification Specification Criteria subparagraph designation, such as QR-8321.1(a)(1) and
7000 Qualification Program
8000 Documentation
QV-8321.1(a)(2).
The numbering of the articles and the material con-

9 REFERENCES
tained in the articles may not, however, be consecutive.
Due to the fact that the complete outline may cover References used within this Standard generally fall
phases not applicable to a particular section or article, into one of the following three categories:
the rules have been prepared allowing some gaps in the (a) References to Other Portions of This Standard. When
numbering. In Section QV of this Standard, subarticles a reference is made to another article, subarticle, or para-
QV-1200, QV-1300, and QV-1400 describe exceptions to graph, all numbers subsidiary to that reference shall be
this general numbering system, which may apply to included. For example, reference to QR-5000 includes
paras. 4 through 8. all material in Article QR-5000; reference to QR-7300
includes all material in Subarticle QR-7300; reference to
QR-7320 includes all material in Subsubarticle QR-7320.
4 SUBARTICLES
(b) References to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and
Subarticles are numbered in units of 100, such as to Other Standards. When a reference is made to any
QR-7100 or QV-7200. When more than nine subarticles Section of the BPVC, or to other standards, it shall be
are required, numbering is done by paragraph and units understood to mean the designated article, paragraph,
of 1 starting with 10. figure, or table in the designated document. All such
x
references shall be identified in the text of this Standard nuclear power plant may take precedence over refer-
by the document’s issuing source and the document’s ences used within this Standard. Section QR references
unique identification number, e.g., ASME III applicable for both pumps and valves shall be described
Subsection NF, IEEE Std 627, or 10CFR50 Part A. If in Article QR-3000, while references unique to
required, further reference to unique articles or para- Section QP or QV only will be described in Article QP-
graphs of the referenced document may also be or QV-3000, as applicable.
described, e.g., ASME III Subsection NF paragraph (c) References to Appendices. Two types of appendices
may be used in this Standard, designated Mandatory
NF-3211.1(a). Each short reference made in the text shall
and Nonmandatory. Both types of appendices are desig-
be described in more complete detail in Article 3000 by
nated by the prefix Q. This is followed by a letter, which
issuing source, unique identification number, year of
is the same one used by the section to which the appen-
publication being referenced, and full title, e.g., IEEE Std dix applies, e.g., QR. Mandatory appendices contain
382-1980, Standard for Qualification of Safety Related requirements that must be followed in qualification;
Valve Operators. References listed without year of publi- such references are then uniquely identified by a roman
cation suggest that the latest version of the reference numeral, e.g., Appendix QR-I and its specific title. Non-
was utilized in the development of this Standard. It mandatory appendices provide information or guid-
should be noted by users of this Standard that regulatory ance; such references are designated by a capital letter,
requirements and Codes of Record for a particular e.g., Appendix QR-A, and its specific title.
xi
ASME QME-1–2007
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Following approval by the ASME Committee on Qualification of Mechanical Equipment Used

in Nuclear Power Plants and ASME, and after public review, QME-1–2007 was approved by the
American National Standards Institute on June 25, 2007.
QME-1–2007 includes the following changes identified by a margin note, (07).

Page Location Change
1–6 Section QR Revised in its entirety
7–23 Nonmandatory Revised in its entirety
Appendix QR-A
78–89 Section QV Revised in its entirety
90–103 Mandatory Appendix QV-I Added
SPECIAL NOTE:
The Code Cases to ASME QME-1 follow the last page of this edition as a separate section.
xii
ASME QME-1–2007
QUALIFICATION OF ACTIVE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

USED IN NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
Section QR (07)
General Requirements
QR-1000 SCOPE Publisher: Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers, Inc. (IEEE), 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ
This Standard provides the requirements and guide-
08854-1331
lines for the qualification of active mechanical equip-
ment whose function is required to ensure the safe
operation or safe shutdown of a nuclear power plant. QR-4000 DEFINITIONS
In addition to requirements and guidelines put forth in
this Standard, the active mechanical equipment shall active mechanical equipment: mechanical equipment con-
comply with the requirements of the applicable design taining moving parts, which, in order to accomplish its
and construction codes and standards. required function as defined in the Qualification Specifi-
This Standard does not apply to electric components cation, must undergo or prevent mechanical movement.
such as motors, electric valve actuators, instrumentation, This includes any internal components or appurtenances
and controls, which are qualified by conformance with whose failure degrades the required function of the
appropriate IEEE standards. equipment.
aging: the cumulative effects of operational, environmen-
QR-2000 PURPOSE tal, and system conditions on equipment during a period
of time up to, but not including, design basis events or
The purpose of this Standard is to provide the require- the process of simulating these effects.
ments and recommended practices to qualify active
Application Report: documentation for a specific applica-
mechanical equipment to meet specified functional
tion showing that the required pressure ratings, qualifi-
requirements during operation and during or after any
cation loading levels, and operating condition
postulated abnormal or accident conditions.
capabilities are equaled or exceeded by the correspond-
ing pressure ratings, qualification loadings, and
QR-3000 REFERENCES operating condition capabilities shown in the Functional
This Section lists reference documents from which Qualification Report.
guidance, concepts, principles, practices, criteria, and candidate equipment: active mechanical equipment to be
parameters have been carried forward into this qualified in accordance with the rules of this Standard.
Standard. Class 1E: the safety classification of the electric equip-
ANS 51.1-1988, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design ment and systems that are essential to emergency reactor
of Stationary Pressurized Water Reactor Plants shutdown, containment isolation, reactor core cooling,
ANS 52.1-1988, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design and containment and reactor heat removal, or are other-
of Stationary Boiling Water Reactor Plants wise essential in preventing significant release of radio-
Publisher: American Nuclear Society (ANS), 555 North active material to the environment.
Kensington Avenue, LaGrange Park, IL 60526 component supports: structural elements that transmit
IEEE Standard 334-1974 (Reaffirmed), Standard for Type loads between the components and building structure
Test of Continuous Duty Class 1E Motors for Nuclear but does not include intervening elements in the compo-
Power Generating Stations nent support load path, such as electric motors and valve
IEEE Standard 344-1987, Recommended Practices for operators.
Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for demonstration: the provision of evidence to support the
Nuclear Power Generating Stations conclusion derived from assumed premises.
1
ASME QME-1–2007
design basis event (DBE): postulated events (specified by testing, and quality assurance that were used for proto-
the safety analysis of the plant) used in the design to type or parent equipment.
establish the acceptable performance requirements of prototype equipment: production equipment representing
the structures and systems. the first model/type or original design/pattern. Proto-
design life: the time during which satisfactory perform- type equipment may be used for qualification testing;
ance can be expected for a specific set of service condi- when selected for qualification testing, the equipment
tions (the time may be specified in real time, number may also be called candidate equipment.
of operating cycles, or other performance intervals, as qualification: the generation and maintenance of evidence
appropriate). to ensure/demonstrate that the equipment can meet its
Design Specification: a document prepared by the Owner specified service conditions in accordance with the qual-
or the Owner’s designee that provides a basis for the ification specification.
design of a system or component. qualification criteria: criteria developed from those spe-
essential-to-function parts/components: those parts or com- cific service conditions for which the equipment is to
ponents of the assembly that are essential to cause, per- be qualified.
mit, or enable the assembly to perform the specified qualification life: the period of time, prior to the start of
accident-condition function or whose failure could pre- a design basis event, for which the active mechanical
vent the performance of this function. equipment was demonstrated to meet the design
functionality: ability of an active component to perform requirements for the specified service conditions. (Note
the mechanical motion required to fulfill its specified that at the end of the qualified life, the active mechanical
function when subjected to the prescribed service condi- equipment shall be capable of performing the function
tions. required for the postulated design basis and postdesign
basis events.)
installed life: the interval from installation to removal
during which the equipment or component thereof may qualification program: the overall cumulative process of
be subject to design service condition and system specifying, conducting, and documenting the results of
demands. those activities required to qualify active mechanical
equipment to perform its function in accordance with
maintenance: work performed on an item to keep it oper-
the qualification specification.
able or to restore it to an operable condition.
Qualification Report: documentation of tests, analyses,
malfunction: the loss of capability of equipment to initiate operating experience, or any combination of these per-
or sustain its specified function or the initiation of unde- formed in accordance with this Standard or the qualifica-
sired actions that might result in adverse consequences. tion specification that demonstrates functionality of the
margin: the amount by which the qualification condition active mechanical equipment.
levels exceed the service condition levels. Qualification Specification: the specification or portion of
may: an expression of permission. the Design Specification that describes the qualification
mechanical component: those items of a plant such as requirements to be met in the qualification of the active
pumps, valves, vessels, and piping. mechanical equipment.
qualified candidate equipment: equipment that has been
mechanical equipment: for the purposes of this Standard,
qualified primarily by methods described in the candi-
mechanical equipment may be used interchangeably
date equipment definition above met in the qualification
with mechanical component or assembly.
of the active mechanical equipment.
modification: a change in a system component or equip-
qualified parent equipment: equipment that has been quali-
ment configuration.
fied primarily by testing.
natural aging: aging that occurs within normal service
safe shutdown earthquake (SSE): the vibratory seismic
environments as opposed to simulated service environ-
motion (greater than the OBE) for which certain struc-
ments.
tures, systems, and components in a plant are designed
operability: see functionality for the definition of this term to remain functional as specified by the safety analysis
for use in this Standard. of the plant.
operating basis earthquake (OBE): the vibratory seismic service conditions: postulated conditions specified for
motion associated with the plant shutdown and inspec- environmental, dynamic/static/pressure loadings,
tion, which may be identified as a design input as speci- material degradation, etc., for normal operation, abnor-
fied by the safety analysis of the plant. mal operation, and design basis events.
production equipment: equipment fabricated with the shake table system: an assembly that is able to induce and
same manufacturing techniques, materials, production control seismic type motion into a test specimen and
2
ASME QME-1–2007
measure the vibratory responses that are to be docu- (c) evidence of successful completion of a qualifi-
mented. cation
shall: an expression of a requirement. (d) documentation containing (a) through (c) above.
The requirements to satisfy (a) through (d) above
should: an expression of a recommendation.
should be contained in the active mechanical equipment
test equipment: active mechanical equipment selected for qualification specification.
qualification testing. In a qualification program, aging and qualified life
tests: those testing activities conducted to specified ser- shall be considered as described in the following para-
vice conditions to demonstrate that such active mechani- graphs.
cal equipment can subsequently perform its intended
QR-5310 Aging. Assessment of active mechanical
function.
equipment shall include an analysis and/or evaluation
of the active mechanical equipment to determine any
QR-5000 QUALIFICATION PRINCIPLES significant aging mechanisms, such as thermal, radia-
The principles pertinent to active mechanical equip- tion, corrosion, erosion, vibration, aggressive chemical
ment qualification are provided in the following subar- attack, or wear. When one or more mechanisms are iden-
ticles. Subarticles QR-5100 and QR-5200 outline the tified as significant, the assessment shall be developed as
fundamental requirements and approaches for active part of the overall qualification program. When natural
mechanical equipment qualification programs. Subar- aging results are utilized in the qualification program,
ticle QR-5300 then establishes the general requirements it may not be necessary to conduct a detailed analysis or
for the qualification program. evaluation to determine significant aging mechanisms.
An aging mechanism is considered significant if it
QR-5100 Qualification Requirement satisfies any of the following criteria:
To establish active mechanical equipment qualifica- (a) in normal service environments, the aging mecha-
tion, it shall be demonstrated that the active mechanical nism promotes the same malfunction as that which may
equipment can perform its specified required function result from exposure to abnormal or design basis event
when operational and environmental conditions are service conditions
imposed on the equipment in accordance with the active (b) the aging mechanism adversely affects the ability
mechanical equipment qualification specification. of the active mechanical equipment to perform its func-
tion in accordance with its specification requirements
QR-5200 Approaches to Qualification (c) the deterioration caused by the aging mechanism
Active mechanical equipment shall be qualified by is not amenable to assessment by in-service test/inspec-
one or a combination of the methods described in Article tion or surveillance
QR-7000. The requirements generally address a single (d) in the normal service environment, the aging
active mechanical equipment application, but they may mechanism causes degradation during the design life
envelop the service conditions for more than one appli- of the active mechanical equipment that is significant
cation. In addition, a family of active mechanical equip- compared with degradation caused by the design
ment may be qualified by using one or more of the basis event
qualification methods described in QR-7300 or further Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B provides supplemen-
described in a qualification specification. Such extension tary details associated with the qualification of nonme-
of qualification requires consideration of significant tallic parts.
design parameters to establish the similarity of the can-
didate active mechanical equipment to the reference QR-5320 Determination of Qualified Life. For active
active mechanical equipment. mechanical equipment with significant aging mecha-
The pressure boundary integrity and structural sup- nisms, a qualified life shall be established. For active
ports of active mechanical equipment shall be qualified mechanical equipment with no significant aging mecha-
in accordance with the applicable design codes and stan- nisms, the qualified life is equal to the design life.
dards. The determination of qualified life shall be based upon
engineering analysis and/or evaluation in these
QR-5300 General Requirements for a Qualification instances. The analysis and/or evaluation should take
Program into account, if available, the following:
A qualification program for active mechanical equip- (a) results of age conditioning used in qualification
ment shall include the following: (aging may be natural, artificial, or a combination
(a) qualification requirements thereof)
(b) a process to demonstrate that the active mechani- (b) active mechanical equipment operating data
cal equipment satisfies the qualification requirements (c) previous test results for the same material and the
by analysis, test, experience, or a combination of these same type of service
3
ASME QME-1–2007
(d) understanding of significant aging mechanisms (f) Required margin in the qualification parameters
that have been identified shall be specified to account for a variation in perform-
(e) margins in excess of those required for the most ance, errors in experimental measurements, and varia-
adverse service conditions for which the equipment is tions in production, thereby providing a level of
qualified confidence that the active mechanical equipment will
The qualified life of a particular active mechanical perform under the most adverse service conditions for
equipment item may be changed during its installed life which it is qualified.
where justified. For example, the qualified life of active (g) Significant aging mechanisms, where known, shall
mechanical equipment may be limited by certain inter- be identified. Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B provides
nal components or appurtenances that have a shorter supplementary details associated with the qualification
qualified life than the installed life of the equipment. of nonmetallic parts.
By periodic replacement of those internal components or (h) Acceptance criteria for qualification shall be speci-
appurtenances, the qualified life of the active mechanical fied to ensure satisfaction of the fundamental qualifica-
equipment may be extended. tion requirement. The acceptance criteria shall include
limiting values of input to, and performance required
from, the equipment under the required operating con-
QR-6000 QUALIFICATION SPECIFICATION ditions, as well as environmental parameter levels.
(i) Active mechanical equipment qualification docu-
The qualification specification for active mechanical mentation shall be included as described in Article
equipment shall describe the requirements to be met to QR-8000.
qualify the active mechanical equipment for its intended
application. This forms the basis for development of an
active mechanical equipment qualification program. As QR-7000 QUALIFICATION PROGRAM
a minimum, the following shall be included in the quali- QR-7100 General Requirements
fication specification. The qualification specification
shall state whether function is required during, after, or A qualification program shall be established based on
during and after the design basis event. the active mechanical equipment’s qualification specifi-
cation. The qualification program shall include and
(a) Active mechanical equipment performance
address qualification methods, mandatory require-
requirements, both normal and design basis event,
ments, aging, qualified life, and acceptance criteria as
including a description of the basis for its classification
described in Article QR-5000. The program shall ensure
as active mechanical equipment, and a description of
that qualification specification and acceptance criteria
the required function, including the time period it shall
are properly addressed as described in Article QR-6000.
remain operable, shall be specified.
In addition, the program shall ensure that qualification
(b) Active mechanical equipment description and is properly addressed by testing, analysis, earthquake
boundary, including components that are inside the experience data, similarity, or combined methods.
boundary, and the physical orientation/location of the
active mechanical equipment shall be specified. Attach- QR-7200 Review for Potential Malfunctions
ments, motor power connection, seals, and control cir-
The selection of methods for qualifying active
cuitry that cross this boundary shall be described.
mechanical equipment shall consider potential malfunc-
(c) Interface loadings through attachments of the tions that would degrade the required functions as
active mechanical equipment at the active mechanical defined in the Qualification Specification (QR-6000).
equipment boundary shall be specified for each Components and subassemblies that are not involved
operating mode. In the same manner, motor power or in the active mechanical equipment’s function may be
control signal inputs, including those that deviate from excluded from the qualification process if it can be
normal, shall be specified. shown that their malfunctions have no effect on the
(d) The qualification specifications for active mechan- specified function of the active mechanical equipment.
ical equipment within the scope of this Standard shall
reference specifically invoked Codes and Standards. For QR-7300 Selection of Qualification Methods
example, Section QP (Qualification of Active Pump Qualification shall be accomplished by test, analysis,
Assemblies) may furnish a substantial part of the qualifi- use of earthquake experience data, similarity, or some
cation program for a complete pump assembly. combination of these methods. Regardless of the qualifi-
(e) The service conditions and concurrent loads for cation method, rationale shall be provided to show that
the active mechanical equipment shall be specified. the functionality of the active mechanical equipment
Examples of such parameters are earthquakes, internal cannot be degraded to the point that it cannot perform
and external pressures/temperatures, relative humidity, its specified function. In addition, the method selected
radiation, vibration, corrosion effects, transients, etc. shall account for the pertinent interface parameters.
4
ASME QME-1–2007
QR-7310 Qualification by Test. Tests shall demon- strains, loads, or displacements against allowable capac-
strate that the active mechanical equipment perform- ity limits. The basis for assumptions and extrapolations
ance meets or exceeds the requirements of the active shall be documented. Qualification by analysis may be
mechanical equipment design and applicable qualifica- used when testing is not practical and other supporting
tion specifications. Testing of active mechanical equip- data are available to support the analytical assumptions
ment satisfies qualification requirements if it accounts and conclusions reached. Qualification by analysis may
for significant aging mechanisms, subjects the active also be used when only partial test and other supporting
mechanical equipment to specified service conditions, data are available to support the analytical assumptions
and demonstrates that such active mechanical equip- and conclusions reached.
ment can perform its specified function for the specified
QR-7321 Aging. Aging can be a concern for metal-
operating time.
lic and nonmetallic components. Analysis may be used
The testing shall consist of a planned sequence of test
for aging in a supporting capability to simplify or extend
conditions that meets or exceeds the specified service
active mechanical equipment qualifications in special
condition. Testing shall include all functional tests, radi-
circumstances.
ation exposure, aging, abnormal or special operation,
seismic, accident (design basis event), and post-test (a) Analysis may be used to eliminate consideration
inspection when they are included in the Qualification of environmental stresses or aging effects which have an
Specification. Sequence of testing and acceptance crite- insignificant impact upon active mechanical equipment
ria shall be established prior to testing. functional integrity.
(b) Analysis may be used to extrapolate or otherwise
QR-7311 Aging. Significant aging mechanisms account for the effect of active mechanical equipment
shall be identified and accounted for in an aging pro- design modifications as well as verification of aging or
gram using such methods as cycling, damage due to environmental parameters in instances where intended
erosion or corrosion, overstress, and time compression application exceeds prior qualification constraints.
for accelerated aging. The aging acceleration rate and When analysis is utilized to simplify or extend active
basis upon which the rate was established shall be mechanical equipment qualification, the analysis shall
described and justified. If natural aging is utilized, deter- consider significant aging mechanisms for the item.
mination of significant aging mechanisms is not neces- Analysis methods can be used in conjunction with sup-
sary. Components subject to different aging mechanisms portive empirical data to simplify or supplement the
of wear or environmental degradation can be sepa- test aging exercise for nonmetallic items.
rately aged.
QR-7322 Dynamic Loading. Active mechanical
QR-7312 Dynamic Loading. Qualification of active equipment qualification for dynamic loadings, such as
mechanical equipment for dynamic loadings, such as but not limited to vibration and seismic, should consider
but not limited to vibration and seismic loadings, should analytical procedures detailed in Nonmandatory
consider the requirements and general approaches out- Appendix QR-A, IEEE Standard 344, or other acceptable
lined in Nonmandatory Appendix QR-A and IEEE industry practices, as documented in the Qualification
Standard 344. Active mechanical equipment shall be Report.
demonstrated capable of performing its defined func-
tion before, during, or after a design basis event as speci- QR-7323 Qualification. The active mechanical
fied in the qualification specification. If specified, equipment shall be considered to be qualified by analysis
functionality of equipment during a dynamic transient if the active mechanical equipment is demonstrated to
shall utilize the normal system fluid. Use of an alterna- meet or exceed its specified function for design basis
tive fluid is acceptable, if justified. events and postdesign basis events at the end of its
qualified life. The active mechanical equipment quali-
QR-7313 Qualification. Interfaces and interrela- fied life shall be equal to the age of the equipment
tionships between components shall reflect the in-plant assumed when performing the design basis event
configuration. Otherwise, active mechanical equipment analysis.
shall be tested as an assembled unit. Active mechanical
equipment shall be considered to be qualified by test if QR-7330 Qualification by Earthquake Experience.
it can be demonstrated to meet or exceed its specified Data from the earthquake performance of active
functions for applicable design basis and postdesign mechanical equipment may be used as the basis for
basis events at the end of its qualified life. Active seismic qualification. Qualification of active mechanical
mechanical equipment qualified life shall be equal to equipment by use of earthquake experience should con-
the equivalent age of the tested unit prior to undergoing sider the requirements in Nonmandatory Appendix
design basis event simulation. QR-A.
QR-7320 Qualification by Analysis. Qualification by QR-7331 Aging. Significant aging mechanisms
analysis shall consist of the assessment of stresses, shall be identified. If aging mechanisms are anticipated
5
ASME QME-1–2007
in the candidate equipment, which are not represented QR-7350 Combined Methods. Active mechanical
in the earthquake experience, then qualification meth- equipment may be qualified by a combination of test,
ods other than earthquake experience may be required. analysis, and earthquake experience or similarity pro-
vided partial qualification achieved under multiple pro-
QR-7332 Dynamic Loading. Significant dynamic cedures can be articulated in a logical fashion to justify
loads not represented in the earthquake experience that the overall equipment qualification. For example, where
act concurrently with seismic loads for the candidate size, application, time, or other limitations preclude the
equipment shall be addressed by supplemental qualifi- use of a test on the complete active mechanical equip-
cation methods. ment assembly, testing of components supplemented by
analysis may be used in the qualification process.
QR-7333 Qualification. The candidate equipment
shall be considered to be qualified by earthquake experi-
ence if demonstrated to be bounded by the body of
QR-8000 DOCUMENTATION
documented equipment performance from facilities that A Qualification Report shall be prepared. The Qualifi-
experienced natural earthquakes. cation Report shall establish that the active mechanical
equipment is qualified for its application and meets its
QR-7340 Qualification by Similarity. There are qualification specification requirements as defined in
many instances of active mechanical equipment similar QR-6000. Documentation shall demonstrate that
to a type that was previously qualified, which differs (a) the qualification requirements are satisfied
only in size or in the assembly or structure. The candi- (b) the qualified life is determined and the basis estab-
date active mechanical equipment may be qualified by lished
demonstrating that it is similar in excitation and physical In addition, any aging processes not treated during
and dynamic characteristics to the previously qualified initial qualification, but addressed by in-service surveil-
active mechanical equipment. The validity of this lance monitoring, shall be specifically identified.
method depends on demonstrating similarity of the can- Qualification documentation shall be prepared and
didate active mechanical equipment and the previously maintained in accordance with the Owner’s applicable
qualified active mechanical equipment [QR-3000(b)]. Quality Assurance Program.
6
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QR-A (07)
Seismic Qualification of Active Mechanical Equipment
QR-A1000 SCOPE IEEE Standard 344-87, Recommended Practices for

Seismic Qualification of Class IE Equipment for
This Nonmandatory Appendix applies to active
Nuclear Power Generating Stations, Institute of
mechanical equipment in nuclear power plants that must
Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 1987
be qualified to function when subjected to earthquake
(seismic) loads. Publisher: Institute of Electrical and Electronics
08854-1331
QR-A2000 PURPOSE
Advanced Light Water Reactor (ALWR) First-of-a-Kind
The purpose of this Nonmandatory Appendix is to
Engineering Project on Equipment Seismic
provide the requirements and recommended practices
Qualification, Advanced Reactor Corporation (ARC),
to demonstrate that active mechanical equipment in
April 1995
nuclear power plants can function during or following
design basis earthquake. Kana, D.J., and Pomerening, D.J., NUREG/CR-5012,
Similarity Principles for Equipment Qualification by
Experience, July 1988
QR-A3000 REFERENCES NRC Supplemental Safety Evaluation Reports on the
GIP, Revision 2, Corrected 2/14/92 (SSER No. 2) and
The references listed below have been used to obtain
the GIP, Revision 3, Updated 5/16/97 (SSER No. 3),
guidance, concepts, principles, practices, and criteria in
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
the preparation of this Nonmandatory Appendix.
NUREG/CR-6464, “An Evaluation of Methodology for
ANSI/ASME OM-S/G-2000, “Standards and Guides for Seismic Qualification of Equipment, Cable Trays, and
Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants,” Ducts in ALWR Plants by Use of Experience Data.”
Part 3 “Requirements for Preoperational and Initial USNRC, 1997
Start-Up Vibration Testing of Nuclear Power Plant Regulatory Guide 1.60, Design Response Spectra for
Piping Systems” Nuclear Power Plants, U.S. Atomic Energy
Publisher: American National Standards Institute Commission, Washington, D.C., 1973
(ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036 Regulatory Guide 1.61, Damping Values for Seismic
ASCE Standard 4, Seismic Analysis of Safety Related Design of Nuclear Power Plants, U.S. Atomic Energy
Nuclear Structures and Commentary on Standard for Commission, Washington, D.C., 1973
Seismic Analysis of Safety Related Nuclear Structures, Regulatory Guide 1.100, Revision 2, Seismic
American Society of Civil Engineers Qualification of Electric and Mechanical Equipment
for Nuclear Power Plants, June 1988
Publisher: American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE),
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 SQUG Generic Implementation Procedure (GIP) for
Seismic Verification of Nuclear Plant Equipment,
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Revision 3, Updated May 16, 1997, Seismic Qualifica-
Appendix N, Dynamic Analysis Methods, The tion Utility Group (SQUG)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers Standard Review Plan Section 3.7.2, Seismic Systems
Publisher: The American Society of Mechanical Analysis, NUREG-0800 1987
Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New York, NY Standard Review Plan Section 3.7.3, Seismic Subsystem
10016-5990; Order Department: 22 Law Drive, P.O. Box Analysis, Rev. 2, NUREG-0800, August 1989
2300, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300 Standard Review Plan Section 3.10, Seismic and
EPRI NP-5228-SL, Seismic Verification of Nuclear Plant Dynamic Qualification of Mechanical and Electrical
Equipment Anchorage (Revision 1), Volume 1: Equipment, NUREG-0800, 1987
Development of Anchorage Guidelines, June 1991 Publisher: U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC),
Publisher: Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), 3420 One White Flint North, 11555 Rockville Pike, Rock-
Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94304 ville, MD 20852
7
ASME QME-1–2007
QR-A4000 DEFINITIONS effective mass ratio: the ratio of the effective mass consid-
ered in the response to the total effective mass for the
The definitions below establish the meanings of words
equipment or structure.
in the context of their use in this Appendix. The defini-
tions in Section QR are also applicable for use in this equivalent static load: an equivalent statically applied load
Appendix. or acceleration based on a function of the peak of the
acceleration design value (ADV): acceleration value that applicable response spectrum that may be used as an
may be used as an alternative response spectrum or alternative to response spectrum or time history to
time history to define seismic input for design of active define seismic input for design of active mechanical
mechanical equipment. equipment.
assembly: two or more connected components that may flexible equipment: active mechanical equipment includ-
be qualified as a unit. ing the effects of the active mechanical equipment sup-
ports whose lowest natural frequency is less than the
attachment: an item that is appended to a device, compo- frequency value at the start of the ZPA (Zero Period
nent, or assembly. Acceleration) or the cutoff frequency of the applicable
broadband response spectrum: a response spectrum that response spectrum.
describes motion in which amplified response occurs foundation: the structure that supports or otherwise pro-
over a wide (broad) range of frequencies. vides restraint to active mechanical equipment and
coherence: the coherence function defines a comparative buildings.
relationship between two time histories. It provides a
Fourier spectrum: the Fourier spectrum is a complex val-
statistical estimate of how much two motions are related
ued function that provides amplitude and phase infor-
as a function of frequency. The numerical range is from
mation as a function of frequency for a time domain
0, for unrelated, to 1, for perfectly correlated motions.
waveform.
correlation coefficient: the correlation coefficient function
fragility: susceptibility of active mechanical equipment
defines a comparative relationship between two time
to malfunction as a result of structural or operational
histories. It provides a statistical estimate of how much
limitations or both when subjected to dynamic exci-
two motions are related as a function of time delay. The
tation.
numerical range is from 0, for unrelated, to 1, for related
motions. fragility level: the highest level of excitation parameters
that equipment can withstand and still perform the spec-
cutoff frequency: the frequency in the response spectrum
ified functions (note that the fragility level may include
where the Zero Period Acceleration asymptote essen-
the interdependence of amplitude, frequency, and time).
tially begins. This is the frequency beyond which the
single-degree-of-freedom oscillators exhibit very little or ground acceleration: the acceleration time history of the
no amplification of motion and indicates the upper limit ground resulting from the motion of a given earthquake.
of the frequency content of the waveform being The maximum amplitude ground acceleration is the ZPA
analyzed. of the ground response spectrum.
cycle: one complete sequence of values of an alternating inclusion rules: the physical and operational characteris-
quantity. tics that define an acceptable range of equipment physi-
cal characteristics, dynamic characteristics, and
damping: a generic name ascribed to the energy dissipa-
functions for ensuring seismic ruggedness and defining
tion mechanisms or small, otherwise unrepresented non-
the bounds of active mechanical equipment included in
linearities which reduce the amplification and broaden
a reference equipment class (see QR-A7421).
the vibratory response in the region of resonance. One-
hundred percent critical damping is defined as the least independent items: items of equipment which have differ-
amount of equivalent viscous damping that causes a ent physical characteristics or experience different seis-
single-degree-of-freedom system to return to its original mic motion characteristics, e.g., different earthquakes,
position without oscillation after initial disturbance. sites, buildings, or orientations/locations in the same
device: an item that is used in connection with, or as an building.
auxiliary to, other items of equipment on which it may in-line active mechanical equipment: active mechanical
be mounted. equipment whose loads are caused by the distribution
earthquake experience spectrum (EES): the earthquake- system in which it is installed.
based response spectrum that defines the seismic capac- load path: structural path necessary to transmit the seis-
ity of a reference equipment class. mic forces from the active mechanical equipment centers
effective mass: the mass of the structure or equipment of mass through to the anchorage.
that participates in determining the dynamic response low-cycle fatigue: a progressive fracture or cumulative
of the structure or equipment. fatigue damage of the material that may be inflicted by
8
ASME QME-1–2007
fewer than 1,000 cycles of load because of localized stress rigid equipment: active mechanical equipment, including
concentration at high strains under fluctuating loads. the effects of the active mechanical equipment supports,
mass ratio: the ratio of the active mechanical equipment whose lowest natural frequency is greater than the fre-
mass (secondary) to the building mass (primary) partici- quency value at the start of the zero period acceleration
pating in the response. (ZPA) or the cutoff frequency of the applicable response
spectrum.
median-centered in-structure response spectrum: in-struc-
ture response spectrum developed using realistic damp- ruggedness: ability of active mechanical equipment to
ing and best estimate modeling parameters to obtain maintain its structural integrity and perform its specified
the most probable structural amplification that could function when subjected to dynamic excitation.
realistically occur for the level of the specified earth- seismic proof test: a seismic test conducted to a specified
quake ground motion. required response spectrum level.
narrow band response spectrum: a response spectrum that Seismic Qualification Specification (SQS): the document
describes motion in which amplified response occurs that describes the seismic qualification requirements to
over a limited (narrow) range of frequencies. be met in the qualification of the active mechanical
natural frequency: the frequency or frequencies at which equipment.
a body vibrates due to its own physical characteristics sine beats: a continuous sinusoid, of one frequency, with
(mass and stiffness) when the body is distorted in a its amplitude modulated by a sinusoid of a lower fre-
specific direction and then released. quency.
octave: the interval between two frequencies that have stationarity: a waveform is stationary if its amplitude
a frequency ratio of 2. distribution, frequency content, and other descriptive
power spectral density (PSD): the mean squared amplitude parameters are statistically constant with time.
per unit frequency of a waveform. PSD is expressed in structure: a combination of physical members that makes
grams squared per Hertz versus frequency for accelera- an item, such as a building or support, designed to
tion waveforms. sustain a load.
prohibited features: design details, materials, construction structural diameter: the diameter of a circle having the
features, or installation characteristics that have resulted equivalent area of the facility foundation.
in seismic-induced failure or malfunction of active structural integrity: a condition describing an assembly
mechanical equipment at earthquake excitations up to or grouping of active mechanical equipment relative to
and including the defined seismic capacity level. their ability to carry applicable loads within the limits
qualification life: see definition in Section QR. of acceptable structural behavior.
reference equipment class: a group of active mechanical system: an assembly or grouping of active mechanical
equipment sharing common attributes as defined by a equipment that performs a specific plant function.
set of inclusion rules and prohibited features. test response spectrum (TRS): the response spectrum that
reference site: a site containing active mechanical equip- is developed from the actual time history motion of the
ment or items used to establish a reference equipment shake table or other dynamic input device.
class. transfer function: the transfer function is a complex fre-
required input motion (RIM): the input motion in terms quency response function that defines the dynamic char-
of either acceleration, velocity, or displacement acteristics of a constant parameter linear system. For an
expressed as a function of frequency, for which the active ideal system, the transfer function is the ratio of the
mechanical equipment or component is qualified for its Fourier transform of the output to that of a given input.
acceptance criteria. The output/input ratio function versus frequency is
required response spectrum (RRS): the response spectrum called a transmissibility function.
issued by the Owner or his designee as part of the specifi- zero period acceleration (ZPA): the high-frequency acceler-
cation for seismically qualifying active mechanical ation level of the nonamplified portion of the response
equipment. The RRS constitutes a requirement to be met spectrum is referred to as zero period acceleration or
in qualifying active mechanical equipment. generally called ZPA. This acceleration corresponds to
resonance frequency: a frequency at which peak response the maximum acceleration amplitude of the time history
occurs in a structure, component, or system subject to used to derive the spectrum.
forced vibration.
response spectrum: a plot of the maximum response, as QR-A5000 EARTHQUAKE ENVIRONMENT AND
a function of oscillator frequency, of an array of single- EQUIPMENT RESPONSE
degree-of-freedom (SDOF) damped oscillators subjected This Section provides background on earthquake
to the same base excitation. behavior and methods for simulating seismic events.
9
ASME QME-1–2007
QR-A5100 Earthquake Environment conservatively neglected. The seismic input motions for
Earthquakes produce six degrees of freedom (three components mounted on flexible systems may be
translational and three rotational) random ground defined in terms of required input motion (RIM). In
motions. These motions, for design purposes, are charac- addition to inertia effects, the potential for relative
terized by simultaneous but statistically independent motion between a distribution system and its support-
components, two horizontal and one vertical. The ing building structure, or between a branch and main
strong-motion portion of the earthquake normally con- line, may be a significant earthquake effect.
sidered in design may last 10 sec to 15 sec, although the QR-A5500 Nonlinear Equipment Response
measurable earthquake motion duration may be consid-
erably longer. For earthquakes with zero period ground Nonlinearity in active mechanical equipment
accelerations in excess of about 0.35 g, the strong-motion response may exist in addition to the minor nonlinear
durations often exceed 15 sec. The ground motion is effects typically associated with damping. These nonlin-
typically broadbanded and random, and amplified earities may be of a geometric nature, such as rocking
response can occur over a frequency range of 1 Hz to or sliding, a working of connections and rattling of com-
33 Hz. ponents, or a material behavior source, such as yielding.
These effects may result in a significant change in stiff-
QR-A5200 Active Mechanical Equipment on ness as a function of load. If a system exhibits significant
Foundations nonlinearity, such behavior should be recognized and
accounted for to accurately predict or bound the active
The vibratory nature of the ground motion (both hori-
mechanical equipment response. If the nonlinearities
zontal and vertical) can be amplified or attenuated for
cannot be adequately analyzed, testing is required.
in-structure, mounted active mechanical equipment. For
Nonlinearity may also occur as a result of local vibra-
any given ground motion, the alteration depends on the
tions, contact, or impact of active mechanical equipment.
system’s natural frequencies of vibration (soil, equip-
Such examples include the closing of gaps between the
ment support, and equipment) and the mechanisms of
active mechanical equipment and its supports or
damping and mass ratio between the equipment and
restraints and the high-frequency rattling of valves sub-
foundation. The response spectra, which describe
ject to piping interaction with supporting or adjacent
ground motion, are typically broadband, indicating that
active mechanical equipment on structures. When such
multiple frequency excitation predominates.
nonlinear response conditions exist, the qualification
QR-A5300 Active Mechanical Equipment on procedure shall account for such behavior.
Structures QR-A5600 Simulating the Earthquake
The ground motion (horizontal and vertical) may be The goal of seismic simulation is to reproduce the
filtered by intervening building structures to produce postulated earthquake environment in a realistic manner
either amplified or attenuated narrow band motions that is amenable for use in active mechanical equipment
within the structure. The dynamic response of active qualification. The form of the simulated seismic input
mechanical equipment on structures may be further used for qualification of equipment by analysis or testing
amplified or attenuated to an acceleration level many may be described by one of the following functions:
times more or, in some instances, less than that of the required input motion, response spectrum, time history,
maximum ground acceleration, depending upon the power spectral density, acceleration, or equivalent static
structure and equipment damping, effective mass ratios, load design value. This input may be generated for the
and natural frequencies. The narrow band response indi- foundation, floor of the building, or system upon which
cates that single frequency excitation of active mechani- the active mechanical equipment is to be mounted. It is
cal equipment subcomponents can predominate. supplied by the Owner or designee to the manufacturer
as a part of the Seismic Qualification Specification (SQS)
QR-A5400 Active Mechanical Equipment on Systems for that equipment, or it is generated by the manufac-
(in Line) turer to generically cover future applications.
Similar filtering of in-structure motion may occur in Because of the directional nature of seismic motion,
flexible distribution (piping and ducting) systems. For as well as the filtered response motion of structures and
components mounted away from system supports, the in-line systems on which active mechanical equipment
resultant motion may be predominantly single fre- may be mounted, the directional components of the
quency in nature and centered near or at the local reso- motion and their application to the active mechanical
nance frequency of the distribution (piping) system. This equipment shall be specified. Active mechanical equip-
resonance condition may produce the most critical seis- ment can be mounted at varying locations. In addition,
mic load on components mounted in the system line. the mounting or anchorage of the active mechanical
Mass ratio effects or dynamic coupling, which typically equipment can affect the seismic response of the active
reduces the response of the in-line equipment, is often mechanical equipment. In generation of the postulated
10
ASME QME-1–2007
earthquake environment, these factors should be consid- by use of the peak spectral acceleration of the applicable
ered and incorporated as required. required response spectrum or the ZPA if the component
can be shown to be rigid. A coefficient of 1.5 times these
QR-A5610 Required Input Motion. The test input
peak values is often used to account for multimode and
motion in terms of accelerations, velocities, or displace-
multiple frequency response. However, values less than
ments is expressed as a function of frequency, which is
1.5 may be used if justified [see QR-A3000(c) and (j)].
applied in the form of a continuous series of sine beats
or sinusoids at defined amplitudes and durations over
the frequency range of interest (typically 1 Hz to 33 Hz) QR-A6000 SEISMIC QUALIFICATION
and shall be consistent with the requirements of IEEE REQUIREMENTS
Standard 344-1987 [QR-A3000(a)].
The seismic qualification of active mechanical equip-
QR-A5620 Response Spectrum. The response spec- ment should demonstrate the ability of the active
trum provides information on the maximum response mechanical equipment to perform its specified function
of single-degree-of-freedom oscillators as a function of during and/or after the time it is subjected to the earth-
oscillator frequency and damping when subjected to an quake loadings defined in the seismic qualification spec-
input time history motion. The frequency content as well ification. The most commonly used methods for seismic
as the peak amplitude ZPA of the input motion are also qualification of active mechanical equipment are
indicated. described in this document. The methods are grouped
It is important to recognize that the response spectrum into the following five general categories:
does not supply the following information:
(a) predict and evaluate the active mechanical equip-
(a) the unique waveform or time history of the excita-
ment’s performance by analysis
tion that produced it
(b) test the active mechanical equipment under simu-
(b) the duration of motion (this shall be given sepa-
lated seismic conditions
rately in the SQS)
(c) qualification of the active mechanical equipment
(c) the response of any particular active mechanical
by extrapolation of tests or analysis results from similar
equipment during a test
equipment (similarity)
The application of different waveforms shall meet the
(d) qualify the active mechanical equipment by use
requirements of IEEE Standard 344-1987 [QR-A3000(a)].
of earthquake experience data
QR-A5630 Time History. The expected form of the (e) perform evaluations of the active mechanical
motion is generally obtained from existing or artificially equipment by combined analysis, test, and/or experi-
generated earthquake records. It may also be generated ence data
such that its response spectrum will essentially match Each of the preceding methods may be used to verify
a given response spectrum. For application at any floor, the ability of the active mechanical equipment to meet
the time history record generated includes the dynamic the seismic qualification requirements. The choice
filtering and amplification effects of the building and should be based on the practicality of the method for
other intervening support structures. the type, size, shape, and complexity of the equipment,
The mean squared amplitude per unit frequency of the available database, whether the required safety func-
the vibratory motion is characterized in terms of the tion can be assessed in terms of structural integrity alone,
Power Spectral Density, PSD, as a function of frequency. and the reliability of the conclusions. When the specified
Although, unlike the time history, the PSD function functions of active mechanical equipment require a dem-
does not define the unique waveform or duration of the onstration of functionality during the earthquake, the
excitation, it is a valuable tool. It enables significant active mechanical equipment specified function shall be
frequency-dependent properties of the motion to be seen demonstrated during the strong-motion portion of the
at a glance from one curve. If only one time history is earthquake.
used to match a given required response spectrum, the The effects of active mechanical equipment repairs
PSD should be used to ensure proper frequency content and part replacements on the performance of active
of the time history. mechanical equipment in the qualification programs
QR-A5640 Acceleration or Equivalent Static Load shall also be considered.
Design Values. Components or active mechanical
equipment may be qualified analytically by applying a QR-A6100 Design Basis Earthquake
limiting acceleration design value (ADV) to the mass The Design Basis Earthquake for which active
distribution of the component or equipment in order to mechanical equipment shall be qualified is the SSE. Seis-
determine limiting equivalent static forces in all three mic qualification for functionality for the OBE shall be
orthogonal directions. The ADV shall be provided in the conducted if required in the Seismic Qualification Speci-
Seismic Qualification Specification (QR-A8200). When a fication by the Owner or designee. In such instances,
response spectrum is specified, the ADV is determined the methods and procedures contained in this Appendix
11
ASME QME-1–2007
Table QR-A6210-1 Damping Values: Percent of available to measure damping. Considerable care shall
Critical Damping be exercised in making the transition from an idealized
Earthquake Magnitude
model to a practical system. For example, it is rarely
possible to locate precise points in active mechanical
Operating Basis Safe Shutdown
equipment that have exact correspondence with the
Structure or Component Earthquake Earthquake
lumped mass elements in a model. Some methods of
Equipment 2 3 calculating modal damping, such as the Q method, rely
Piping systems 5 5 purely on single-degree-of-freedom assumptions.
Welded steel structures 2 4 Damping is calculated directly from the maximum
Bolted steel structures 4 7 response at the resonance peak measure at any point in
the active mechanical equipment and the magnitude of
the sine sweep input excitation. These methods are not
may also be used to qualify active mechanical equipment generally acceptable since the response of points in
for the OBE. active mechanical equipment is usually determined by
the mode shape vector and participation factor for each
QR-A6200 Damping vibration mode. The following methods for evaluating
QR-A6210 Introduction. Damping is the generic the damping are commonly used, but other justifiable
name ascribed to the numerous energy dissipation methods may be used. These methods assume that a
mechanisms in a system. In practice, damping depends single mode of vibration can be excited in the active
on many parameters, such as the structural system, mechanical equipment and that motion transducers are
modes of vibration, strain levels, velocity, material prop- mounted at positions other than at a point of zero
erties, joint slippage, etc. In linear vibration theory, the motion. In all cases, care should be exercised to deter-
simplifying assumption is made that damping is purely mine whether damping nonlinearity with responses
viscous or proportional to the relative velocity of moving amplitude is significant.
parts. Therefore, when a value of damping is associated QR-A6221 Damping by Measuring the Decay Rate.
with a practical system, it is usually assumed to be The equivalent viscous damping can be calculated by
equivalent viscous or linear. This is a convenient way of recording the decay rate of the particular mode of vibra-
relating real-world hardware behavior, which is usually tion. This procedure is often referred to as the logarithmic
nonlinear to some degree, with theoretical concepts, decrement method.
which normally utilize linear methods of analysis.
For active mechanical equipment composed of an QR-A6222 Damping by Measuring the Half-Power
assembly of components, there is usually no single Bandwidth. The active mechanical equipment is typi-
damping value. Damping is associated with types of cally excited with a slow sine sweep test. The response
connections used, ranging from bolted to welded con- of any desired location in the equipment is measured
struction, and is strongly affected by boundary condi- and plotted as a function of frequency. The damping
tions, including gaps and joint slippage. The value of associated with each mode may be calculated by mea-
damping may vary from place to place depending on surements of the width of the respective resonance peak
the numerous other factors previously mentioned and at the half-power point. This procedure is often referred
may be termed local damping. The structural damping to as the half-power bandwidth method.
that is typically defined for use in seismic evaluations QR-A6223 Damping by Curve Fitting Methods. The
is called global damping and is a composite of the local active mechanical equipment is typically excited by
damping values of the system. For such instances, it is swept sine, random, or transient excitation, and a
recommended that the best estimate values of structural response transfer function is developed. The modal
damping be used in active mechanical equipment quali- damping to the actual frequency is obtained by fitting
fication, rather than some lower bound value. In the a mathematical model to the actual frequency response
absence of specific damping criteria, the values con- data (transfer function). This curve fitting will smooth
tained in Table QR-A6210-1 should be used for Response out any noise or small experimental errors.
Spectrum Modal analysis.
Since each mode of vibration of a structure can, and QR-A6230 The Application of Damping. Ranges of
often does, have a different value of damping as a func- damping, measured as described in QR-A6220, are valu-
tion of modal mass and stiffness, a useful practice in able data for the active mechanical equipment designer.
analysis is to associate a value of damping to each mode Damping is used differently in analysis and testing in
of vibration of the equipment that is in the frequency active mechanical equipment qualification as described
range of interest. in QR-A6231 and QR-A6232.
QR-A6220 Measurement of Damping. Linear vibra- QR-A6231 The Application of Damping in Analysis.
tion theory indicates that there are numerous methods In analysis, a mathematical model is made of the active
12
ASME QME-1–2007
mechanical equipment so as to predict the response to (1) When the damping for the TRS is greater than
the seismic motion. The value of damping used in this that for the RRS and the criteria in QR-A7200 are satis-
model shall correspond to the actual energy dissipation fied, then the qualification is acceptable since under this
in the active mechanical equipment to enable the circumstance, it is conservative.
response to be accurately predicted. An alternative (2) When the damping in the TRS is less than that in
approach is to use a conservative value of linear damp- the RRS, a conclusive statement is not possible without
ing, such as shown in Table QR-A6210-1, to obtain a further evaluation. One possibility is to reanalyze the
conservative estimate of response. In any case, there is test motions to produce a TRS for an acceptable damping
need to know the ranges of damping for the specific value and apply the criteria given in either (a) or (b)(1)
equipment and nature of nonlinearities and their effect above.
on the response. Appropriate values of damping shall
QR-A6300 Required Response Spectrum
be obtained from tests or other justifiable sources.
It is reasonable to state that actual damping is nonlin- The response spectrum to be used in seismic qualifica-
ear by nature. In most active mechanical equipment, it tion of active mechanical equipment is the required
is a function of response amplitude owing to such factors response spectrum (RRS) as provided in the Seismic
as internal friction within material, or at connections Qualification Specification by the Owner or designee.
between components, or Coulomb-type sliding friction. The RRS is typically the building filtered response spec-
For analytical purposes, these energy dissipation damp- trum at mounting location of the active mechanical
ing mechanisms may often be treated in terms of linear equipment. For in-line active mechanical equipment
damping approximations if proper consideration is qualified in accordance with QR-A7400, the RRS is typi-
cally the building filtered response spectrum at the dis-
given to the fact that these approximations vary, some-
tribution system support attachments to the building.
times significantly, with increasing response. As an
example, the use of low-impedance testing to determine QR-A6400 Required Input Motion
damping shall be exercised with caution since at strong
Required input motion (RIM) in seismic evaluations is
motion shaking, indicative of significant earthquakes,
normally associated with active mechanical equipment
the aforementioned factors may cause the real damping mounted in distribution system (piping or duct) lines
to be quite different and higher than that measured at where the single mode seismic input to the component
low levels. is dominated by the seismic response of the distribution
Generally, most treatment of structural systems system (line), and qualification is performed by test for
assumes viscous damping; however, certain cabinets or generic application to a wide range of line frequencies.
housings may exhibit nonviscous damping. The treat- The input to a distribution system is typically a ran-
ment of such a problem is analytically complex and shall dom excitation with broad frequency content. The
be performed using appropriate techniques. dynamic characteristics of the system amplify the excita-
tion at the system resonance frequencies and suppress
QR-A6232 The Application of Damping in Testing.
the other frequencies. The maximum response occurs at
In testing, the active mechanical equipment may be qual-
the predominant distribution system frequencies.
ified by subjecting it to a simulated seismic motion as
A method that meets the above seismic input simula-
defined by the required response spectrum (RRS). The
tion criteria for active mechanical equipment mounted
response spectrum defines the seismic motion by way
in the distribution system is either a sine beat test or a
of the peak response of an array of single-degree-of-
relatively short duration sine dwell test at several fre-
freedom damped oscillators. Since the oscillators are
quencies. The minimum peak test amplitude shall be
hypothetical, any practical value of damping (e.g., 5%)
that which the distribution system is expected to expe-
may be employed in the RRS for testing, and it need not
rience.
correspond to the actual active mechanical equipment A series of continuous sine beats or sinusoids at vary-
damping (Note the distinction from the use of the RRS ing amplitudes as defined by the RIM is recommended
in analysis where the value of damping shall be related for qualification by test. To ensure the excitation of all
to the actual active mechanical equipment). The applica- predominant resonance frequencies, the sine beats shall
tion of the RRS and the test response spectrum (TRS) be applied at one-third octave intervals over the fre-
in selecting acceptable test motions is given in quency range of 1 Hz to 33 Hz. The test amplitude shall
QR-A7200. The following relationships exist for the val- correspond to the levels specified for response of the
ues of damping in the response spectra: distribution system. This amplitude shall be indepen-
(a) In comparing the RRS with the TRS, the damping dent of direction. Hence, single-axis excitation is permit-
in the two should be the same. ted, with the axes corresponding to the apparent most
(b) In some cases, however, when past test data are critical direction of the active mechanical equipment.
used for a new RRS, the damping in the two cases may For the cases where a component in a distribution
be different, and the following circumstances apply: system is closely restrained by a support back to the
13
ASME QME-1–2007
building or other supporting structure, RRS or response For the latter option, the maximum displacement of
spectra techniques, as provided in QR-A6300, are recom- each support shall be predicted by the relationship
mended for qualification rather than the RIM test proce-
dure just described, unless the RIM has been Zd p Zag/w2
conservatively established with regard to the RRS.
where
QR-A6500 Acceleration or Equivalent Static Load g p gravitational constant
Design Values w p equal to the predominant frequency of the pri-
Active mechanical equipment may be seismically mary support structure in radians per second
qualified analytically by use of acceleration design val- Za p spectral acceleration in g at the ZPA end of the
ues (ADV) used to develop equivalent static loads. These spectrum curve
are single value accelerations which shall be applied
The relative displacements between supports shall be
statically to the active mechanical equipment in accor-
determined by using the square root sum of squares
dance with the mass distribution simultaneously along
method if it is demonstrated that they are uncorrelated.
the two principal horizontal and vertical directions.
Otherwise, they shall be determined by the absolute
Resultant limiting stresses, deflections, and reactions are
combined with other applicable load phenomena and sum method.
evaluated against the applicable acceptance criteria to For in-line components (e.g., valves) supported by
demonstrate design adequacy. The ADV are determined both the line and primary structure, relative displace-
as a function of the peak of the applicable required ments shall be determined by the absolute sum method.
response spectrum or from the ZPA of the required
QR-A6700 Loads to Be Considered in Qualification
response spectrum if rigidity can be demonstrated. The
response spectral peak value should be multiplied by a The loads to be considered in the seismic qualification
suitable coefficient that accounts for the potential effects of active mechanical equipment are defined in the Quali-
of higher modes or incomplete or missing modes associ- fication Specification. They shall be made part of the
ated with static versus dynamic mode shapes. For active Seismic Qualification Specification required to seis-
mechanical equipment supported at more than two mically qualify the required function or performance of
points, a coefficient of 1.5 shall be used unless adequate the active mechanical equipment.
justification for a lower value is provided.
QR-A6800 Fatigue and Aging Considerations
QR-A6600 Differential Support Motion
QR-A6810 Fatigue. Equipment qualification for
In addition to the inertial loading developed from multiple seismic events of lower levels than the required
seismic accelerations, additional loads may be induced response spectrum, such as five OBEs, is achieved when
on active mechanical equipment supported at two or applying the methods of this Section to the evaluation
more points which are undergoing relative support of the single enveloping required response spectrum,
motion associated with the motion of the supporting provided the equipment is shown to have no credible,
structures. In general, most active mechanical equip- low-cycle fatigue failure modes considering the number
ment is supported at a single point or because of the of specified earthquake cycles. For applications that
relatively high stiffness and required elastic response to involve fatigue-sensitive features, supplementary analy-
earthquake motions of nuclear power plant structures, sis is required.
differential support motions are usually negligible and Seismic loads, being vibratory in nature, give rise to
have little effect on the seismic-induced forces on equip- cyclic loading of components; hence, there is a potential
ment. Therefore, differential support motions are not
for fatigue-type failures. However, the number of maxi-
normally considered in the seismic evaluation of active
mum stress cycles from a given earthquake is limited.
mechanical equipment, except for active mechanical
This Appendix assumes for ASME Class 1 components
equipment or a component that is supported at three or
that there are 60 full-stress cycles during the plant life.
more points on the same structure, at two or more points
This cyclic input assumes the potential of five OBEs or
on different structures, or between in-line components
aftershocks and one SSE.
and the supporting structure. In these cases, the active
Other cyclic loads induced on the mechanical equip-
mechanical equipment qualification shall consider the
ment by valve operation, equipment start or stop, flow,
effects of differential support motions.
or rotating equipment vibration and temperature ranges
QR-A6610 Evaluation for Differential Support shall be considered in evaluating the overall fatigue life
Motions. The maximum relative support displace- of the component or otherwise be limited to such a low
ments can be obtained from the supporting structure magnitude that they do not exceed the endurance limit
structural response calculations or by using the applica- for the material used in the equipment [e.g., ANSI/
ble floor response spectra. ASME OM-S/G-2000; see QR-A3000].
14
ASME QME-1–2007
The use of this Standard for the qualification of equip- (a) review the active mechanical equipment to assess
ment fabricated from nonmetallic materials might not the dynamic characteristics
preclude fatigue failure for low cycle loading up to 60 (b) determine the response using one or more of sev-
cycles. If such fatigue failure is possible, it is recom- eral methods described in the following sections
mended that such materials be qualified by separate (c) determine the behavior (stresses, deformation, dis-
tests or use of acceptable alternative techniques to placements, rotations, loads, loss or initiation of contact
ensure no fatigue failure. at interface, etc.) that results from the response
QR-A6820 Aging. Aging in mechanical components (d) compare the calculated behavior with those which
is associated with corrosion, erosion, wear, particle would ensure compliance with specified function
deposits, and embrittlement. In new construction, corro- requirements
sion and erosion are considered by providing additional The review stage shall take into account the complex-
material thickness as a corrosion or erosion allowance ity of the active mechanical equipment and the adequacy
above that required in design. Aging effects for active of analytical techniques to properly predict the equip-
mechanical equipment shall be addressed to ensure ment’s functionality while subjected to seismic excita-
functionality for the life of the equipment. tion. The response determination phase of the analysis
may take several paths, the first of which is determined
QR-A6900 Installation of Active Mechanical by the choice between the dynamic analysis method
Equipment in the Nuclear Power Plant (QR-A7120) and static coefficient method (QR-A7130).
It is the responsibility of the Owner or his designee In general, the choice is based on the perceived strength
to ensure that the method used to support the active margin of the active mechanical equipment, since the
mechanical equipment when installed in the plant is static coefficient method, while easier and more econom-
consistent with the support method used in the equip- ical to perform, is generally more conservative.
ment qualification and meets the plant design basis The mathematical models used for analysis shall be
requirements. based on structural parameters which are calculated or
on parameters established by test or a combination of
these. They shall also represent the stiffness properties
QR-A7000 QUALIFICATION METHODS
and boundary conditions of the active mechanical
There are five methods, listed below, that may be equipment. The model shall be sufficiently refined to
applied for the seismic qualification of active mechanical ensure mathematical representation of all significant
equipment. modes of vibration and allow the evaluation of all perti-
(a) qualification by analysis nent failure modes. This shall entail sufficient detail to
(b) qualification by testing illustrate relative motion of key points, coupling and
(c) qualification by similarity load transfer, etc. All significant active mechanical
(d) qualification by earthquake experience data equipment that interfaces with other equipment, compo-
(e) qualification by a combination of the above nents, assemblies, or systems shall be considered. These
methods interfaces shall include all significant eccentricity and
torsion-producing phenomena, such as the effects of
QR-A7100 Qualification by Analysis active mechanical equipment attachments.
QR-A7110 Introduction. Analytical procedures are The boundary condition of the mathematical model
summarized and referenced in this subarticle, which and its interface with other equipment and systems shall
may be used to demonstrate that active mechanical be effectively coordinated with the characterization of
equipment meet the specified structural integrity and the seismic input. If not previously considered in the
functionality requirements during and/or following the load definition, the mathematical model shall
earthquake loadings defined in the Seismic Qualification incorporate the effects of active mechanical equipment
Specification (QR-A8200). Analysis without testing or mounting and location (floor, wall, etc.), intervening ele-
earthquake experience data is acceptable only if struc- ments and structures (supports, platforms, etc.),
tural integrity as defined in QR-A4000 can ensure the intervening systems (pipe, duct, etc.), differential sup-
design-intended function. Functionality analysis is lim- port motion as discussed in QR-A6600, and excitation
ited to applications which can be quantified in terms of from other sources. The damping, which is used in the
a parameter (e.g., gap clearance) that can be calculated analysis, shall be provided in the Seismic Qualification
and a margin to loss of functionality can be established. Specification.
Two approaches to seismic analysis are described. One Using the calculated response, one then determines
approach is based on dynamic analysis, the other on the behavior of the active mechanical equipment in
static analysis. The methods described are most com- terms of structure integrity as related to the functional
monly used, but other methods may be used if they are requirements of the active mechanical equipment,
justified. The general procedure is to including operating loads. Such loads include internal
15
ASME QME-1–2007
pressure, operator thrust, dynamic transients, flow- QR-A7130 Static Analysis. This method of analysis
induced vibration, reciprocating and rotating equipment allows a simpler technique, which usually results in
vibrations, nozzle loading, etc. Applicable combinations added conservatism. No dynamic analysis is required.
of these loads are typically required in the analytical The acceleration response of the equipment is assumed
qualification process, and their effects shall be combined to be defined by the acceleration design value
with seismic effects, as appropriate, as defined in the (QR-A6500). The resultant inertial force, when the accel-
active mechanical equipment qualification specification. eration design value is applied to the mass distribution
Typically, analytical methods of active mechanical of the active mechanical equipment, is applied in the
equipment seismic qualification for functionality are three principal directions with a plus or minus sensing
limited to applications where all safety-related strength, to determine the worse resultant.
displacement, and functionality features can be effec- QR-A7140 Acceptance Criteria. Acceptance criteria
tively modeled and evaluated by analysis. to be used in qualification by analysis shall be applied to
QR-A7120 Dynamic Analysis the computed parameters associated with the identified
failure modes, which determine functional adequacy of
QR-A7121 Introduction. The active mechanical the active mechanical equipment. Acceptance criteria
equipment and supports shall be modeled to adequately shall be established in the input specification require-
represent their mass distribution and stiffness character- ment. Compliance with the acceptance criteria shall be
istics. This model may be used to perform a modal demonstrated in the Qualification Report.
(eigenvalue) analysis to determine the active mechanical
equipment’s dynamic characteristics (frequency and QR-A7200 Qualification by Analysis
mode shapes). Alternatively, an incremented time step QR-A7210 Introduction. Seismic qualification by
solution of the equations of motion may be used to testing requires that the active mechanical equipment
determine dynamic response. The time step integration be subjected to a simulated earthquake motion that is
procedure, while relatively costly, has the ability for anticipated to occur at the active mechanical equipment
direct determination of multiple independent support mounting. The test shall demonstrate that the active
motions and nonlinear response. mechanical equipment will perform its specified func-
tion during and/or after the seismic event. The nature
QR-A7122 Response Spectrum. The response of the simulated motion can vary significantly,
spectrum analysis allows the response of interest (defor- depending on whether the active mechanical equipment
mations, deflections, rotations, loads, stresses, strains, is to be installed at ground level or at some floor level
and initiation or loss of contact at interface) to be deter- within a building structure. Procedures necessary to
mined by combining all significant modes of vibrations. carry out such tests with a reasonable degree of conser-
A sufficient number of modes shall be included to ensure vatism are in most cases quite complex. Detailed guide-
an adequate representation of the equipment dynamic lines for typical test procedures for electrical equipment
response and reaction forces at supports. An acceptable have been provided by IEEE Standard 344 since 1975.
criterion for adequacy is that the inclusion of additional Since those guidelines were applicable to equipment in
modes does not result in more than a 10% increase in general, they have also been used for active mechanical
total response. The response is determined by combin- equipment. The policy of this Standard is to generally
ing each modal response by the square root of the sum endorse the continued use of IEEE Standard 344, so
of the squares (SRSS) criterion, except where closely Section 7.0 of that document shall provide the detailed
spaced modes are encountered. Closely spaced modes requirements for qualification of active mechanical
shall be appropriately considered in the response evalu- equipment by testing, except as modified by this Stan-
ation. Closely spaced modes are those with frequencies dard in QR-A7240. Only some general statements will
differing by 10% or less of the next lower frequency. be included herein, for the sake of continuity.
QR-A7123 Time Histories. When three compo- QR-A7220 Types of Tests

nents of the statistically independent time histories are QR-A7221 Exploratory Tests. Exploratory tests
input simultaneously for a time history analysis, the consist of the measurements of active mechanical equip-
responses may be combined algebraically at each time ment dynamic characteristics by some form of modal
increment. To ensure statistical independence, artifi- identification procedures. The active mechanical equip-
cially generated time histories should have coherence ment is mounted in a close simulation of that anticipated
values of less than 0.5 when computed with at least in the field. The active mechanical equipment is instru-
12 data samples. Alternatively, a correlation coefficient mented for measurement of responses at various loca-
with an absolute value of less than 0.3 for all time lags tions anticipated to be important to interior functioning
may be used as discussed in Appendix E of IEEE devices or at locations which provide a good indication
Standard 344. of structural modal characteristics. It is then subjected
16
ASME QME-1–2007
to a suitable excitation, and responses are recorded. mechanical equipment mounting for the SSE event. The
Components which may in themselves be rigid if flexibly general nature of earthquake motion can be represented
mounted or attached in the field shall have this flexibility by a nonstationary random process having broad fre-
represented during the test. In the past, sine sweep reso- quency content (i.e., 1 Hz to 33 Hz) at ground level, but
nance tests have been widely used for these tests. How- with much narrower frequency content near building
ever, random excitation or even simulated earthquake natural frequencies, when representing filtered motion
events may be used. Exploratory tests are not a require- at building floor levels. Several characteristics of seismic
ment for qualification directly and do not serve as the motion shall be noted when simulated waveforms are
basis for even partial seismic qualification, but their developed for testing purposes. These characteristics are
results may be used in further development of proce- understood to describe the motion that occurs at the
dures or in justification for qualification tests, or these equipment mounting.
results may be part of a combined analysis experience (a) The general character of earthquake motion is a
and test approach, as described in QR-A7600. random process that builds to a relatively stationary
level (called the strong motion), which holds at that level
QR-A7222 Seismic Proof Tests. In the past, most
for some duration, and which then decays to a negligible
active mechanical equipment qualification has been per-
value.
formed by proof test methods. This approach requires
that the simulated earthquake motion at the active (b) Approximately stationary random motion occurs
mechanical equipment mounting represents that antici- during the strong motion. It is this part of the excitation
pated from the specified SSE. The simulated motion that causes most damage to active mechanical equip-
usually is required to demonstrate that the test response ment. It shall be sustained a minimum of the larger
spectrum (TRS) conservatively envelops the required of 15 sec or the duration of strong motion during a
response spectrum (RRS), which was generated for the qualification test.
active mechanical equipment mounting location as part (c) Frequency content of the required motion and
of the test specification. The result of a proof test is actual test motion is indicated by the amplified region
a demonstration that the active mechanical equipment of a response spectrum. Thus, a test response spectrum
performs its specified function, during and/or after the shall closely envelop the required response spectrum to
simulated SSE event. ensure proper frequency content.
(d) Stationarity of the waveform during the simulated
QR-A7223 Fragility Tests. Fragility tests are con- strong motion shall be demonstrated. This ensures that
ducted to determine the peak amplitude level of a speci- all required frequencies are present to a sufficient
fied excitation waveform for which the active amount during the strong motion.
mechanical equipment can perform its specified func- (e) Multiaxis motions shall have an appropriate
tion. A sequence of test runs is performed with increas- degree of statistical independence. This is determined
ing amplitudes of the specified waveform until by examining the coherence or cross correlation between
malfunction is observed in the active mechanical equip- the waveforms for different axes.
ment. When the specified motion is compared with that Test waveforms that have the above characteristics
anticipated for the SSE at the active mechanical equip- may be generated by superimposing a variety of compo-
ment mounting, a measure of margin is established. nent signals, such as sine dwells, sine beats, narrow
In addition to the response spectrum type of input
band, and broadband random signals.
loading, in-line active mechanical equipment may also
be qualified by required input motion (RIM) testing as QR-A7233 Conduct of Test and Functionality.
described in IEEE Standard 382. Detailed procedures for preparing Seismic Qualification
Specifications and conducting seismic qualification tests
QR-A7230 General Approach to Testing
shall be obtained from IEEE Standard 344. Details for
QR-A7231 Preliminary Tests. Exploratory tests conducting functional tests for the active mechanical
described in QR-A7221 are usually performed prior to equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturers’
conduct of the actual qualification test or qualification operating manuals and active mechanical equipment
by a combination of testing and other methods. Other specifications.
preliminary tests, such as thermal or operational aging,
QR-A7240 Acceptance Criteria. Acceptance crite-
or any other required environmental test shall be per-
ria for seismic tests shall be based on the functional
formed prior to the seismic test. This sequence ensures
requirements for the individual item of active mechani-
that the active mechanical equipment is in the end of the
cal equipment. Acceptable ranges for performance varia-
qualified life state at the time of the seismic qualification.
tions shall further be evaluated in light of the
QR-A7232 Development of Simulated Seismic consequences of these variations on the specified func-
Motion. The simulated seismic motion shall conserva- tion of that equipment and any other with which it may
tively represent that which can be expected at the active interact. Such interactions with other active mechanical
17
ASME QME-1–2007
equipment which affect acceptance criteria shall be iden- QR-A7330 Active Mechanical Equipment Similarity
tified in the Seismic Qualification Specification. Numeri- for Comparison With Single Reference Active Mechanical
cal ranges for these variations shall be established and Equipment. Where qualification of an active mechanical
compared with observed test values. Inability of an item equipment item is achieved by extrapolation of qualifi-
to function within acceptable limits during or after seis- cation results from a single similar reference active
mic testing shall be noted as an anomaly. Thereafter, mechanical equipment item, the extrapolation shall be
evaluation of the consequences of the anomaly may or based on similarity of excitation, physical system, and
may not lead to a conclusion that the item has function.
malfunctioned.
QR-A7331 Excitation. Similarity of excitation con-
QR-A7300 Qualification by Similarity stitutes likeness of the following parameters: spectral
characteristics, duration, directions of excitation axes,
There are many instances of active mechanical equip- and location of measurement for the motions relative
ment, similar to a type that was qualified, which differs to the equipment mounting. Ideally, these parameters
only in size or in the specific qualified devices located should be as alike as is practical for excitations whose
in the assembly or structure. In such cases, it is neither similarity is to be established. However, a conservative
practical nor necessary to test every variation of the composite excitation may be generated by extrapola-
basic qualified version. Furthermore, it may be shown tions or interpolations of data whose parameters are not
that the active mechanical equipment to be qualified is identical but are justifiable. For example, estimates may
similar to another that has experienced actual docu- be based on measurements elsewhere on the structure
mented earthquake conditions. Qualification by com- or on other structures in the vicinity of the given active
bined test and analysis applies in these situations. mechanical equipment, when the estimates can be justi-
QR-A7310 Test Method. A full test program, as fied by calculations based on sound engineering meth-
described in QR-A7200 and preliminary exploratory ods using geophysical models, structural models, or
tests (resonance search), as described in QR-A7221 are both, as applicable. Likewise, excitation whose spectral
conducted on a typical piece of active mechanical equip- content are significantly different may be used to gener-
ment. Data on modal frequencies, damping, and ate lower level composite estimates, provided that an
responses throughout the active mechanical equipment account is taken of possible multiaxis response, cross-
shall be taken and recorded. axis coupling, or both. Justification for such approxima-
tions shall consider all modes of the active mechanical
QR-A7320 Analysis. When it can be shown that no equipment response that are significant in determining
resonances exist in the frequency range of the amplified its structural integrity and functionality. A sufficient jus-
response, the active mechanical equipment may be ana- tification is that active mechanical equipment is stressed,
lyzed as a rigid active mechanical equipment. When a excited, or both to at least as high a level by each one
resonance search is utilized, assurance should be of the component spectra used to create the lower level
obtained that adequate test methodologies are followed composite spectrum estimate.
to verify the absence of resonant frequencies. In addition, The qualification shall account for the fatigue effects
assurance should be obtained that changes from the of exposure to the required normal and abnormal condi-
originally tested active mechanical equipment did not tions, such as normal operating vibrations and the OBE,
result in the formation of previously nonexistent reso- if required.
nances. This may be done by simple testing or analysis.
When the active mechanical equipment is not rigid, QR-A7332 Physical Systems. Active mechanical
the effects of the changes shall be analyzed using the equipment similarity shall be established for an active
techniques of QR-A7100 or other justifiable means. For mechanical equipment assembly, a device, or both, or
very complex active mechanical equipment, this requires subassembly (including mounting), depending on the
sufficient knowledge of the active mechanical equip- configuration of the new active mechanical equipment
ment to include the significant structural parameters to be qualified. For a complete assembly, similarity may
to enable the responses at all points of interest to be be demonstrated through comparison of make, model,
calculated. and serial numbers, and consideration of dynamic
The test results combined with the preceding analysis response characteristics and construction.
allow the model of similar active mechanical equipment Similarity of dynamic response characteristics may be
to be adjusted to take into consideration the parametric established by comparing the physical parameters of
quantities affected and allow revision of the analysis for the active mechanical equipment. This may be done by
the modal frequencies of the similar active mechanical comparing the predominant resonant frequencies and
equipment. The result is a verified analytical model that mode shapes. These dynamic characteristics are depen-
may be used to qualify the similar active mechanical dent on parameters such as the following:
equipment. (a) active mechanical equipment physical dimensions
18
ASME QME-1–2007
(b) active mechanical equipment weight, its distribu- (a) Ground motion recordings or conservative esti-
tion, and center of gravity mates from a minimum of four reference sites containing
(c) active mechanical equipment structural load reference active mechanical equipment are required to
transferring characteristics and stiffness to resist seismic establish a reference active mechanical equipment class.
excitation The four reference sites should be selected from at least
(d) active mechanical equipment base anchorage four earthquakes.
strength and stiffness to ensure structural integrity and (b) The free field ground motion of each reference
adequate boundary conditions site should be established by recorded data within two
(e) active mechanical equipment interfaces with adja- structural diameters of the site structure location. The
cent items or connecting accessories, such as cables and recording location should have the same geological/
conduits geotechnical conditions as the reference site structure
Assurance shall be obtained that active mechanical location. The measurement of two structural diameters
equipment modifications from previously qualified starts at the perimeter of the foundation. Estimates of
active mechanical equipment do not effect a change in free field ground motion for a reference site more distant
the dynamic response characteristics of the item being than two structural diameters from the recording loca-
qualified compared with the item used for similarity. tion or where there are no nearby recorded data may
QR-A7333 Function. Active mechanical equip- be made, provided that the estimates are conservatively
ment being qualified may be required to perform a safety derived and justified. To make the ground motion esti-
function during and/or after an earthquake. The mates for these two cases, multiple attenuation relation-
required function during the earthquake may, or may ships developed using strong-motion recordings from
not, be the same as after the earthquake. Therefore, for earthquakes with similar tectonic environments, crustal
each qualification, the required function shall be defined properties, and seismological parameters are to be used.
during and/or after the earthquake. The available quali- The range of parameters used to develop the attenuation
fication data shall provide documented evidence to sup- relationship shall encompass those of the reference site
port the demonstration of proper functionality, as and earthquake. The appropriate level of conservatism
defined, for each application. Where an active function, is the average of the 5% critically damped response
or absence of a spurious function, is required during the spectrum estimate obtained from each attenuation rela-
earthquake, the available qualification data shall provide tionship.
sound evidence that the candidate active mechanical (c) The ground response spectrum assigned to a refer-
equipment will perform as required in the system for ence site shall be the average of two orthogonal hori-
which it is being qualified. zontal components of the 5% critically damped response
QR-A7400 Earthquake Experience-Based spectra at the reference site.
Qualification (d) The free field motion shall be considered an esti-
Procedures are presented in this Section to seismically mate of the seismic excitation experienced by the active
qualify active mechanical equipment by comparison mechanical equipment at the reference site.
with the body of documented equipment performance QR-A7412 Experience-Based Seismic Capacity.
from facilities that have experienced natural earth- The earthquake experience spectrum (EES) is a response
quakes. spectrum that defines the seismic capacity of a reference
Qualification based on earthquake performance active mechanical equipment class. The EES shall be the
involves five steps that will be covered in the following weighed average of the spectrum at each reference site.
sections: The weight factor as provided below shall be the ratio
(a) characterization of earthquake motions by a of the number of independent items at each reference
response spectrum site to the total number of independent items at all
(b) establishment of the earthquake experience-based reference sites.
capacity for a reference equipment class m
(c) characterization of the reference active mechanical 兺 Nn An,i
equipment class AEES,i p
np1
m
(d) qualification of the candidate active mechanical
equipment by comparison with the reference active
兺 Nn
np1
where
mechanical equipment class
(e) documentation of the qualification process AEES, i p spectral acceleration of the EES, at 5% criti-
QR-A7410 Characterization of Earthquake Experience cal damping, at frequency i
Motions An, i p spectral acceleration, at 5% critical damp-
QR-A7411 Earthquake Motions. The earthquake ing, at reference site n and frequency i
experience ground motions shall be characterized as m p number of reference sites, a minimum of
follows: four
19
ASME QME-1–2007
Nn p number of independent equipment items at Table QR-A7422-1 Reduction Factors

reference site n Number of EES Reduction
QR-A7420 Characterization of the Reference Active Independent Items Factor
Mechanical Equipment Class. A reference active 30 1.0
mechanical equipment class is a group of active mechan- 25 0.9
ical equipment that shares a range of physical, opera- 20 0.8
tional, and dynamic characteristics whose performance 15 0.7
in earthquakes has been documented. The attributes of
the active mechanical equipment that constitute the ref-
erence active mechanical equipment class shall be The rules of this Section apply to active mechanical
defined such that those features important to seismic equipment that may undergo five OBEs or aftershocks
ruggedness can be ensured, and any seismic vulnerabili- and one SSE, resulting in 60 full-range stress cycles dur-
ties can be identified and precluded in the candidate ing plant life. If a component contains items which could
active mechanical equipment. These active mechanical experience a fatigue failure from low cycle loads (fewer
equipment ruggedness and vulnerability attributes of than 60 full-range stress cycles), it shall be evaluated in
the reference active mechanical equipment class shall accordance with QR-A6800.
be defined in terms of inclusion rules and prohibited
features, respectively. QR-A7422 Number of Independent Items. The ref-
erence active mechanical equipment class should
QR-A7421 Attributes of Equipment Class. Inclu- include a minimum of 30 independent items that per-
sion rules are the physical and operational characteris- formed satisfactorily. Independent items are compo-
tics that define an acceptable range of equipment nents and equipment which have different physical
physical characteristics, dynamic characteristics, and characteristics or experience different seismic motion
functions for ensuring seismic ruggedness and defining characteristics, e.g., different earthquakes, sites, build-
the bounds of active mechanical equipment included in ings, or orientations/locations in the same building.
a reference equipment class. Where fewer than 30 independent items constitute
The following factors shall also be considered and the reference equipment class, the EES shall be reduced
evaluated when developing inclusion rules: active by the factors given in Table QR-A7422-1 to produce the
mechanical equipment type, weight, features, size and same statistical confidence level as a reference active
shape, function, capacity rating, load path, governing mechanical equipment class comprising 30 independent
industry standards, materials, natural frequencies, items. The number of independent items shall not be
moveable subassemblies, attached items or components, fewer than 15.
and modifications necessary to achieve the defined seis-
mic capacity. Not all these attributes may be applicable QR-A7423 Functionality During Earthquake.
to a particular class of equipment. Where functionality during the earthquake is required
The diversity of features represented in the reference of a candidate equipment, an appropriate justification
active mechanical equipment shall be described in the shall exist in the definition of the reference equipment
inclusion rules. In those cases where diversity is limited, class for this functionality. This justification shall dem-
the reference active mechanical equipment class shall onstrate one of the following:
be narrowed to the specific features represented in the (a) All of the equipment defining the reference equip-
reference active mechanical equipment. In developing ment class performed the required functions during the
a reference equipment class for in-line components, if earthquake.
more than half of the items are judged not to have experi- (b) All of the equipment defining the reference equip-
enced distribution system amplification (i.e., the in-line ment class was functional after the earthquake, and a
component is located immediately adjacent to a distribu- quantitative assessment of functionality during the
tion system support providing seismic restraint), a limi- earthquake is established based on knowledge of the
tation shall be applied in terms of an inclusion rule for required operation of the equipment during the earth-
the reference equipment class. quake and consideration of credible seismic failure
Prohibited features are design details, materials, con- modes (e.g., shaft binding) that may prevent equipment
struction features, or installation characteristics that operation. Experience gained from analysis or testing
have resulted in seismic-induced failure of the active of similar equipment may be used to establish this quan-
mechanical equipment to maintain its structural integ- titative assessment.
rity and perform its specified function at earthquake
QR-A7430 Special Considerations
excitations up to and including the defined seismic
capacity level. QR-A7431 Inherently Rugged Active Mechanical
Prohibited features should include any attributes that Equipment. Earthquake experience shows that certain
would contribute to fatigue failure from low cycle loads. types of active mechanical equipment possess high
20
ASME QME-1–2007
resistance to seismic inertia loads. This may be the result Failure of the EES to envelop the RRS shall be justified.
of inherent characteristics required to accommodate (b) The RRS, as defined in the Seismic Qualification
operational or shipping loads and the application of Specification, shall be derived from the Design Basis
explicit design standards. Such active mechanical equip- Earthquake (QR-A6100). The minimum RRS used in
ment is inherently rugged. Where inherent seismic rug- earthquake experience-based seismic qualification shall
gedness can be established through analysis, testing, or be a median-centered in-structure response spectrum.
earthquake experience, or where the seismic loads are (c) The candidate equipment shall be verified to be
but a small fraction of the operating loads, the rules for within the inclusion rules of the reference active mechan-
characterizing the reference equipment class (i.e., the ical equipment class.
attributes and number of independent items defined in (d) The candidate equipment shall be verified to
QR-A7421 and QR-A7422) and the procedure for defin- exclude the prohibited features of the reference active
ing the seismic capacity of the reference active mechani- mechanical equipment class.
cal equipment class (i.e., the EES defined in QR-A7412) (e) Candidate equipment of a newer vintage than the
may be simplified and reduced. In this case, the charac- reference active mechanical equipment class shall be
teristics of the reference active mechanical equipment evaluated for any significant changes in design, material,
class and the technical justification for the assigned or fabrication that could reduce its seismic capacity com-
capacity level (EES) shall be developed and documented pared with the reference active mechanical equipment
as the reference data for this special case. class.
(f) The qualification of a candidate equipment shall
QR-A7432 Limitations. Earthquake experience-
be documented as specified in QR-A8330.
based qualification is limited by the following considera-
tions: QR-A7500 Test Experience-Based Qualification
(a) Some types of active mechanical equipment have (to be added in a later edition)
complex features, and their design varies significantly
with time. These applications require more detailed con- QR-A7600 Combined Qualification Methods
siderations of design variability, which may render the All of the qualification methods — experience data,
application of experience data impractical. In these analysis, and testing — have their advantages and limi-
cases, other methods of qualification shall be used. tations. For example, to qualify the active mechanical
(b) In certain cases, functions such as operation dur- equipment in question, it is necessary to show that the
ing an earthquake or chatter of relays and contact like active mechanical equipment in the experience data-
devices may be difficult to establish from the experience base has experienced seismic inputs equal to or greater
data. In these cases, other methods of qualification shall than the design basis of the component being qualified.
be used. In general, this can best be examined by analysis to
(c) If there is insufficient sample size, diversity in the develop the input seismic motion applicable to the expe-
sample, or insufficient reference sites to adequately rience database.
define an equipment class, other methods of qualifica- Results of a given particular active mechanical equip-
tion shall be used. ment qualification test may become a part of an experi-
(d) Use of earthquake experience data ensures active ence database. Strictly speaking, this qualification is
mechanical equipment seismic qualification in combina- applicable only to the active mechanical equipment
tion with normal operating loads. For active mechanical tested. To extend qualification to similar active mechani-
equipment subject to other concurrent loads, including cal equipment, it is necessary to consider potential differ-
applied nozzle loads from distribution systems, the ences in material properties, sizes, manufacturing
effect of the loads shall be addressed by supplemental tolerances, clearances, and mounting characteristics.
qualification methods, such as analysis, testing, etc. When these differences exceed the limits of similarity
(e) Applications that require active mechanical equip- as provided in QR-A7300, their effects on qualification
ment be exposed to harsh environments or aging prior shall be evaluated directly by means of analysis or test.
to or during an earthquake require special consideration. Analysis in general is limited to determination of
In such cases, qualification methods other than experi- loads, reactions, stresses, strains, deflections, and clear-
ence-based methods may be required. ances, which are then compared with acceptable limits.
Loss of function of active mechanical equipment, how-
QR-A7440 Qualification of Candidate Equipment. ever, cannot always be explained in terms of such com-
The requirements for qualifying candidate equipment puted quantities. In such cases, experience data or
using earthquake experience data are as follows: testing shall be relied upon to demonstrate functionality
(a) The 5% critically damped required response spec- or otherwise establish acceptable limits on those quanti-
tra (RRS) should be enveloped by the EES of the refer- ties which can be evaluated by analysis.
ence active mechanical equipment class over the All three methods or combinations thereof may be
frequency range of interest, typically 1 Hz to 33 Hz. used to seismically qualify functionality of active
21
ASME QME-1–2007
mechanical equipment. The decision as to the methods (b) If RRSs are not furnished, acceleration design val-
to be used to qualify a given piece of active mechanical ues; load coefficients; simplified waveforms, such as sine
equipment shall be left to the professional engineer or beats or sine sweep; or a time history shall be provided.
officer of the qualifying organization who approves and (c) The earthquake’s strong-motion time duration
signs the Seismic Qualification Report (QR-A8300). shall be specified, in seconds, as well as the total number
However, nothing in this Appendix shall be interpre- of cycles and cyclic profile.
ted as preventing the author of the Seismic Qualification (d) Active mechanical equipment mounting or sup-
Specification (SQS) from specifying in detail (in the SQS) port details, including all interface connections, shall be
the method(s) or combinations of methods to be used in described.
seismically qualifying the active mechanical equipment (e) A physical description of active mechanical equip-
covered by the SQS. ment shall be provided.
(f) A clear description of the functional requirements
QR-A8000 DOCUMENTATION for which the active mechanical equipment is to be seis-
mically qualified shall be provided. This description
QR-A8100 General
shall include typical operational settings (or ranges) for
The documentation for qualification of each active adjustable devices.
mechanical equipment type shall demonstrate that the (g) Other loading and interface requirements to be
active mechanical equipment performs its specified accounted for shall be specified.
function when subjected to the seismic motions for (h) The environment in which the equipment is
which it is to be qualified, including any required mar- designed to function shall be described.
gin. Therefore, proper documentation requires a clear (i) Acceptance criteria shall be specified.
statement of the specific requirements and an accurate
(j) ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 components shall be iden-
recording of the procedures and results of the analysis,
tified.
test, experience data, or any combination of these
methods. QR-A8300 Qualification Report
Two documents are required to demonstrate func-
tional seismic qualification of active mechanical equip- The Qualification Report shall present a clear, logical
ment: a Seismic Qualification Specification and Seismic explanation of how the data contained in the Seismic
Qualification Report. The preparation of the Seismic Qualification Specification and resultant experience,
Qualification Specification is the responsibility of the analysis, tests, or combinations thereof have been used
active mechanical equipment Owner or his designee. to achieve seismic qualification of particular active
The preparation of the Seismic Qualification Report is mechanical equipment. Toward this end, it shall contain
the responsibility of the organization that performs the the following information:
active mechanical equipment seismic qualification and (a) Active mechanical equipment being qualified
evaluates the results as applicable to the qualification shall be clearly identified.
of the active mechanical equipment. In the event that a (b) Required response spectrum (RRS), acceleration
manufacturer of the active mechanical equipment per- design value (ADV), time histories, required input
forms a generic seismic equipment qualification, the motion (RIM), or load coefficient levels for which active
preparation of both the Seismic Qualification Specifica- mechanical equipment is being qualified shall be shown.
tion (as the Owner’s designee) and Seismic Qualification (c) A detailed summary of the analysis, test, past
Report is the responsibility of the manufacturer. It is the experience used, and results (including pertinent anom-
responsibility of the Owner to review and accept the alies) shall be presented. Details defining a test fixture
Seismic Qualification Report. if used during testing shall also be provided. If a compo-
nent or device of the active mechanical equipment is
QR-A8200 Seismic Qualification Specification tested or analyzed separately, the procedure used shall
Requirements also be summarized. If an anomaly is experienced dur-
The following gives directions in the preparation of ing any test, it shall be documented in the report. If the
Seismic Qualification Specification required for evalua- active mechanical equipment is not modified to elimi-
tion of the active mechanical equipment: nate the anomaly, then the final user shall justify the
(a) The required response spectrum (RRS) for the loca- use of the active mechanical equipment and file this
tion on which the active mechanical equipment is to be justification with the Seismic Qualification Report. Any
mounted shall contain the data for the two horizontal active mechanical equipment refurbishment that is per-
and one vertical axes as a minimum. The RRS shall be formed during seismic testing shall be documented in
appropriately broadened or based upon a building in- the test report and reconciled by the active mechanical
structure response spectrum that was appropriately equipment supplier. These data may become part of the
broadened. The RRS shall include the damping values postearthquake field maintenance checks and proce-
for which it was calculated. dures for that active mechanical equipment.
22
ASME QME-1–2007
(d) If analysis is used to qualify the active mechanical time history of the input table motion shall be provided
equipment, the failure modes used to determine func- in the test report in addition to the TRS. As a minimum,
tional adequacy shall be clearly identified and computed a time history of the table motion shall be provided for
margins to failure presented. one test in each of the three directions of excitation from
(e) Integrity of equipment supports and component or the SSE testing.
device mountings shall be demonstrated and described. (f) test results, including measured natural frequen-
(f) All documents used in generating the Seismic cies and conclusions (including statement of any anom-
Qualification Report shall be identified and referenced. alies)
(g) A dated approval signature shall be included. QR-A8330 Earthquake Experience-Based Qualifica-
QR-A8310 Analytical Data. If analysis is performed tion Documentation. The qualification report shall
as the qualification method, the method and data used, include
and failure modes considered, shall be presented in a (a) a detailed description of the active mechanical
step-by-step form that is readily auditable by persons equipment to be qualified, including the essential inter-
skilled in such analysis. Boundary conditions, including nal components and devices.
anchoring and any other interfaces, shall be clearly (b) the required response spectrum at 5% critical
defined. Input/output data required to support per- damping.
formance claims shall be included in the report. The (c) a detailed description of the reference active
reaction force(s) at the interface connection(s) to the sup- mechanical equipment class, including
port structure shall also be included. (1) characterization of the reference motions in
A statement shall be made verifying that the computer terms of a response spectrum
programs were validated on the computer hardware on (2) development of the EES for the specific equip-
which the program was executed. Computer programs, ment class
options, version numbers, dates, and systems utilized (3) characteristics of the reference active mechani-
shall be identified and documented. cal equipment class
(4) inclusion rules and prohibited features
QR-A8320 Test Data. If testing is used as the qualifi- (5) function of the reference active mechanical
cation method, the test data shall contain the following equipment class
information: (6) compliance to the requirements of this Standard
(a) active mechanical equipment being qualified (d) compliance of the active mechanical equipment
(1) tested active mechanical equipment identifica- to be qualified to the inclusion rules and prohibited
tion (including devices) features of the reference active mechanical equipment
(2) tested active mechanical equipment functional class.
specification (e) demonstration of integrity of equipment supports,
(3) tested active mechanical equipment settings load path, mounting, and anchorage shall be demon-
and limitations when appropriate strated and described.
(b) test facility QR-A8340 Combined Methods of Qualification. If
(1) location proof of performance is by a combination of methods
(2) testing equipment and calibration described in QR-A7100 to QR-A7400, the report shall
(c) test method and procedures, including monitoring contain reference to the specific combined qualification
for functionality, and acceptance criteria method used and appropriate information contained in
(d) active mechanical equipment mounting details, each method as described therein. When extrapolation
including all interface connections of data is made from similar active mechanical equip-
(e) test data, including proof of performance, test ment, a description of the differences between the active
response spectrum (TRS) plots, required input motion mechanical equipment involved shall be provided. Justi-
(RIM) plots, time histories, and power spectral density fication that the differences do not degrade the seismic
(PSD) coherence checks as necessary. Whatever the type adequacy below acceptable limits, which may require
of multifrequency testing employed, the acceleration some additional analyses or testing, shall be included.
23
ASME QME-1–2007
Attachment A
Guidelines for Qualification by Similarity (Indirect Method)
A-1 GENERAL parameter for the parent component, an assessment of

the effect of increment(s) shall be made in terms of quan-
This attachment presents guidelines to achieve the
tities impacting the qualification status, such as stresses
qualification of candidate equipment by establishing its
and deformations.
similarity to parent equipment. Much of the guidance
provided herein is summarized from the User’s Manual
prepared by COMPAR-Access, which can be consulted A-3 EXCITATION CHARACTERISTICS
for more details. The guidance provided herein is also an The excitation for the candidate equipment shall be
expansion of general concepts defined in IEEE Standard shown to be similar to that for the parent equipment.
344-1987, Section 9.0. A valid qualification by similarity The parent data may include a composite spectrum that
requires consideration of each of the following four was generated from qualification of several parent
items: equipment items. Specific excitation characteristics to
(a) functional characteristics be considered include (but are not necessarily limited to)
(b) excitation characteristics (a) frequency distribution: indicated by amplified
(c) physical characteristics region of response spectrum or power spectral density
(d) concurrence of excitation and physical character- (b) peak amplitude of time history, i.e., excitation ZPA
istics (c) maximum amplification factor: ratio of maximum
response spectrum value to ZPA
A-2 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS (d) time duration: strong-motion portion must be at
least 10 sec
Candidate equipment considered for qualification by (e) axes of orientation: must be common for candidate
similarity shall have function/malfunction characteris- and parent equipment, i.e., careful examination of sup-
tics similar to those of the parent equipment for which ports at excitation location is required
a database is available. (f) excitation location
A-2.1 Specified Function
A-4 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The specific function of the candidate equipment to be
qualified shall be the same or enveloped by the specified Physical similarity is determined by those equipment
function defined in the qualification document of the properties that influence its dynamic response. Physical
parent equipment. similarity between candidate and parent equipment can
be shown by one of several methods, which include
A-2.2 Failure/Malfunction Modes A-4.1 through A-4.4.
The most probable mode or modes of failure/mal- A-4.1 Essentially Identical Equipment
function of the candidate equipment shall be stated and
Equipment can be compared by make, model, and
justified to be common with that of the parent equip-
serial number and found to be identical (within devia-
ment. Furthermore, the physical location on the equip-
tions associated with manufacturing tolerances) or to
ment of any critical device/mechanism that precipitates
have differences that are so slight that the dynamic
the failure/malfunction is to be noted.
response can be argued to be essentially unaffected.
A-2.3 Design Parameters A-4.2 Similar Modal Properties
List the appropriate parameters for the candidate and This is equipment whose mass, stiffness, and damping
parent equipment, as shown in Table A-1. properties can be shown to be similar. Justification
includes providing comparative data as shown in
A-2.4 Acceptance Criteria
Table A-2.
A comparison of the design parameters for both the
parent and candidate component shall be made. If any A-4.3 Acceptance Criteria
one of the listed parameters for the candidate compo- For acceptance criteria, provide comparison of items 1
nent deviates by more than 10% from the corresponding through 7 of Table A-2 for both the parent and candidate
24
ASME QME-1–2007
equipment. If there are significant differences (more than search data, if available, for a response point near a
±15%) in any one of the items (or subitems), the effect critical location. When the critical transfer function plot
of the difference shall be evaluated in terms of the can be established for both candidate and parent equip-
following: ment, and where this can be shown to be within 20%
(a) stiffness in amplitude within a designated frequency bandwidth,
(b) mass distribution no further modal characteristics need to be determined.
(c) boundary conditions As a result, the equipment is physically similar within
(d) natural frequencies the designated frequency bandwidth.
(e) damping
The different effect on the stresses, deformations, and A-5 CONCURRENCE OF EXCITATION AND PHYSICAL
load capacities, such as stem or shaft buckling capacity SIMILARITY
and bearing load capacity, at critical locations shall also A valid qualification by similarity requires that the
be evaluated and shown to be within the allowable crite- frequency bandwidth within which physical similarity
ria limits. exists for both candidate and parent items shall be con-
current within the frequency band for which the candi-
A-4.4 Similar Critical Transfer Function date’s required excitation spectrum is enveloped by the
The critical transfer function establishes a direct parent equipment excitation spectrum. Enveloping out-
dynamic relationship between the excitation and critical side this frequency band is not essential, but cannot be
location where failure or malfunction is being evaluated. unlimited, as discussed in NUREG/CR-5012 (see
It can be established from typical exploratory resonance QR-A3000).
25
ASME QME-1–2007
Table A-1 List of Input Parameters

Parameters Parent Equipment Candidate Equipment
1. Temperature
2. Design pressure
3. Operating pressure
4. Hydrostatic pressure
5. Process medium
6. Maximum leakage rate
7. Torque
8. Thrust
9. Nozzle loads
10. Other parameters (list as applicable)
Resolution of any significant differences:
26
ASME QME-1–2007
Table A-2 Comparative List of Physical Parameters

Parameters Parent Equipment Candidate Equipment
1. Component physical dimensions
2. Component weight, its distribution, and center of

gravity
3. Bill of materials
4. Cross-sectional and length data to characterize stiff-

ness and load-transferring capacity
5. Mounting with respect to:
Mounting description
Type of support
Support details
Structural members
Size
Location
Material
Welding details
Rod (material)
Location
Size and length
Type
Bolting details
Bolts and nuts material, grade
Number and size
Geometry (bolt circle or pattern info.)
Washers
Holes in baseplates (circular or oval)
Pretorque values
6. Nozzles:
Locations
Sizes
7. Other interfaces with adjacent items such as cables,

conduits, tubes, etc.
Resolution of any significant differences:
27
ASME QME-1–2007
Attachment B
Examples of Qualification of Pumps and Valves by Analysis1, 2
B-1 EXAMPLE 1: VERTICAL PUMP/MOTOR of this active pump. In general, however, there is no
ASSEMBLY requirement that a dynamic model be used to compute
resultant stress in the pump/motor assembly. Often,
B-1.1 Introduction
dynamic external forces in each mode are determined
Example 1 identifies and presents the model, analysis from the response spectrum analysis of a dynamic model
method, and results associated with the seismic evalua- and applied to a more detailed static model of the
tion of a vertical pump/motor assembly when subjected pump/motor assembly to determine such things as
to static and dynamic loads. The analysis is performed resultant stress, deformations, and bearing loads.
to assess the design adequacy of the pump/motor The pump/motor assembly and some details of the
assembly design when subjected to earthquake-induced pump are shown in Fig. B-1. The schematic representa-
static and dynamic loads, as well as other loads defined tion of the model is provided in Fig. B-2. Essentially,
in the Design Specification. the model is a three-dimensional lumped mass beam
A three-dimensional lumped mass beam finite ele- element model, capable of accepting loads from the pos-
ment model of the pump/motor assembly and its sup- tulated vertical and two horizontal directions of earth-
port is developed and dynamically analyzed using the quake simultaneously. The three parallel beams of the
response spectrum analysis method. The same model is
lower portion represent the centerlines of the pump
analyzed due to static nozzle loads, pump thrust loads,
shaft, bowl casings, and suction barrel shell. The dis-
and deadweight and temperature effects. Critical loca-
charge head, discharge nozzle, motor stator, and rotor
tion stresses are evaluated and compared with the allow-
are also modeled with equivalent beams and lumped
able stress criteria to determine structural and leak-tight
masses as defined and located on the appropriate outline
integrity, and critical location deflections and bearing
drawings and other references. This model has a total of
loads are compared to evaluate operability.
105 nodes, 97 beam elements, and 16 boundary elements.
B-1.2 Model Description
B-1.3 Method of Analysis
A finite element model is developed for the
pump/motor assembly as shown in Fig. B-1 and used The analysis is performed in two distinct steps. First,
in the analysis. The merits of using this approach are a modal analysis is performed using the subspace itera-
threefold tion technique, and all eigenvectors are saved on a per-
(a) It represents the distribution of mass and stiffness manent file for subsequent analysis with various
for the determination of natural frequencies, including dynamic loading conditions. In this instance, 25 modes
higher modes. were considered in the analysis, with a highest frequency
(b) A complete dynamic analysis may be performed of 140.5 Hz. This frequency is high enough to cover the
to determine the loads and resultant stresses and dis- ZPA of all applicable response spectra (both earthquake
placements using this model. and hydrodynamic effects). It should be noted that
(c) It determines how the loads are distributed earthquake-induced excitations seldom have input ener-
through each load path in the statically indeterminate gies above 33 Hz and hydrodynamic effects above about
portions of the structure. 100 Hz. It should also be noted that damage due to
The finite element model in this instance is used to dynamic excitations above about 15 Hz is usually con-
verify the structural integrity, as well as the operability trolled by velocity or displacement, not acceleration.
Therefore, use of equivalent static loads based on accel-
1
Examples 1 and 2 contain an OBE design requirement because erations at frequencies above 15 Hz may result in overly
the analysis performed is to determine structural and leak-tight conservative design requirements. Table B-1 gives the
integrity in accordance with ASME BPVC Section III requirements,
as well as to determine functional adequacy. first 14 frequencies of the model up to 84.1 Hz. As
2
Examples 1 and 2 are for rough illustrative purposes only to Table B-1 shows, the fundamental frequency of the
define the type of analysis performed. In general, current design equipment is 7.82 Hz, which is in the potential resonant
control procedures, as described in 10CFR50 Appendix B and region of earthquake-induced response, thereby justi-
implemented by organizational quality assurance and ASME NQA
procedures, would require a more detailed documentation of qualifying the need for a dynamic analysis for this relatively
fication by analysis than is illustrated by these examples. flexible equipment.
28
Fig. B-1 Pump Assembly
Head-pin
interface
Motor
bolting Foundation
bolts Discharge Discharge Casing bolts Casing bolts Series 1st stage
Motor column column bolts (top) (series) casing casing
stand
29
Pump shaft—
Discharge Suction minimum
ASME QME-1–2007
head barrel section

bolts shell
Drive
Stuffing box/ Casing—ring Casing—ring
coupling
discharge elbow Pump shaft— Shaft detail detail
interface

bearing coupling (series) (1st stage)

ASME QME-1–2007
Fig. B-2 Finite Element Formulation of Pump Assembly
Motor housing Rotor

26
53
62
25
51
25
Y 52
24
50
24
51
Z X 61
49 23
50
23
48 Pump foundation
22
49 47
22
47
46 21
48
45
60 21
46 20
20
44
19
19
45
Motor foundation
43 59 18
44 18
42 17
43 17
41 16
Nodes 42 16
40 15 15
41
39 58 14
Beam element 40 14
38 13
39 13
37 12
Rigid element 38 12
36 11 11
37
35 57 10
36 10
34 9 9
35
Axial and torsional 33 56 8
34 8
foundation springs 32 7
7
33
31 55 6
32 6
30 5 5
31
29 54 4
30 4
28 3 3
29
27 53 2
28 2
26 1 1
27
52
Pump housing Impeller
30
ASME QME-1–2007
Table B-1 Calculated Frequencies for Pump/Motor Section III, Class 2 equipment and therefore must com-
Assembly: Print of Frequencies ply with the rules of Subsection NC of ASME BPVC
Mode Frequency, Hz
Section III. Structural and leak-tight integrity are
Number (cycles/sec) addressed in terms of these code rules wherever applica-
ble. At locations where the ASME Code does not apply,
1 0.7818 + 01 general methods of stress analysis and principles of
2 0.8518 + 01 mechanics are used with behavior limits consistent with
3 0.1163 + 02
those defined in the ASME Code.
4 0.1211 + 02
In Example 1, the following load combinations were
5 0.3450 + 02 identified in the Design Specification and are calculated
6 0.3458 + 02 using the results of static and dynamic analysis.3
7 0.3717 + 02 ASME Service Level B Condition:
8 0.4122 + 02
9 0.5935 + 02 N + OBE + SRV
10 0.6421 + 02 ASME Service Level C Condition:

11 0.7330 + 02
12 0.7679 + 02 SSE + CO
13 0.7835 + 02 N + Envelope of SSE + CO + SRV
14 0.8409 + 02
SSE + CHUG + SRV
where
CHUG p chugging load
In general, it is necessary only to include a sufficient CO p condensation oscillation loads
number of frequencies and mode shapes such that 85% N p normal conditions
to 90% of the effective mass of the equipment being OBE p operation basis earthquake load
evaluated has been included. The second step of the SRV p safety relief valve loads
analysis consists of applying various dynamic and static SSE p safe shutdown earthquake load
loads to the model and investigating the structural
behavior of the pump/motor assembly. The internal forces and moments obtained for each
As discussed above, the response spectra analysis beam element are combined according to the load combi-
method is selected for the dynamic analysis of the assem- nations identified above using appropriate methods as
bly. However, other methods such as time history analy- defined in Regulatory Guides 1.60, 1.61, and 1.92; Stan-
sis, simplified dynamic, or equivalent static analysis as dard Review Plans 3.7, 3.8, and 3.9; and with the overall
defined in Standard Review Plan 3.7.2 and ASME BPVC guidance of ANS Standards 51.1 for BWR and 52.1 for
Section III Appendix N may also be used. The response PWR systems. These combined loads are then used to
spectra used are developed from the seismic response calculate the component stresses at critical locations.
spectra curves and other applicable dynamic loads as Evaluation of stresses is in accordance with NC-3400 of
defined in the Design Specifications. ASME BPVC Section III for Service Levels B, C, or D as
Conservative damping values of 2% for ASME Code defined in the Design Specification for the component.
Level C conditions and 1% for Level B conditions are
B-1.5 Stress Analysis, Leak-Tight and Structural
adopted in this example. The following additional loads
Integrity
are also included in the analyses performed in this
example: In order to ensure the adequacy of the equipment,
(a) pump nozzle loads, obtained from the analysis the following analytical efforts and considerations are
of the piping subsystems attached to the suction and undertaken:
discharge nozzles (a) Perform a detailed dynamic/static analysis on a
(b) weight of all the parts of the pump and motor and three-dimensional finite element model that represents
the water inside the pump the mass, stiffness, and boundary conditions of the
(c) internal design pressure acting on pressure bound- pump/motor assembly.
ary components (b) Consider the loading combinations that are stipu-
lated in the Design Specification.
(d) pump thrust and torque loads
(c) Comply with the design requirements of the
(e) motor electromagnetic forces
Design Specification and ASME BPVC Section III for
B-1.4 Load Combinations Service Level B, C, or D, whichever are applicable; also,
The pressure boundary components of this 3

CO, SRV, and CHUG loads are applicable to BWR pressure
pump/motor assembly are classified as ASME BPVC suppression systems.
31
ASME QME-1–2007
use other methods of mechanics and stress analysis B-2 EXAMPLE 2: 4-in. BUTTERFLY VALVE
when needed.
In Example 1, foundation bolt stresses are calculated B-2.1 Purpose
from forces developed in the model elements represent- The purpose of Example 2 is to present the seismic
ing the anchor bolts at the foundation level, assuming qualification of a 4-in. butterfly valve used in a nuclear
that shear on the equipment is carried by the anchor power-generating station. This example describes the
bolts. Depending on the size, configuration, and magni- analysis required to perform this qualification.
tude of load on the equipment, shear may also be
assumed to be transferred by friction between the base B-2.2 Model Description
of the equipment and supporting structure. The analysis is performed using a finite element
In the example, for all critical locations, the stresses model. In the finite element model, the valve, bracket,
evaluated using Service Level C criteria are higher than shaft, wafer, and actuator are modeled in considerable
stresses produced by other load combinations. Highest structural detail using beam and plate elements to math-
stress levels at all locations are compared to the allow- ematically describe the mass and stiffness distribution
ables and the resultant safety factor determined as of the system. In general, these elements are terminated
shown in Table B-2. It is also common to express design at nodal points wherever structural discontinuities
adequacy in terms of design margins. Design margins occurred (i.e., corners, changes in moments of inertia,
are determined as follows: etc.). See Figs. B-3 and B-4.
design margin p safety factor − 1.0
B-2.3 Method of Analysis
B-1.6 Deformations, Bearing Loads, and Operability The fundamental natural frequencies of the valves are
In Service Level C, Example 1, the computed deflec- determined. The units have their lowest natural fre-
tions or deformations are limited to 75% of those that quency above 33 Hz.
are expected to cause malfunction of the pump. Verify Once the frequency requirements are satisfied, the
the operability analytically by checking relative dis- valve is analyzed for the following static equivalent
placements and bearing load capacities at the critical loads:
locations. This is accomplished by combination of the (a) seismic g loads
following steps: (b) deadweight (1.0 g)
(a) Failure mode analysis dictates critical locations. (c) pressure on the wafer
(b) Model analysis yields relative displacements at (d) torque on the shaft
these critical locations between moving and stationary The following seismic acceleration design value
parts. (ADV) g loads are considered:
(c) Calculated relative displacements and bearing
Earthquake Horizontal Vertical
loads are compared with allowable or minimum clear-
ances and bearing loads supplied by the manufacturer. OBE 3.3 2.0
(d) In order to support the analytical approach indi- SSE 4.5 3.0
cated by (a) through (c) above, various test results, such Each orthogonal direction is evaluated separately, and
as in-situ low impedance test results of the equipment to the three results are combined by the SRSS method.
verify dynamic characteristics or start-up and in-service These combined results are added to the absolute value
vibration test results (ASME OM3), are compared with of the results of the deadweight, pressure, and torque
analysis results. These comparisons are used to substan- load evaluations.
tiate the validity of analytical models used for the com- Unit load cases are input, and the results are factored
putation or alternatively to provide a basis for better by the appropriate values to obtain the correct seismic,
analytical definition of the equipment. deadweight, pressure, and torque loadings.
B-1.7 Summary and Concluding Remarks
B-2.4 Stress Analysis, Leak-Tight and
Example 1 presents the results of an analytical assess- Structural Integrity
ment and design qualification for a vertical
The results of various analyses performed are pre-
pump/motor assembly. Based on the results of the anal-
sented in this Section. Table B-3 provides the materials
yses presented, the pump is considered seismically qual-
and allowable stress values for the valve parts analyzed.
ified for the load combinations specified in para. B-1.4.4
Stresses for ASME Levels B and C Service Conditions
4
are summarized on Tables B-4 through B-8. At critical
Further detailed treatment of the similar qualification effort for locations identified through failure mode-effect analy-
similar pumps is in “Structural Integrity and Operability Analysis
of Vertical Pump-Motor Assemblies,” J.S. Mokri and W.H. Fleming, ses, the model displacements are obtained as the result
General Electric Co., Paper #84-PVP-108, ASME. of the same finite element model analysis.
32
ASME QME-1–2007
Table B-2 Evaluation of Behavior at Critical Locations

Description Calculated Allowable Safety Factor
Leak-Tight and
Structural Integrity
Motor stand stress 5,221 psi 19,250 psi 3.70

Motor bolting tensile stress 5,587 psi 37,500 psi 6.67
Motor bolting shear stress 2,281 psi 15,500 psi 6.67
Suction barrel shell 8,195 psi 16,500 psi 2.0

at inlet nozzle stress
Suction barrel head/pin 5,024 psi 16,500 psi 3.33
interface stress
Pump first stage casing 2,446 psi 8,250 psi 3.33

min. section stress
Pump series casing 3,000 psi 8,250 psi 2.78

min. section stress
Pump series casing bolts Am p 7.73 in.2 (req.) Ab p 11.02 in.2 (avail.) 1.43
req. area
Pump top casing Am p 7.65 in.2 (req.) Ab p 11.02 in.2 (avail.) 1.45
bolts req. area
Stuffing box discharge 17,725 psi 28,875 psi (Level B) 1.64

elbow interface stress 24,170 psi 31,500 psi (Level C) 1.30
Discharge head Am p 19.60 in.2 (req.) Ab p 19.84 in.2 (avail.) 1.01
bolts req. area
Foundation bolts tensile stress 12,730 psi 29,000 psi 2.27
Foundation bolts shear stress 4,129 psi 11,950 psi 2.86
Discharge column stress 6,101 psi 16,500 psi 2.70
2 2
Discharge column Am p 8.73 in. (req.) Ab p 11.02 in. (avail.) 1.27
bolts req. area
Pump shaft at 5,838 psi 15,000 psi 2.56

min. section stress
Operability
Pump shaft bearing 11 psi 20 psi 1.82

(max. load location)
Pump pin to support 9,789 lb 14,650 lb 1.49
reaction load
Motor upthrust load 0 [Note (1)] 2,287 lb 0
Motor down thrust load 4,380 lb 22,500 lb 5.0
Relative displacement 0.008 in. 0.009 in. 1.12
between shaft and
throttle bushing
Relative displacement 0.0006 in. 0.030 in. 50.0
between shaft and
mechanical seal
NOTE:
(1) Actual valve is less than weight.
33
Nameplate
View A-A
Bearing spacer

Pressure plug
seal
Plug seal Pin Seat
Shaft
Shaft peg Wafer
Body Shaft peg Comp. ring
Insert Bearing spacer Comp. plate
Nut
Spacer Hex jam nut Stud
ASME QME-1–2007
34
Tag
A A
Insert fins
Butterfly Valve Assembly Fig. B-3
ASME QME-1–2007
Fig. B-4 Finite Element Formulation of Butterfly Valve Assembly
2
2
Valve body
1 4
3
1
12 3
11 13
14
10 16 17 18 19
15
14 30 15
28 29
27
26 25
25 23 24
21 22 35
20 34 16 5 Nodes
Wafer 33
31 32
30 31
24 29
26 27 28
39 40 17 Beam elements
36 37 38
23 37
36
32 33 34 35 Plate elements
22 18 4
21 19
20
14 9
6
9
10
Shaft 5
13 7
6
11
8 8
12
35
ASME QME-1–2007
Table B-3 Allowable Stresses at 200°F for 4-in. Valve

Body Shaft Wafer Bracket Bolts
Material SA-216 WCB A 564 630 SA-351 CF8M A 36 A 449 Gr. 5
ASME Sh 17,500 ... 17,500 ... ...

ASME S ... 115,600 ... 36,000 ...
Upset
Allowable ␴m 17,500 84,000 17,500 28,800 53,300
Allowable ␴m+b 17,500 84,000 17,500 28,000 ...
Allowable ␴v 9,450 62,424 9,450 19,440 20,000
Faulted
Allowable ␴m 17,500 84,000 17,500 28,800 53,300

Allowable ␴m+b 28,875 84,000 28,875 28,800 ...
Allowable ␴v 9,450 62,424 9,450 19,440 20,000
Table B-4 Beam Stresses, psi, for ASME Service

Level B Table B-6 Plate Stresses, psi, for ASME Service
Level B
Body Neck Shaft
(BP-1) (BP-2, 3) Wafer Bracket
Beam 105 112 Plate ... 367

␴m 9 39 ␴m <13 18
Allowable 17,500 92,480 Allowable 17,500 21,600
Beam 105 110 Plate 309 ...

␴m+b 582 15,365 ␴m+b 11,071 <3,851
Beam 105 112 Plate ... 367

␴v 134 51,139 ␴v <9 13
Table B-5 Beam Stresses, psi, for ASME Service

Level C Table B-7 Plate Stresses, psi, for ASME Service
Level C
Body Neck Shaft
(BP-1) (BP-2, 3) Wafer Bracket
Beam 105 112 Plate ... 367

␴m 12 52 ␴m <16 21
Beam 105 110 Plate 309 ...

␴m+b 648 15,395 ␴m+b 11,078 <3,854
Beam 105 112 Plate ... 367

␴v 139 51,139 ␴v <11 15
36
ASME QME-1–2007
Table B-8 Other Locations

Wedge Pin
␴p p 11,293 psi < ␴all p 92,480 psi
Wafer Hub
␴t p 10,492 psi < ␴all p 17,500 psi
Bolts (bracket to neck)
␴t p small
Table B-9 4-in. Valve Nodal Displacements, in., for ASME Service Level C
Allowable Safety
Location Node ⌬G1 ⌬G2 ⌬G3 SRSS [Note (1)] Factor
Wafer 23 0.003166 0.00000125 0.0000182 0.003166 0.010 3.16

Shaft bearing 6 0.00000824 0.00000227 0.000000476 0.00000856 0.010 1000.00
Bracket 57 0.0000296 0.0000104 0.0000315 0.0000444 0.020 450.00
NOTE:
(1) Supplied by manufacturer.
B-2.5 Deformations and Operability (b) The membrane ( ␴ m ), membrane plus bending
(␴m+b), and shear (␴v ) stresses developed under the com-
Computed displacements are given in Table B-9. Also bined loadings specified are all within the appropriate
provided are the allowable clearances obtained from the allowable values.
valve manufacturer. (c) The displacements calculated are well below the
limits that could cause valve leakage or shaft binding.
B-2.6 Summary and Concluding Remarks It is therefore ensured that the seismic acceleration
design values given in para. B-2.3 do not adversely affect
(a) The valve had its lowest natural frequency above the leak-tight, structural integrity, and function or subse-
33 Hz and therefore can be considered rigid. quent operation of the valve.
37
ASME QME-1–2007
Attachment C
Qualification of Pumps and Valves
Using Natural Earthquake Experience Data
C-1 INTRODUCTION being evaluated with the estimated ground motion that
similar equipment in the database actually resisted in
This attachment illustrates an approach using a natu-
natural earthquakes. To simplify this comparison, the
ral earthquake experience database in establishing the
bounding spectrum is normally expressed in terms of
functional qualification of certain classes of mechanical
the ground response at the site rather than floor or equip-
equipment in nuclear power plants, specifically pumps
ment response.
and valves. This attachment draws heavily on proce-
The bounding spectrum shown in Fig. C-1 is intended
dures developed by the Seismic Qualification Utility
for comparison with the 5% damped design horizontal
Group (SQUG), as discussed in NUREG-1211. Formal
ground response spectrum at a given nuclear power
development of an earthquake database sponsored by plant site. In other words, if the horizontal ground
SQUG began in 1982, and the available natural earth- response spectrum for the nuclear plant site is less than
quake experience database expands with each new a bounding spectrum at the approximate frequency of
major seismic event. New data have consistently led vibration of the equipment and at all greater frequencies
to increased confidence in the use of this technique to (also referred to as the frequency range of interest), then
describe behavior of mechanical equipment in earth- the equipment class associated with that spectrum is
quakes and for evaluating and qualifying equipment for considered to be included within the scope of this
functional adequacy in earthquakes. This has estab- method. Alternatively, 1.5 times the bounding spectra
lished the technical basis for the use of natural earth- may be compared with the applicable 5% building and
quake experience data for postearthquake functional 5% equipment damped horizontal floor spectrum in the
qualification purposes. nuclear plant.
Pumps and valves demonstrate significant inherent The comparison of the bounding spectrum with
seismic resistance when properly anchored and not sub- design horizontal ground response spectra is acceptable
jected to impacting forces from seismic spatial interac- for pumps and valves mounted at less than approxi-
tions. The functional qualification for pumps and valves mately 40 ft above grade (the top of the ground sur-
identified herein is for operability following the earth- rounding the building). It should be noted that, in
quake. Data have not yet been developed that conclu- general, this procedure of direct comparison of a
sively demonstrate that pumps and valves function bounding spectrum with ground spectrum applies only
properly during the earthquake; however, there are no to equipment with as-anchored frequencies of less than
data to suggest that pump and valve operability during 8 Hz. However, for both valves and pumps, the 8 Hz
an earthquake is a significant issue, except where there lower-bound frequency requirement is unnecessary. For
has been earthquake-induced damage. equipment mounted at more than approximately 40 ft
The requirements of this attachment in no way reduce above grade, comparisons of 1.5 times the bounding
or modify the ASME BPVC Section III requirements spectra with horizontal floor spectra are necessary.
applicable to construction of pumps and valves, nor do Based on the review of data from a large number of
they ensure generic acceptance by regulatory author- earthquakes, it was judged that the vertical component
ities. is not any more significant relative to the horizontal
components for nuclear plants than it was for the data-
C-2 APPLICATION base plants. Therefore, it was concluded that seismic
bounds could be defined purely in terms of horizontal
With certain caveats and exclusions that are described motion levels.
in C-3, it is possible to demonstrate seismic ruggedness The criteria are met when the 5% damped design
for many classes of equipment at a nuclear power plant horizontal spectrum lies below the bounding spectrum
through use of a seismic bounding spectrum. An exam- at frequencies greater than or equal to the fundamental
ple of such a bounding spectrum applicable to pumps frequency range of the equipment. This estimate can be
and valves is shown in Fig. C-1. The purpose of the made by experienced engineers using their own judg-
bounding spectrum is to allow a comparison of the ment without the need for equipment-specific analysis
potential seismic exposure of equipment in the plant or testing.
38
ASME QME-1–2007
Fig. C-1 Seismic Motion Bounding Spectrum Horizontal Ground Motion
1.0
5% damping
0.8
Spectral Acceleration, g
Bounding spectrum
0.6
0.4
Ground acceleration = 0.33 g

0.2
0.0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28
Frequency, Hz
C-3 CAVEATS AND EXCEPTIONS (d) Thrust restraint of the shaft in both axial directions
should exist.
C-3.1 Pumps
(e) Any relays used to control operability of horizontal
Pumps are relatively stiff and very rugged devices pumps must be separately evaluated.
due to their inherent design and operating requirements.
Motors for this class of equipment are also included for (f) Sufficient slack and flexibility must be present in
functional qualification of the assembly but not for the cooling, fuel, and electrical lines.
motor itself. Subject to the limitations described in (g) Consideration should be given to identify situa-
C-3.1.1 and C-3.1.2, the equipment meets the criteria for tions in which horizontal pumps may be affected by
seismic qualification for operability using the bounding gross pipe motion, differential displacement, and exces-
spectrum. sive nozzle loads. This is an issue associated with exces-
sive force on pump nozzles, which could potentially
C-3.1.1 Horizontal Pumps. Horizontal pumps
break the pump nozzle, cause pump body distortion
include rotary impeller and positive displacement
sufficient to cause binding, or fail the pump anchorage.
pumps. They may be driven by electric motors, recipro-
These excessive forces are uncommon and need only
cating piston engines, or steam turbines. Peripheral sys-
be considered if there is a long section of unsupported
tems are included if they are mounted directly on the
pump. The database is sufficiently broad so that hori- pipe, significant restraint of free end displacement of
zontal pumps of all capacities are included. the attached pipe, or a heavy valve attached to the pipe
For horizontal pumps, all such units are very rugged near the pump. An experienced engineer can assess
and need no further evaluation except as noted in the whether further evaluation is required beyond that iden-
following caveats: tified herein.
(a) The unit is properly anchored. Expansion anchors
are generally not acceptable unless the safety factor on C-3.1.2 Vertical Pumps. Vertical pumps include an
the anchor can be shown to exceed 4.0 for loads that electric motor drive attached to a base flange with a
include the dynamic cyclic characteristics of design basis centrifugal or deep well pump below the flange. Periph-
earthquake load. eral equipment attached to the pump is included. The
(b) Any vibration isolation system must be evaluated. database is sufficiently broad so that vertical pumps of
(c) The driver and pump must be connected by a all capacities are included. Vertical pumps above the
rigid base or skid. If not, the potential for differential flange are very rigid and need no further analysis except
displacement must be evaluated. as noted below.
39
ASME QME-1–2007
The variety of vertical pump configurations and shaft and interconnected by a drive shaft. The motor and gear
lengths below the flange, and the relatively small num- box serve as an actuator to operate the valve.
ber of database points in several categories, preclude Based on a review of the database and anticipated
the use of the database to screen all vertical pumps. variations in conditions, valves are sufficiently rugged
Vertical turbine pumps, i.e., deep well-submerged to survive a seismic event generating ground motion
pumps with cantilevered shafts up to 20 ft in length and within the bounding spectrum and remain operational
with bottom-bearing support of the shaft to the casing thereafter, provided that the following conditions exist
are well enough represented to meet the bounding crite- in the nuclear facility:
ria below the flange as well. Either individual analysis (a) The valve body is not cast iron.
or use of another method is required as a means of (b) The valve yoke construction is not cast iron in
evaluating other vertical pumps below the flange. The motor-operated valves, piston-operated valves, and
chief concerns would be damage to bearings due to spring-operated pressure relief valves.
excessive loads, damage to the impeller due to excessive (c) The valve is mounted on a pipe of 1 in. diameter
displacement, and damage due to interfloor displace- or greater.
ment on multifloor-supported pumps. There is evidence
(d) For air-operated diaphragm valves, piston-oper-
of increased wear and maintenance required on vertical
ated valves that are lightweight similar to air-operated
pumps after earthquakes.
diaphragm valves, and spring-operated pressure relief
The caveats for vertical pumps are as follows:
valves, the distance from the centerline of the pipe to
(a) The unit is properly anchored. Expansion anchors the top of the operator or cylinder shall not exceed the
are not acceptable unless the safety factor on the anchor distance indicated in Fig. C-2 corresponding to the diam-
can be shown to exceed 4.0 for loads that include the eter of the pipe.
dynamic cyclic characteristics of the design basis earth-
(e) For motor- and piston-operated valves that are of
quake load.
substantial weight, the distance from the centerline of
(b) Vertical pumps with shaft lengths in excess of 20 ft the pipe to the top of the operator or cylinder and the
must be evaluated separately. The impeller drive shaft weight of the operator shall not exceed the values indi-
must be supported within the casing. cated in Fig. C-3 corresponding to the diameter of the
(c) Brief consideration should be given to avoid situa- pipe.
tions in which vertical pumps may be affected by gross (f) The actuator and yoke are supported by the pipe,
pipe motion, differential displacement, and nozzle loads and neither is independently braced to the structure or
(see C-3.1.1 discussion for horizontal pumps). supported by the structure unless the pipe is also braced
(d) Any relays on the vertical pumps and motors must immediately adjacent to the valves to a common
be separately evaluated to determine possible effects of structure.
seismically induced vibration.
(g) Sufficient slack and flexibility is provided in the
(e) Sufficient slack and flexibility must be present in tubing, conduits, or piping that supply the air or power
cooling and electrical instrument, power, and control needed to operate the valve.
lines. Figure C-3 for motor-operated valves and substantial
piston-operated valves may not cover all combinations
C-3.2 Valves of operator weight and eccentricity from the pipe center-
Valves of many different types that are present on line due to limits in the database. Some extrapolation
piping in nuclear power plants are covered in this Sec- of the values in Fig. C-3 may be done provided that the
tion, including air-operated diaphragm valves, piston- engineer making the extrapolation uses sound engi-
operated valves, spring-operated pressure relief valves, neering judgment. For example, for a given pipe diame-
and motor-operated valves. Not included in the data- ter, the values of operator weight and distance to the
base in sufficient quantities and not covered in this Sec- top of the operator from centerline of pipe may be varied
tion are liquid-operated piston valves, such as hydraulic provided that their product, a measure of the cantilever
piston-operated valves. moment applied to the pipe, does not exceed the value
Air-operated diaphragm valves consist of a valve calculated from Fig. C-3. The distance to the top of the
operated by a rod actuated by air pressure against a operator may not be increased by the procedure by more
diaphragm attached to the rod. The actuator is sup- than approximately 30%. Likewise, if the ground motion
ported by the valve body through a cantilevered yoke. spectra for the site is below the bounding spectrum in
Piston-operated valves or spring-operated pressure the entire frequency range possible for the piping and
relief valves contain air or liquid in a cylinder or chamber valve network, the operator weight or distance to the
that actuates the valve with control provided by a spring. top of the operator can be increased by the ratio of the
Motor-operated valves consist of an electric motor and spectra. Either of these values may not be increased by
gear box cantilevered from the valve body by a yoke more than approximately 30% by this procedure.
40
ASME QME-1–2007
Fig. C-2 Limits of Experience Data for Motor-Operated Valves and Substantial Piston-Operated Valves
100 Outside experience data
Inside experience data

Operator Height, in., From Centerline of Pipe
80
to Top of Operator or Cylinder
750 lb
(approximate
maximum operator
weight)
60
400 lb
40
200 lb
30
75 lb 100 lb
25
0
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Pipe Diameter, in.
GENERAL NOTE: Copyright © 1990. Electric Power Research Institute. EPRI NP-6628. Procedure for Seismic Evaluation and Design of Small
Bore Piping. Reprinted with permission.
The operator weights given in Fig. C-3 are from the than those related to the distance of the top of the
database and may have been estimated slightly low from operator to the centerline of the pipe, given above, shall
available catalogs. Thus, if an actual operator is slightly remain in effect. Similarly, static tests can be performed
heavier than the value in Fig. C-3, the engineer evaluat- on a mock-up test stand provided that the valve details
ing the valve can use some engineering judgment in are very similar to those in the plant. If there are numer-
assigning similarity. ous valves, a rational test program can be developed to
For air- and liquid-operated valves not complying envelop the valve configurations in the plant. Alterna-
with the above limitations, the seismic ruggedness may tively, an analytical evaluation can be made.
be demonstrated by static test. In these tests, a static If the valve body is cast iron, the valve can be qualified,
force equal to three times the approximate operator provided that stress analysis of the valve and associated
weight shall be applied approximately at the center of piping reveals that total maximum stress from all
gravity of the operator nonconcurrently in each of the sources of load in the cast iron material does not exceed
three orthogonal principal axes of the yoke. Such tests 3,000 psi. It may be necessary to add braces to the piping
should include demonstration of operability following near the valve to obtain these low stresses in the
the application of the static loads. The limitations other valve body.
41
ASME QME-1–2007
Fig. C-3 Limits of Experience Data for Air-Operated Diaphragm Valves, Spring-Operated Pressure
Relief Valves, and Piston-Operated Valves of Lightweight Construction
Outside experience data

Operator Height, in., From Centerline of Pipe
Inside experience data

to Top of Operator or Cylinder
60
45
0
1 4
Pipe Diameter, in.
GENERAL NOTE: Copyright © 1990. Electric Power Research Institute. EPRI NP-6628. Procedure for Seismic Evaluation and Design of Small
Bore Piping. Reprinted with permission.
42
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B

Guide for Qualification of Nonmetallic Parts
QR-B1000 SCOPE QR-B3000 REFERENCES

This Appendix recommends a methodology and IEEE Std 101-1987, Guide for the Statistical Analysis of
describes the documentation that should be available in Thermal Life Test Data
a user’s (generally a utility’s) files to demonstrate the IEEE Std 323-1983, Qualification of 1E Equipment for
qualification of nonmetallic parts, materials, or lubri- Nuclear Power Generating Stations
cants (nonmetallics). It covers the qualification of non- IEEE Std 627-1980, Design Qualification of Safety
metallics in new equipment and existing equipment that Systems Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Generat-
is within the scope of the user’s mechanical equipment ing Stations
qualification program.
Publisher: Institute of Electrical and Electronics
It provides guidance for the utilization of nonmetallics
test data, documented service life information, analysis
08854-1331
as a means of qualification, qualification testing of non-
metallics, and the establishment of limitations on the
use of certain nonmetallics to ensure their acceptable QR-B4000 DEFINITIONS
performance. It provides guidance on the factors to be
considered in qualifying equipment utilizing these non- All definitions are contained in QR-4000.
metallics for service in nuclear power plant environ-
ments.
This Appendix addresses the steps for the user of the QR-B5000 REQUIREMENTS
mechanical equipment to follow in order to qualify and
QR-B5100 General
maintain the qualification of the nonmetallics that are
a part of the mechanical equipment. Normally, nonmetallics in mechanical equipment are
more susceptible to degradation resulting from normal,
abnormal, and accident environmental and service con-
QR-B2000 PURPOSE ditions than are metallic parts. The qualification of the
The purpose of this Appendix is to provide guidance nonmetallics in mechanical equipment shall be demon-
for demonstrating and maintaining the environmental strated for the applicable postulated service and envi-
qualification of nonmetallics. It provides guidance for ronmental conditions to ensure that the equipment can
the use of nonmetallic test data, documented service life perform its intended safety function.
information, analysis, and qualification testing as means The nonmetallics shall be identified by their specific
of demonstrating the environmental qualification of material name, manufacturer, manufacturer’s specific
nonmetallics. compound, configuration, and their safety function(s).
This Appendix is nonmandatory. It provides recom- All of the environmental service conditions at the loca-
mended methods for the demonstration and mainte- tion of the nonmetallic shall be clearly defined. The effect
nance of the environmental qualification of of the process medium temperature on the life of the
nonmetallics. As a nonmandatory recommended guide, nonmetallic should be evaluated for any process
it contains wording such as shall, should, and may. The medium whose temperature is higher than the highest
word shall is used to denote a suggested requirement, external environmental temperature. Temperature rise
the word should to denote a suggested recommendation, within the mechanical equipment during operation of
and the word may to denote permission, neither a the equipment should also be included when defining
requirement nor a recommendation. the environment for a nonmetallic.
This Appendix provides guidance on the necessary When qualification is by analysis, it is important that
documentation requirements that are specific to nonme- the combined effects of the environmental parameters
tallics to ensure the existence of accurate and complete be fully considered in the analysis. The combined effects
records of qualification. It provides the user with those of time–temperature and radiation degradation should
factors that should be considered when preparing a qual- be considered. The effect that exceeding the radiation
ification maintenance program for the equipment in threshold could have on the time–temperature analysis
which the nonmetallics are used. should be included in the analysis.
43
ASME QME-1–2007
The effects of environmental and service conditions (f) duration: normal, DBE, post-DBE
should be evaluated, and all failure mechanisms associ- (g) spray: chemical, demineralized water
ated with these conditions should be identified. This (h) submergence
evaluation should be used in selecting an appropriate
qualification method. QR-B5220 Internal Conditions. The internal condi-
tions depend upon the application of the mechanical
QR-B5200 Identification and Specification of equipment and vary accordingly. These parameters may
Qualification Requirements include
Each nonmetallic shall be identified by material type. (a) process fluid media type and chemistry
It is important to be as specific as possible, since there (b) process temperature
may be variations in degradation properties of nonme- (c) process pressure
tallics within the same generic material family. The fol- (d) process relative humidity
lowing are necessary to properly identify nonmetallics: (e) process radiation
(a) commercial name/trade name of the material (f) mechanical stress
(b) manufacturer
(c) generic name/chemical name of the material QR-B5300 Selection of Qualification Methods
(d) dimensions of the part(s) composed of the material Acceptable methods of qualification are testing, anal-
(e) chemical composition of the material ysis, use of operating experience, and combinations
(f) manufacturer’s compound identification for the thereof. The choice of qualification method will depend
material upon the severity of the environmental and service con-
(g) material’s activation energy (in conjunction with ditions and the resulting failure mechanisms for the
one of the above identification methods only and that nonmetallics. In some instances, it may also depend on
is based on the material’s critical failure mechanism in the data available to document qualification.
the intended service) Analysis may be used when a well-defined model
NOTE: When properties for a specific material are not available, exists for evaluating the effect of the environmental and
the qualifier should choose data for materials of the same family service conditions on the nonmetallics. The use of analy-
and failure mechanism as the materials in question. The qualifier sis is simplified when the number of influences on the
shall provide a basis as to why these properties are conservative. nonmetallics is limited to one or at most two parameters.
The safety functions of each nonmetallic should be Operating experience may be used if it can be adequately
specified. Its location and function in the equipment documented and shown to envelop the specified normal,
should be identified. The effects of failure modes (the accident, and post-accident environmental and service
component’s manufacturer should be consulted for conditions of the nonmetallic. Testing to simulated con-
advice/assistance in making this determination) for the ditions may be used when applicable analytical models
nonmetallic should be evaluated with respect to its do not exist or when the number of influences to be
safety function. Nonmetallics having no failure modes considered makes their use difficult. Any of the methods
under the specified environmental and service condi- may be used in conjunction with another. For example,
tions that affect the safety function of the mechanical operating experience could be used to limit or eliminate
equipment may be excluded from qualification. How- the need for normal life simulation. The reasoning for
ever, the evaluation leading to their exclusion should be the choice of methods should be documented in the
recorded in the mechanical equipment’s qualification qualification record.
documentation. Following qualification, it may be necessary to use
alternate nonmetallics or change the configuration of
QR-B5210 External Conditions. The external service nonmetallics in the course of equipment evolution. The
conditions should be specified separately from the con- effects of these changes and/or substitutions should be
ditions at the location of the nonmetallic (internal to evaluated to determine if the nonmetallic’s qualification
the mechanical equipment). The specification for the has been affected. The evaluation should be documented
external conditions should include normal, abnormal, and become part of the qualification record for the asso-
and postulated design basis event (DBE) parameters. ciated mechanical equipment. If the evaluation deter-
These parameters may include, but are not limited to, mines that qualification has been affected, the
the following: nonmetallics shall be qualified in accordance with all of
(a) temperature the requirements of this Appendix. Analysis may be
(b) pressure used provided it is documented; it demonstrates that
(c) relative humidity the substituted nonmetallics are equal or superior to the
(d) radiation: gamma, beta, neutron (doses and rates, qualified nonmetallics in materials, design, and applica-
under normal and accident conditions) tion, and it demonstrates that they do not compromise
(e) cycling/operability: wear, make/break the performance of the mechanical equipment under
44
ASME QME-1–2007
any postulated normal, abnormal, and/or accident QR-B5500 Documentation

condition. The qualification of nonmetallics shall be docu-
The qualified life, replacement schedule, and replace- mented. The equipment user should maintain the record
ment procedures for the qualified nonmetallics should of qualification. The documentation should, as a mini-
be determined and recorded in the qualification docu- mum, include
mentation. Reference to another appropriate document (a) identification of each of the nonmetallics in the
containing the data may be made in lieu of repeating equipment
the contents of that document. (b) description of its application/function in the
The shelf life of all nonmetallics, and any applicable mechanical equipment
storage limitations, should be determined and recorded (c) the equipment’s postulated internal and external
in the qualification documentation. service conditions
(d) the Qualification Report
QR-B5400 Preservation of Qualification
(e) the qualified life of each nonmetallic
Once qualified mechanical equipment is installed, its (f) the qualification for replacement nonmetallics that
qualified condition should be preserved through appro- were not part of the original qualification
priate preventive maintenance, testing, and monitoring. (g) schedules and requirements for maintenance/sur-
Care should be taken to ensure that nonmetallics are veillance
exposed to conditions that are no more severe than those (h) shelf life preservation requirements
for which they have been qualified. Qualification documentation should include as much
If during the course of their service life, nonmetallics detail as possible concerning assumptions and consider-
are exposed to conditions not bounded by the qualifica- ations made during the performance of the qualification.
tion, their ability to withstand these conditions shall Such details are of great use during the service life of
be evaluated, and, as appropriate, further qualification mechanical equipment when further analysis and evalu-
shall be performed. This additional qualification may ation of the qualification of nonmetallics is necessary. It
result in shorter qualified life, increased surveillance should also establish traceability and similarity to the
requirements, or the need for the use of another material. tested/analyzed materials for the nonmetallics that are
The preventive maintenance that was assumed or sim- installed in the qualified component.
ulated under the qualification program should be per- Article QR-B7000 describes the details of the docu-
formed upon the installed component to preserve the mentation procedure requirements of this Appendix.
qualification of the component. Nonmetallics should be
replaced prior to the end of their qualified lives. Any
QR-B6000 METHODS OF QUALIFICATION
time that the nonmetallic is disturbed, such as during
corrective maintenance, it shall be returned to the condi- QR-B6100 General
tion assumed or simulated in the qualification. For This article provides guidance on the application of
example, disturbing crush seal O-rings will require their testing, experience data, and analysis to qualify nonme-
replacement. The maintenance program for the overall tallics for their safety functions. Each of these methods
component should ensure that all covers, seals, etc., that has certain strengths and weaknesses that the qualifica-
protect nonmetallics from the environment or inadver- tion engineer should consider in selecting the most
tent physical damage are restored following mainte- appropriate method, or combination of methods, for a
nance. specific component. It is the qualifier’s responsibility to
Failure or unexpected wear out of nonmetallics during ensure that any qualification of nonmetallics is done to
the service life of the associated component should be the same margins as is required by QME-1 Sections QP
evaluated to determine whether the condition resulted and QV, as applicable.
from a random defect or stress that was not fully consid- Testing at the actual conditions desired for qualifica-
ered during the qualification. If the condition resulted tion will normally provide the most assurance that the
from such a stress, appropriate action, such as eliminat- nonmetallic will perform acceptably. However, it may
ing the stress, limiting the life of the nonmetallic, or be necessary to approximate the anticipated conditions
requalification, should be taken. as a result of limited time and test facility capabilities.
Where uncertainties exist in qualification models or The qualifier shall consider the effects of these approxi-
in accurately defining environmental or service condi- mations on the qualification results.
tions at the location of the nonmetallic, condition moni- The application of experience from actual service of
toring may be used to establish replacement and a similar nature to that desired for qualification may
refurbishment schedules. Intervals between monitoring provide information from applicable environments, but
the condition of the nonmetallic should be set such that adequate documentation of that experience may be diffi-
wear out or failure does not occur prior to observation cult to maintain and retrieve. The qualifier shall exercise
of the condition. care in extrapolating these data for use in environments
45
ASME QME-1–2007
other than those for which actual data are available. kB p Boltzmann’s constant
Analysis can be an effective method of demonstrating p 0.8617 ⴛ 10−4 eV⁄K
the applicability of information for one nonmetallic to T1 p accelerated aging temperature, K
the qualification of another. However, great care should T2 p qualified service temperature, K
be taken to ensure that the methods used for the compar- t1 p accelerated aging time, units of time (usually
ison are validated and appropriate for the specific quali- days)
fication activity. t2 p qualified service duration, same units of time
In most cases, a combination of the three methods as t1
will provide the most accurate and reliable qualification.
Prior to selecting the method(s) to be used in a particu- One of the most important assumptions on which the
lar qualification application, the qualifier should evalu- Arrhenius Model is based is that the activation energy
ate the potential failure modes of the nonmetallic(s) and of the reaction remains constant over the temperature
the consequences of that failure. Formalized approaches range of interest. Activation energies for most elasto-
to this analysis, such as failure modes and effects analy- meric materials are typically in the range of 0.75 eV to
sis, should be considered. Such an analysis can assist 0.85 eV. However, there is a great deal of data available
the qualifier in predicting the most probable failure to the qualifier with higher and lower electronvolts. It
mode (such as tensile failure, compression set, and is the qualifier’s responsibility to review the available
others) and the degree to which the degraded part can literature and databases to determine the electronvolt
perform its safety function. most applicable to the material and the specific usage
In order to be qualified to the criteria of this article, for which it is being qualified.
the nonmetallic shall demonstrate that after exposure It is the responsibility of the qualifier to determine
to its normal and/or accident environment, it will retain the activation energy of the material being qualified.
sufficient properties to perform its intended safety func- The manufacturer of the nonmetallic is normally the
tion. It shall have at least the specified minimum elastic- primary source for this information. If the manufacturer
ity, tensile or compressive strength, or other pertinent is unable to provide the required information and the
property that the mechanical equipment manufacturer qualifier uses data for similar materials, it shall be dem-
deems necessary for it to perform its safety function. onstrated that the value selected is conservative for the
material being qualified, intended use/configuration of
QR-B6200 Arrhenius Model the material, and environmental conditions for which
the qualification is intended.
A recognized method of characterizing accelerated
thermal aging effects and estimating equivalent damage NOTE: Lower values of activation energy produce conservative
results when predicting lifetimes from accelerated aging tests. The
at specific time–temperature points is the application of
reasonableness of these results should be considered in the determi-
the Arrhenius Model. This methodology is described nation of the qualified life of the nonmetallic.
below.
It has been generally demonstrated that for many The Arrhenius Model is presented here because of its
nonmetallics, the time–temperature degradation pro- wide acceptance in the determination of thermal aging
cess can be described in a single temperature-dependent effects. However, other models have also been devel-
reaction that follows the Arrhenius equation: oped, especially by material manufacturers. It is recom-
mended that the Arrhenius Model be used.
k p A exp [−(Ea ⁄ kBT)]
QR-B6300 Testing
where Testing a nonmetallic at conditions similar to those
A p frequency factor (assumed constant) for which it is to be qualified can provide a high level
Ea p activation energy, eV of confidence in its ability to perform its safety function.
exp p exponent to base e Testing shall subject the nonmetallic to load conditions,
k p reaction rate durations, and sequences that have been shown to be
kB p Boltzmann’s constant at least as severe as the conditions for which the nonme-
p 0.8617 ⴛ 10−4 eV⁄K tallic is to be qualified. Except as described in QR-B6310
T p absolute temperature, K and QR-B6320, the sequence of applied loads should
duplicate, to the extent practicable, the environment for
This equation can be rearranged into the following which the nonmetallic is to be qualified. A typical
form, which is more useful: sequence includes thermal aging, radiation exposure,
and operation under the qualification conditions of tem-
t2 p t1 exp Ea ⁄ kB [1 ⁄ T2 − 1 ⁄ T1] perature, pressure, humidity, and chemical environment.
The test sequence, whether as described above or some
where other, shall be justified and documented as appropriate
Ea p activation energy of the nonmetallic, eV for the qualification application.
46
ASME QME-1–2007
It is preferred that the nonmetallic be tested when During the thermal aging process, the nonmetallic
installed in the actual equipment in which it performs shall be mounted or contained in its normal configura-
its safety-related function. If this is not practical, the tion, either as installed in the mechanical equipment or
fixture used should accurately simulate the actual instal- in a test fixture.
lation of the nonmetallic.
QR-B6320 Radiation Aging. Radiation aging is used
During the qualification testing, typical conditions of
in the qualification process to cause material degrada-
static and mechanical loads (including operating cycles),
tion that is at least as severe as that which is anticipated
chemical environment, radiation environment, tempera-
to occur in the service for which the nonmetallic is to
ture, and pressure shall be applied. The operating cycles
during aging (end-of-life conditions) should simulate be qualified. Since it is frequently impractical to expose
expected operation for the same interval as the acceler- the nonmetallic to its end-of-life condition at normal
ated normal life. Separate operating cycles should be exposure rates, it is permissible to accelerate the radia-
imposed during simulated accident exposure for equip- tion aging by exposing the nonmetallic to a higher dose
ment that is expected to operate during and/or follow- rate for a shorter length of time than anticipated in
ing exposure to an accident or postaccident service. The maximum exposure rate should be limited
environment(s). The test conditions and duration of test- to a level that prevents excessive temperature rise in the
ing shall be as severe as the conditions for which the material and subsequent nontypical material property
nonmetallic is to be qualified. changes. The effects of self-shielding and location of the
Considerable data exist as a result of testing per- source(s) should also be evaluated and justified. The
formed by manufacturers and users of nonmetallics. possibility that low-dose rates experienced in actual ser-
With proper verification of the validity and applicability, vice may be more damaging than the higher rates
these data can be used in the qualification process. This applied during qualification should also be considered.
verification should include a consideration of the physi- Consideration should be given to the types of radia-
cal and chemical properties, test sequences, loads and tion (beta, gamma, etc.) that the equipment and its non-
load combinations applied, durations of loads, and metallics will see in service. These types of radiation
potential synergistic effects. A sound basis shall be pro- shall be addressed in any testing program and the appro-
vided for accepting testing sequences other than those priate exposure requirements established by the
stated above. qualifier.
Other factors to consider include the size and shape of QR-B6330 Mechanical Wear Aging. Mechanical
the nonmetallic being tested, amount of the nonmetallic wear resulting from operating cycles is an important
exposed to the test environment, and variation of the qualification consideration. It is desirable to perform the
material properties within the specific material com- wear cycles during the accelerated thermal and radiation
pound. The effect of a given environment on one prop- aging process to account for any transitory property
erty of the material shall not be used to infer the effect changes. The qualifier should consider the fact that accel-
of that environment on other properties unless the erated aging (thermal and radiation) may impose differ-
appropriate correlation is justified. ent loadings and material property characteristics on the
The uncertainties inherent in the test methods, test nonmetallic. If it is determined that this is the case,
facilities, assumptions, and judgments concerning se- mechanical wear aging should be performed under con-
quences of loads applied and other factors should be ditions that more accurately reflect actual operating con-
considered when establishing qualification margins. ditions. Wear-aging testing should address any
QR-B6310 Thermal Aging. Thermal aging is lubrication requirements for the nonmetallic being
imposed on nonmetallics to approximate, during qualifi- tested. The wear cycles should be imposed in combina-
cation testing, the thermal degradation expected over tion with the other loads anticipated in actual service.
the life of the nonmetallic. This testing can be performed However, if this is impractical, the wear-aging cycles
at the temperatures expected during the life of the non- may be applied during another part of the qualification
metallic or can be accelerated to some extent by sub- process, provided that the deviations from the antici-
jecting the nonmetallic to higher than expected pated operating sequences are justified.
temperatures for a shorter time than anticipated in ser-
vice. If accelerated aging is used in the qualification QR-B6400 Use of Experience
process, extreme care shall be taken to ensure that atypi- Data obtained from operating experience are consid-
cal material changes resulting from the elevated temper- ered comparable with test data, provided the total envi-
ature do not invalidate the test data. A method of ronment in which the nonmetallic was used is well
showing a correlation between the long-term thermally characterized. Appropriate conservatism shall be used
induced degradation at one temperature and the acceler- to account for the unknowns associated with the reduced
ated degradation that occurs at elevated temperatures control on actual operating environments compared
is described in QR-B6200. with typical test environments.
47
ASME QME-1–2007
Since qualification testing usually requires the imposi- (b) comparison of specifications and functions of the
tion of DBE conditions following aging of the nonmetal- nonmetallics to be qualified with those having operating
lic, a common application of experience data in experience data
qualification is the testing at DBE conditions of the non- (c) summary of operating experience data, including
metallic previously used in the actual environment of operating conditions, maintenance records, and
interest. operating history
Without further testing, the experience data shall ade- (d) the logic used to qualify the nonmetallic for its
quately demonstrate that the criteria stated in QR-B6100 intended service based on the available experience data
for demonstration of qualification can be met. (e) limitations on the qualification
QR-B6500 Qualification by Analysis QR-B7200 Documentation for Qualification by

Nonmetallics may also be qualified through the use Analysis
of analysis. Analysis may be used to show that test (a) description of the analytical methods, computer
or experience conditions are more severe than those codes, or mathematical model used and the method of
to which the candidate nonmetallic is to be qualified. verification
Analysis is also used to determine the loads that are to (b) description of the assumptions and empirical data
be applied in the qualification process. It can also be used, along with the appropriate justifications
used to demonstrate that specific load combinations are (c) description of the analytically established per-
appropriate for a given qualification activity. The analyt- formance characteristics and/or the sources of the test
ical techniques used should be based on sound engi- data used to perform the analysis, along with justifica-
neering principles and should have been verified by tion of the data’s applicability to the specific qualifica-
independent means to demonstrate their validity for the tion program
functional characteristic being analyzed. All assump- (d) conclusions, including any limitations on qualifi-
tions and approximations included in the analyses shall cation
be clearly defined and justified.
Without further testing, the analysis should ade- QR-B7300 Documentation for Qualification by
quately demonstrate that the criteria stated in QR-B6100 Combined Methods
for demonstration of qualification can be met. When combined methods of qualification are used,
the appropriate requirements of QR-B7100 and
QR-B7000 DOCUMENTATION QR-B7200 shall be complied with.
In addition to the documentation requirements con- QR-B7400 Documentation of Modifications or

tained in QR-7000, the requirements in QR-B7100 Changes That Can Affect Qualification of
through QR-B7400 shall be met when one of the stated Nonmetallics
methods is used to qualify nonmetallics. All modifications to qualified nonmetallics made dur-
ing the installed life of the component should be docu-
QR-B7100 Documentation for Qualification by mented by the component user. The evaluation of the
Operating Experience modification’s effect to the nonmetallic should be docu-
(a) identification of the specification for the non- mented, as should any requalification that is determined
metallics for which operating experience is available to be necessary.
48
ASME QME-1–2007
Section QDR
Qualification of Dynamic Restraints
QDR-1000 SCOPE break away: the force required to initiate movement in

one direction.
Section QDR contains the qualification requirements
and guidelines for ASME Code qualified dynamic candidate restraint: those components qualified through
restraint assemblies. Restraint assembly items may be extension of parent qualification.
qualified as part of a restraint assembly or qualified dead band: the free axial movement of the restraint
separately. It is the responsibility of the Owner or the between the two activation levels in opposite directions.
Owner’s designee, hereafter referred to as the Owner, drag: the load required to maintain restraint movement
to specify those restraint assemblies to which this Section at a specific velocity.
will be applied.
The scope of this Standard is limited to hydraulic dynamic restraint: any restraint that, by design, has a
snubbers, mechanical snubbers, and gap restraints. primary purpose of controlling dynamic movement of
Restraint assemblies and restraint assembly items quali- a pipe or component.
fied in accordance with this Section shall meet the gap: the physical distance the pipe or component will
requirements of Section QR. Where the requirements of travel along the restraint axis before movement is
Section QDR conflict with the requirements of restricted.
Section QR, the requirements of Section QDR take parent restraint: components used to initially qualify a
precedence. given design.
QDR-1100 Boundaries of Jurisdiction rated load: the design load capacity for the restraint based
on the use of Level A Service Limits defined by
All elements of a restraint within the Boundaries of
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section III.
Jurisdiction are within the scope of Section QDR. The
Boundaries of Jurisdiction are defined as pin-to-pin of release rate: the rate of the restraint axial movement after
the restraint. the activation of the restraint under a specified load.
This qualification standard augments, but does not spring rate: the linear approximation of the relationship
replace, the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure of the load displacement characteristics of the restraint.
Vessel Code (BPVC) Section III, Subsection NF. stroke: the maximum available axial movement of the
device.
QDR-2000 PURPOSE
The purpose of Section QDR is to define requirements QDR-4000 QUALIFICATION PRINCIPLES AND
and provide guidelines for the qualification of the design PHILOSOPHY
of the dynamic restraint assembly. Initial qualification The fundamental principles and philosophy per-
shall be achieved by testing and analysis in order to taining to equipment qualification are provided in Sec-
provide assurance that the restraint in service shall function QR, Article QR-5000 and apply to mechanical
tion as required under all specified design conditions. equipment in general. Qualification requirements spe-
A functional specification for dynamic restraints that cific to the restraint assembly or restraint assembly items
specifies the functional parameters and general per- are contained in Articles QDR-5000 through QDR-7000
formance requirements provides the basis for qualifi- of this Section.
cation. Restraints are used to control dynamic system
responses. Ideally, under a steady or continuing force,
QDR-3000 DEFINITIONS the system or component supported by restraints will
move freely, as if the restraints did not exist. However,
These definitions establish the meaning of words in when a force is applied suddenly, restraints will control
the context of their use in this Section and supplement dynamic responses so that the stresses in the supported
those listed in Section QR. system will not exceed allowable code limits.
activation: the change of condition from passive to active, The basic characteristic of a dynamic restraint is its
in which a snubber resists rapid displacement of the ability to develop a force-displacement relationship dur-
attached pipe or component. ing dynamic loading that will restrain the movement of
49
ASME QME-1–2007
the component. The qualification program for dynamic rating, and spring rate, as applicable to the individual
restraints will adequately define the level of this force- design.
displacement relationship at various operating frequen- (a) Activation of the restraint is triggered when the
cies. Additionally, the qualification program may predict design characteristic (a velocity or an acceleration)
the degradation of these force-displacement relation- reaches a predetermined value in either direction. The
ships when subjected to operational and severe environ- activation level is determined by rapid application of a
mental conditions, such as high-cycle fatigue, humidity, single direction load of increasing velocity. Only a small
dirt, dust, spray, radiation, or other environmental con- fraction of the rated load is normally required to activate
ditions. Each restraint device will have different func- a restraint. Some restraint designs may not have an active
tional parameters that will be specific to its operation triggering characteristic but instead rely on passive
and that will govern the level and degree of qualification inherent nonlinear response. In such cases, this test, and
needed to define this force-displacement relationship. the determination of the dead band, would not be appli-
The qualification program shall identify the key func- cable.
tional parameters to be qualified for the specific restraint (b) Release rate is the velocity at which restraint
type identified. Some typical values of the more common motion occurs after activation has taken place. It can be
functional parameters requiring qualification for identi- measured during the activation test of the restraint. The
fied devices are contained in Nonmandatory Appendix release rate magnitude depends upon the loading mag-
QDR-C. nitude and is an indication of the recovery rate of the
Vibration of piping systems has a detrimental effect restraint as it returns to the inactivated condition. The
on the long-term performance of a restraint. System release rate magnitude needs to be determined for sev-
vibrations may result in reduced fatigue life and possibly eral levels up to the faulted load in both directions, all
increased restraint aging. at a specific temperature.
The load-displacement relationship is used by design- (c) Break away can be determined using a load cell
ers for the modeling of restraints in a system analysis to measure the force required to initiate movement. True
and, in turn, adds to the validity of the system analysis. break away can only be determined in one direction per
The spring rate is a simplified expression of the force- test sequence. Note that in laboratory environments, this
displacement relationship of the restraint under the test can be performed with adequate controls, but it is
action of a cyclically applied load equal to the magnitude not intended to be performed as any part of an in-service
of the rated load in both tension and compression. The operability testing program.
spring rate may vary as a function of the frequency and (d) Drag can be determined using a load cell to mea-
magnitude of the applied load. sure the force required to move the restraint at a specific
Section QR-7340 describes qualification by similarity velocity. Testing shall be performed in both directions.
analysis. Nonmandatory Appendix QDR-B of this Sec- (e) Dead band can be determined by measuring the
tion contains typical parameters to be considered when distances traveled by the restraint before it activates in
qualification is to be established by similarity. opposite directions. The dead band can have a signifi-
cant effect on performance at all load levels. It is therefore
QDR-4100 Hydraulic Snubbers prudent to measure it with the associated loading at
Hydraulic snubbers are component standard supports several levels, up to the rated load.
used to mitigate the effects of a dynamic event. These (f) Load rating may be determined by test or analysis,
devices allow for relatively unrestricted movement at in accordance with ASME BPVC Section III, Subsec-
low velocities, typical of thermal growth rates. They tion NF.
control displacement velocities by passing a fluid (g) Spring rate shall be determined dynamically.
medium through some form of controlled passage or Additionally, a static spring rate may be determined if
orifice from the high-pressure portion of the fluid system required. The applied loads in tension and compression
to a lower pressure portion of the device. The controlled divided by the recorded displacements in tension and
flow rate determines the linear displacement of the pis- compression describe the spring rate, including dead
ton/piston rod. These devices typically provide some band. Methods of spring rate determination shall be
means of accommodating fluid expansion/contraction identified in the Functional Qualification Report
due to ambient temperature changes and may accommo- (QDR-7310).
date fluid volume differences associated with single pis- (h) The amount of stroke is typically dictated by the
ton rod designs. amount of thermal movement (in the restraint’s axial
direction) experienced at the location where the restraint
QDR-4110 Functional Parameters. The functional is to be used. The amount of stroke is predicated on what
parameters of snubbers are essential for the users to the pipe analysis indicates is appropriate. The stroke
design their systems. These parameters are activation is the physical distance the pipe will travel along the
level, release rate, break away, drag, dead band, load restraint axis.
50
ASME QME-1–2007
(i) While the rate of fluid loss in hydraulic restraints (f) Load rating may be determined by test or analysis,
is not strictly a functional parameter, it is important in accordance with ASME BPVC Section III, Subsec-
because hydraulic restraints will not function properly tion NF.
without hydraulic fluid. An acceptable limit for the fluid (g) Spring rate shall be determined dynamically.
loss rate is important to the qualification of a restraint Additionally, a static spring rate may be determined if
and therefore shall be considered in the functional speci- required. The applied loads in tension and compression
fication and subsequent testing. divided by the recorded displacements in tension and
compression describe the spring rate, including dead
QDR-4200 Mechanical Snubbers band. Methods of spring rate determination shall be
Mechanical snubbers are component standard sup- identified in the Functional Qualification Report
ports used to mitigate the effects of a dynamic event. (QDR-7310).
These devices allow for relatively unrestricted move- (h) The amount of stroke is typically dictated by the
ment at low velocities, typical of thermal growth rates. amount of thermal movement (in the restraint’s axial
They control displacements, displacement velocities, or direction) experienced at the location where the restraint
acceleration levels by mechanical means. is to be used. The amount of stroke is predicated on what
QDR-4210 Functional Parameters. The functional the pipe analysis indicates is appropriate. The stroke
parameters of snubbers are essential for the users to is the physical distance the pipe will travel along the
design their systems. These parameters are activation restraint axis.
level, break away, drag, dead band, load rating, and (i) The effects on the above functional parameters due
spring rate, as applicable to the individual design. to any form of lubricant used shall be considered in the
(a) Activation of the restraint is triggered when the functional specification and subsequent testing.
design characteristic (a velocity or an acceleration)
QDR-4300 Gap Restraints
reaches a predetermined value in either direction. The
activation level is determined by rapid application of a Gap restraints are nonlinear devices. The restraint pro-
single direction load of increasing velocity. Only a small vides a gap, which can be set for the predicted thermal
fraction of the rated load is normally required to activate movements of the piping at the installed location. This
a restraint. Some restraint designs may not have an active gap will allow free thermal expansion, or the device can
triggering characteristic but instead rely on passive be set so that there is a compromise between thermal
inherent nonlinear response. In such cases, this test and movement and dynamic gap (i.e., some thermal move-
the determination of the dead band would not be appli- ment is restrained to lessen the amount of dynamic
cable. deflection allowed). After the gap is closed, a force is
(b) Release rate is the velocity at which restraint generated when the contact surfaces engage. When the
motion occurs after activation has taken place. It can be dynamic movement of the pipe is reversed, the pipe
measured during the activation test of the restraint. The moves back through the gap until the gap closes in the
release rate magnitude depends on the loading magni- opposite direction. The opposite contact surfaces then
tude and is an indication of the recovery rate of the engage, and a force is generated.
restraint as it returns to the inactivated condition. The QDR-4310 Functional Parameters. The functional
release rate magnitude needs to be determined for sev- parameters pertinent to gapped restraints are gap size,
eral levels up to the faulted load in both directions, all spring rate, fatigue of springs, friction, and load rating.
at a specific temperature. (a) Gap size is typically dictated by the amount of
(c) Break away can be determined using a load cell thermal movement (in the restraint’s axial direction)
to measure the force required to initiate movement. True experienced at the location where the restraint is to be
break away can only be determined in one direction per used. The intent is to allow free thermal movement (i.e.,
test sequence. impose no normal loading on the piping) while still
NOTE: In laboratory environments, this test can be performed restricting dynamic movement. The amount of gap is
with adequate controls, but this test is not intended to be performed predicated on what the pipe analysis indicates is appro-
as any part of in-service operability testing program.
priate and can be smaller or greater than the predicted
(d) Drag can be determined using a load cell to mea- thermal movement. The gap size is the physical distance
sure the force required to move the restraint at a specific the pipe will travel along the restraint axis before move-
velocity. Testing shall be performed in both directions. ment is restricted. The gap is analogous to the dead
(e) Dead band can be determined by measuring the band of a snubber.
distances traveled by the restraint before it activates in (b) Deflections will be imposed on the device as a
opposite directions. The dead band can have a signifi- result of the transmission of static and/or dynamic
cant effect on performance at all load levels. Dead band loads. Spring rate is typically determined by analysis
should be measured with the associated loading at sev- requirements. Spring rate in a gapped device is defined
eral levels, up to the rated load. by its characteristics after the gap is closed and loading
51
ASME QME-1–2007
begins. Spring rates may differ in tension and compres- The procedure of QDR-6300 is based on the applica-
sion and shall be noted. Through testing, the manufac- tion of a comprehensive analytical modeling procedure
turer shall establish the spring rates. Methods of spring that must be verified by the results of the parent restraint
rate determination shall be identified in resulting report. testing program. The program must show applicability
For gap restraints that have load-limiting capability, the to the selected candidate restraints. This extension of
spring rate may change at a predetermined load. For qualification is based upon the conditions that both the
these restraints, there is no increase in load with addi- parent and candidate restraints use the same design
tional displacement. concept and that the rules of QDR-6300 are fully satis-
(c) An evaluation shall be made to determine fatigue fied. The use of QDR-6300 is not obligatory in the sense
life of springs used in the device. Testing and/or analyti- that all restraints may be qualified by testing as parent
cal evaluations can be used. restraint assemblies; however, if QDR-6300 is used for
(d) Friction could be developed as the device moves the extension of parent restraint qualification to a candi-
through its gap. Friction loads shall be determined date restraint qualification, all provisions of QDR-6300
through testing. must be complied with for the candidate restraint.
(e) Load rating may be determined by test or analysis,
QDR-6200 Parent Restraint Qualification
in accordance with ASME BPVC Section III, Subsec-
tion NF. QDR-6210 Approach to Qualification. The intent of
parent restraint qualification is to provide generic quali-
fication of a given restraint assembly design. An Appli-
QDR-5000 FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION cation Report, as described in QDR-7320, is required
(a) The Owner shall provide a functional specification to provide documentation that each of the production
to define the required performance characteristics. The restraints is qualified for a specific application.
performance characteristics shall include the acceptable In any qualification program there is a concern that the
values and ranges of restraint functional parameters and unit selected for testing is exceptional. Testing multiple
anticipated environments. Typical content of a func- units, randomly selected if possible, may reduce this
tional specification is shown in Nonmandatory Appen- concern. The Owner shall establish the number of units
dix QDR-A. The functional specification shall be required for satisfactory qualification. Testing of multi-
reconciled with the Design Specification in accordance ple units provides increased confidence in repeatability
with ASME BPVC Section III, Subsection NF. of the test results. Additional conservatism may be
added to the anticipated service requirements to add
(b) A restraint design’s suitability to meet the require-
further confidence in the component. If one or more
ments of the functional specification for a specific appli-
units fail to meet the requirements, an analysis to deter-
cation is required to be documented in an Application
mine the reason for failure is required to provide data
Report as described in QDR-7320.
for design changes. Since the test program could result
in considerable usage of the restraints, tested units shall
QDR-6000 QUALIFICATION PROGRAM be inspected and appropriately refurbished prior to
actual service.
QDR-6100 General Requirements Overloading of restraints could take place under some
Section QDR provides two basic methods for qualifi- accident conditions. The restraint should fail in a manner
cation of a restraint assembly. A restraint may be quali- that would not result in undesirable stress or strain on
fied by a program of testing and analysis to become a the piping system. The margin to failure due to overload-
qualified parent restraint assembly, or it may be qualified ing conditions is designated as the ultimate load and
by an extension of a qualification program that has been shall be furnished by the manufacturer. Ultimate load
previously performed on a similar parent restraint capability shall be determined analytically and/or by
assembly. testing as permitted by the governing codes and design
(a) QDR-6200 may be used to provide functional qual- specifications.
ification of a parent restraint assembly through a testing There may be special requirements specified for
program. The testing is intended to demonstrate that restraints subject to unique conditions or applications.
Such requirements shall be defined in the functional
a restraint assembly can perform its required function
specification. Tests or evaluations shall be conducted to
under conditions specified in the functional specifi-
verify the ability of the restraint to endure or satisfy
cation.
these conditions.
(b) QDR-6300 may be used to provide functional qual-
ification of a wide range for candidate restraint sizes by QDR-6220 Testing. The qualification program shall
extension of the parent restraint qualification. This is specify the functional parameters and environmental
accomplished through demonstration of design similar- variables to be measured. The functional parameters
ity and analysis. shall include those specified in Article QDR-4000. The
52
ASME QME-1–2007
environmental variables shall include temperature, QDR-6223(a) through (f) in the described sequential
humidity or steam-water condition, special thermal order. Any deviations shall be justified in the Functional
transients, external pressure, and radiation as applica- Qualification Report. Additional testing may be inserted
ble. The application of a low-amplitude, high-frequency within this sequence as appropriate. The testing
vibration shall be included as an environmental require- sequence, except as noted in the previous sentence,
ment. Testing shall include all loading conditions shall be
defined in the functional specifications. (a) pretest inspection
The spring rate is a function of the load direction, (b) pre-aging functional parameter testing
extension of restraint travel, and amplitude and fre- (c) aging and service condition simulation
quency of the dynamic loading, as well as environmental (d) intermediate inspection without disassembly,
conditions. The spring rate is determined by subjecting maintenance, or modifications
the test unit to dynamic cyclic tests over an appropriate (e) postaging functional parameter testing
frequency range. The temperature extremes anticipated (f) post-test inspection
in service shall be reproduced for testing. Pretest inspection shall include, but is not limited to,
QDR-6221 Installation and Orientation. The parent a thorough dimensional inspection of all components.
test restraint shall be supported by its normal mounting These dimensions shall be recorded for comparison with
points to permit testing in accordance with QDR-6222. the post-test dimensional inspection.
The qualification program shall specify the way the Intermediate inspection shall consist of visual inspec-
restraint is to be mounted for testing. tion for loose, broken, or corroded components, fittings,
If spherical bearings are utilized for connection, the fasteners, etc. Signs of fluid loss should be noted, where
tolerance between the inner bearing hole diameter and applicable. No activities that could repair or mitigate
diameter of the pin shall be specified by the restraint any degradation shall be performed.
manufacturer. The connection of the restraint is not QDR-6223.1 Functional Parameter Testing for
designed to transmit moments and must allow for erec- Hydraulic Snubbers. All parameters described in
tion misalignment, in-service pipe movement, or both. QDR-4100 shall be determined at the recorded room
There shall be no binding or interference between the temperature and a temperature of 200°F (93°C) or the
mating connection parts within the specified angular specified maximum design temperature, whichever is
cone. The design of the connection shall be such that higher. Temperature correction factors for higher or
movement of the pipe attachment in the direction of the lower temperatures shall be documented where appro-
load is minimized in the connection. priate. Temperature shall be recorded at the beginning
The program shall require that the restraint unit be and end of each of the tests. The tests shall be performed
mounted in a manner that simulates its expected service with the restraint at the mid-stroke position unless other-
application. The test restraint assembly may be mounted wise required.
in a conservative worst-case orientation, provided that (a) The activation level (where applicable) shall be
a satisfactory justification for the worst-case orientation tested in each direction. The acceleration or velocity
decision is documented in the Functional Qualification shall be recorded as a function of time. The activation
Report. level shall be determined from these data.
The provisions of QDR-6300 shall be used to extend (b) The release rate shall be tested and recorded in
parent restraint qualification to various candidate each direction at 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%, and 100% of rated
restraint sizes. The parent restraint test program shall load and at the emergency load.
include measurement instrumentation as necessary to (c) The break-away drag shall be determined at the
satisfy all the requirements of that subarticle. initiation of the drag test in each direction or during a
test performed specifically to determine break-away
QDR-6222 Test and Monitoring Equipment. The
drag. The force corresponding with the initiation of
test shall be conducted and monitored using equipment
movement shall be recorded.
adequate for detecting changes in the variables. The
qualification program shall specify the test and monitor- (d) The drag shall be determined in each direction.
ing equipment to be used for the qualification and The values of the drag and the velocity shall be recorded.
Drag shall be performed throughout the entire range of
describe the accuracy within the anticipated range. The
travel to demonstrate drag characteristics.
test and monitoring equipment shall be calibrated and
documented against auditable calibration standards. (e) The dead band shall be recorded during the activa-
The data-recording equipment shall have sufficient tion level testing described in this Section or during a
separate test performed specifically for determination
speed, sensitivity, and capacity to permit measurement
of dead band.
of the time dependence of each variable.
(f) Where it is impracticable to perform multicycle
QDR-6223 Test Sequence. Qualification testing dual-direction, faulted-load dynamic testing, one-cycle
shall be in accordance with QDR-6200 and include tests dynamic loading tests shall be performed subsequent
53
ASME QME-1–2007
to all other tests. The restraint shall be centered about the (e) The dead band shall be recorded during the activa-
1
⁄2 stroke location and at each end of the manufacturer- tion level testing described in this Section, or during a
recommended useable stroke. A loading amplitude separate test performed specifically for determination
equal to the faulted loading shall be performed to dem- of dead band.
onstrate adequacy of the response. The force, displace- (f) Where it is impracticable to perform multicycle
ment, and velocity (or acceleration as appropriate) shall dual-direction, faulted-load dynamic testing, one-cycle
be recorded. Any damage or other anomalies shall be dynamic loading tests shall be performed subsequent
noted and evaluated to determine the effects of faulted to all other tests. The restraint shall be centered about the
loads on the operability of the restraint. 1
⁄2 stroke location and at each end of the manufacturer-
(g) The spring rate shall be tested by a dynamic cyclic recommended useable stroke. A loading amplitude
loading equal to the rated load (or other specified load). equal to the faulted loading shall be performed to dem-
The peak displacement range, including the dead band, onstrate adequacy of the response. The force, displace-
shall be obtained during the dynamic cyclic test through ment, and velocity (or acceleration, as appropriate) shall
the peak force range. The peak force range shall include be recorded. Any damage or other anomalies shall be
load applied in opposite directions. Restraint movement noted and evaluated to determine the effects of faulted
shall be centered about the 1⁄4, 1⁄2, and 3⁄4 stroke locations loads on the operability of the restraint.
according to the requirements of the functional specifica- (g) The spring rate shall be tested by a dynamic cyclic
tion. The testing frequency shall be from 3 Hz to 33 Hz loading equal to the rated load (or other specified load).
at intervals of approximately 3 Hz. Each frequency shall The peak displacement range, including the dead band,
last not less than 10 sec. Response at each frequency shall shall be obtained during the dynamic cyclic test through
be recorded as load-displacement traces. No extreme the peak force range. The peak force range shall include
change in displacement should be observed from one load applied in opposite directions. Restraint movement
frequency to the next, as this could indicate that the shall be centered about the 1⁄4, 1⁄2, and 3⁄4 stroke locations
fundamental frequency (natural frequency) resides in according to the requirements of the functional specifica-
the 3 Hz to 33 Hz range. tion. The testing frequency shall be from 3 Hz to 33 Hz
(h) The stroke is a parameter to be dimensionally veri- at intervals of approximately 3 Hz. Each frequency shall
fied, but no further testing need be performed. last not less than 10 sec. Response at each frequency shall
(i) Hydraulic fluid loss during the testing shall be be recorded as load-displacement traces. No extreme
recorded. change in displacement should be observed from one
QDR-6223.2 Functional Parameter Testing for frequency to the next, as this could indicate that the
Mechanical Snubbers. All parameters described in fundamental frequency (natural frequency) resides in
QDR-4200 shall be determined at the recorded room the 3 Hz to 33 Hz range.
temperature and a temperature of 200°F (93°C) or the (h) The stroke is a parameter to be dimensionally veri-
specified maximum design temperature, whichever is fied, but no further testing need be performed.
higher. Temperature correction factors for higher or (i) Degradation of any lubrication shall be monitored
lower temperatures shall be documented where appro- and documented during testing.
priate. Temperature shall be recorded at the beginning
and end of each of the tests. The tests shall be performed QDR-6223.3 Functional Parameter Testing for GAP
with the restraint at the mid-stroke position, unless Restraints. All parameters described in QDR-4300 shall
otherwise required. be determined at the recorded room temperature. The
(a) The activation level (where applicable) shall be tests shall be performed with the restraint at the mid-
tested in each direction. The acceleration or velocity stroke position, unless otherwise required.
shall be recorded as a function of time. The activation (a) The gap is a parameter to be dimensionally veri-
level shall be determined from these data. fied, but no further testing need be performed.
(b) The release rate shall be tested and recorded in (b) The spring rate shall be verified through testing
each direction at 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%, and 100% of rated by a dynamic cyclic loading equal to the rated load (or
load and at the emergency load. other specified load). No extreme change in displace-
(c) The break-away drag shall be determined at the ment should be observed from one frequency to the next,
initiation of the drag test in each direction or during a as this could indicate that the fundamental frequency
separate test performed specifically for determination (natural frequency) resides in the 3 Hz to 33 Hz range.
of break-away drag. The force corresponding with the (c) If fatigue life of springs is to be verified through
initiation of movement shall be recorded. test, the spring shall be exercised through its entire work-
(d) The drag shall be determined in each direction. ing range for sufficient cycles to simulate the expected
The values of the drag and the velocity shall be recorded. or predicted design life exposure.
Drag shall be performed throughout the entire range of (d) The drag shall be determined in each direction.
travel to demonstrate drag characteristics. The value of the drag shall be recorded. Drag shall be
54
ASME QME-1–2007
performed throughout the entire range of travel (gap) restraint and the materials designated in the manufac-
to demonstrate drag characteristics. turing specification meet the same requirements as the
(e) A loading amplitude equal to the faulted loading material selection justified in QDR-6226(a).
shall be performed to demonstrate adequacy of the
QDR-6227 Limits or Failure Definition. The
response. The force, displacement, and velocity shall be
dynamic restraint shall be considered to have failed the
recorded. Any damage or other anomalies shall be noted
qualification testing requirements if any of the following
and evaluated to determine the effects of faulted loads
occurs:
on the operability of the restraint.
(a) failure to meet any of the functional parameters
QDR-6224 Aging and Service Condition Simulation (e.g., activation, release rate, drag force, dead band,
spring rate) specified for the dynamic restraint in the
QDR-6224.1 Aging. The qualification program
functional specification, while being loaded to its speci-
shall specify the aging simulation based on requirements
fied load ratings for all loading conditions
in the functional specification. Aging simulation equiva-
(b) failure to meet any of the functional parameters
lent to full-service life conditions shall be conducted.
during/after being subjected to the environmental con-
These shall include sand and dust simulation and a salt
ditions specified in the functional specification
spray test if specified as an environmental condition in
the functional specification. (c) failure to meet any of the special testing require-
The manufacturer shall specify the level of low-ampli- ments of the Functional Specification
tude, high-frequency vibration (axial and/or transverse) (d) failure to pass a post-test inspection and analysis
that the restraint design can withstand without after all testing and exposure to the environmental con-
adversely impacting the operating parameters of the ditions specified in the functional specification
restraint. QDR-6228 Ultimate Load Capacity. The ultimate
QDR-6224.2 Service Condition. The qualifica- load capacity of a restraint design shall be determined
tion program shall specify the service condition simula- by test or analysis. The analysis report shall follow the
tion (steam, humidity, temperature, wetted, etc.) to stress report requirements described by the ASME BPVC
which the restraint will be subjected. Vibration aging, Section III, Subsection NF. The mode of failure shall be
testing for operating basis earthquake (OBE) and safe determined by the test or analysis.
shutdown earthquake (SSE), exposure to design basis QDR-6229 Post-Test Inspection and Analysis.
event (DBE) such as loss of coolant accident (LOCA) Upon completion of the qualification tests, the tested
and high energy line break (HELB) environments, as assembly shall be disassembled, inspected, and sub-
applicable, shall be considered. This shall correspond to jected to a post-test analysis. The results of this analysis
the service conditions defined in the functional specifi- shall be documented in the Functional Qualification
cation. Report and contain the following information:
QDR-6225 Special Tests. The qualification plan (a) identification of the restraint tested
shall specify special tests for the restraint design as (b) the last test conducted on the restraint in the
required by the functional specification. These are the test sequence
tests demonstrating the ability of the restraints to meet (c) analysis of the post-test restraint condition
special requirements such as load-sharing arrangements (d) summary, conclusions, and recommendation
or an in situ in-service activation test. Test setup and (e) approval signature and date (certification by a
equipment used shall closely simulate the required con- Registered Professional Engineer competent in the field
dition so that feasibility can be illustrated and correla- of functional and environmental testing)
tion between results can be established. (f) disposition of restraint
QDR-6226 Material Data Requirements. The fol-
QDR-6300 Candidate Qualification
lowing material data shall be included to ensure that the
restraint is manufactured according to the specification: QDR-6310 General Requirements. Candidate
(a) These data from or reference to tests conducted restraint assemblies that are identical in construction
to prove the adequacy of the basic material selection. (same manufacturer, type, size, rating, etc.) to a parent
An example of this would be tests for compatibility restraint assembly may be qualified by preparing an
between the seal material and hydraulic fluid and Application Report in accordance with QDR-7320 and
between the seal material and working environment. referencing the appropriate parent restraint Functional
Special consideration shall be given to the combined Qualification Report.
effects of temperature and radiation on material per- Candidate restraint assemblies that are not identical
formance. in construction to a parent restraint assembly may be
(b) Data on material and process tractability shall be qualified by extension through appropriate analysis
included to demonstrate that the material of the tested and/or testing.
55
ASME QME-1–2007
Paragraph QDR-6310 is not intended to be a stand- revision control and that permits reviewing, checking,
alone, qualification-by-analysis technique. It contains or verifying its applicability by personnel who are expe-
guidelines for the functional qualification of a candidate rienced in this area of activity.
restraint assembly based on the extension of parent
restraint qualification by analysis. The analysis tech-
QDR-6332 Procedure Requirements
niques and procedures shall have been validated (a) A detailed analytical model shall be prepared to
through correlation of analytical predictions with the address each characteristic of the restraint assembly,
parent test results. As such, qualification of a candidate such as those listed in QDR-6332(b). The term shall be
restraint by QDR-6300 cannot be broader in scope than loosely interpreted to mean any analytical form that can
that for the parent restraint, tested in accordance with be used to provide consistent analysis results. The model
the requirements of QDR-6200. can range in complexity from a simple handbook for-
The procedure is based on a high degree of similarity mula to an elaborate finite-element analysis algorithm
between the candidate and parent restraint assemblies. or even a specified analytical procedure composed of
Where sufficient design similarity exists (in accordance various combinations of analytical forms. The same ana-
with QDR-6320), qualification of the candidate restraint lytical models shall be capable of analyzing all similar
can be demonstrated by a test-verified analysis proce- restraints to be qualified without alterations or arbitrary
dure designed to ensure that the mechanical strength, adjustment of constants. The models, once established
rigidity, and critical design tolerances of the candidate and verified, must be consistently applied to all restraint
restraint compare favorably with the qualified parent assemblies to be analyzed. All finite-element analysis
restraint. Where inadequate design similarity occurs, the models shall maintain consistency in the application of
analysis procedure must be supplemented with addi- elements, the element types, and the boundary condi-
tional analytical evaluations or tests. tions at all interfaces for all similar restraint assemblies
In order to provide reasonable validation, the test- that are analyzed.
verified analysis procedure is based on comparison of (b) The analysis procedure models shall be sufficiently
analytical predictions with two or more parent restraints detailed to include, but not be limited to, an analysis of
as established in QDR-6340. the following:
(1) stresses and deflection data for all critical points
QDR-6320 Design Similarity in the restraint assembly based on the maximum speci-
QDR-6321 Allowance for Differences. Any analysis fied dynamic loading
must make allowances for differences in dimensions, (2) stress calculations on all essential-to-function
performance characteristics, working fluid, orientation, parts based on the maximum load capability of the
and other parameters. In order to address these allow- restraint
ances, the test-verified analysis procedure shall be based (3) stresses and deflections for all critical points in
on the similarity between the parent and candidate the restraint based on the maximum specified angular
restraint assemblies. The similarity must be sufficient to misalignment of the specified load
justify the applicability of the analysis procedure to these (4) relative deflections that affect clearances
parameters. The establishment of certain design similar- between all essential-to-function parts that undergo rela-
ity criteria will also provide qualification assurance for tive motion during operation of the restraint
those parameters that are difficult to address in an analy- (5) fatigue usage on the restraint assembly as appli-
sis procedure. cable
QDR-6322 Similarity Requirements. For qualifica- (6) fundamental resonant frequency of the restraint
tion of a candidate restraint assembly by the test-verified assembly
analysis methods, the requirements for design similarity (7) rigidity of the mounting brackets used to attach
and evaluation of differences shall include, where appli- accessories to the restraint assembly
cable, but not be limited to, those parameters addressed (8) other functional parameters as designated in
in Section QR, Nonmandatory Appendix A. QDR-4000
QDR-6330 Analysis Procedure QDR-6340 Analysis Procedure Verification
QDR-6331 Selection and Documentation QDR-6341 Verification Methods

(a) The extension of qualification by test-verified (a) Verification of the analytical procedure shall be
analysis requires selection of an appropriate analysis accomplished through correlation of the analytical
procedure. Analysis procedure, as used herein, is results with data obtained from testing.
defined as any combination of algorithms, finite-element (b) Verification methods may take any combination
analyses, or other appropriate analytical techniques. of the following forms:
(b) The analysis procedure shall be documented in (1) tests conducted on parent restraint assemblies
the Application Report in a form that provides adequate performed in accordance with QDR-6200. The parent
56
ASME QME-1–2007
restraint test program shall include additional measure- (d) Surface Finish. Surface finishes of applicable can-
ments or testing as necessary to satisfy the requirements didate restraint parts shall be considered where appli-
of QDR-6300. cable.
(2) supplemental tests performed outside the scope (e) Fabrication/Assembly Method. Fabrication and
of the parent restraint test program but which address assembly method (e.g., welding, bolting) shall be con-
specific portions of the overall analysis procedure, e.g., sidered.
tests performed by the manufacturer to verify restraint (f) Coatings/Plating. Coatings and plating of applica-
sizing calculations, dead band calculations, restraint ble candidate restraint parts shall be considered where
break-away force calculations, etc. It is incumbent upon applicable.
the restraint supplier to demonstrate applicability of (g) Production Testing. Methods used in production
these tests to the restraints being qualified. testing during manufacturing shall be considered.
(3) reference to standard textbook calculation pro-
cedures that have been extensively verified, are widely
used, and are accepted throughout the industry without
QDR-7000 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
recourse to further verification tests. QDR-7100 Scope
QDR-6400 Extension of Qualification (a) Qualification documentation is intended to verify
that each restraint assembly is qualified to perform its
QDR-6410 Applicability of Qualification Extension. designated function when used for its intended service.
Provided that the allowable stresses predicted by the Qualification is substantiated by demonstrating the rela-
test-verified analysis are within the elastic range, the tionship between the service requirements and testing
analysis procedure is applicable in its entirety, without and/or analysis, which is done in the qualification
further verification, to candidate restraint sizes and rat- program.
ings that (b) A qualification plan, as described in QDR-7200, is
(a) fall within the range of restraint sizes established required to translate the functional specification into a
in QDR-6300 step-by-step qualification program.
(b) satisfy the design similarity requirements of (c) A Functional Qualification Report, as described
QDR-6320 in QDR-7310, is required to document parent restraint
QDR-6420 Qualification Extension Requirements. compliance with Section QDR.
The qualification analysis procedure may be applied (d) An Application Report, as described in
without further verification by testing to candidate QDR-7320, is required to document qualification of a
restraint sizes and ratings that meet the design similarity particular candidate restraint assembly for a specific
requirements listed below (see also Nonmandatory application.
Appendix QDR-B, Restraint Similarity). Design similar-
ity must be established based on the lack of potential
QDR-7200 Qualification Plan
effect on performance with regard to all functional A qualification plan (which may be part of the Func-
parameters (e.g., activation, release rate, drag force, dead tional Qualification Report) shall be prepared with
band, and spring rate). Environmental conditions identi- appropriate inspection and test record forms. These shall
fied in the functional specification must be considered. define test objectives, test instrumentation, conditions
The following specific parameters shall be considered of the test, orientation, permissible maintenance or
in establishing similarity of design: adjustments, and acceptance criteria. In addition, the
(a) Design/Configuration. Applicable candidate plan shall define specific analytical techniques and
restraint parts shall be similar in design and configura- acceptance criteria to be used for the extension of parent
tion, the principal difference being overall size and/or restraint qualification to candidate restraints using
weight. QDR-7300.
(b) Materials. Differences in materials of restraint
assembly components need to be accounted for. Material
QDR-7300 Reports
differences are acceptable provided that QDR-7310 Functional Qualification Report
(1) appropriate adjustments in qualification rating (a) A Functional Qualification Report shall be pre-
parameters are made based on the relative yield pared for each parent restraint assembly qualified in
strengths of the materials accordance with this Standard. This Functional Qualifi-
(2) due consideration is given to functional per- cation Report shall provide complete identification of
formance capabilities of materials and combinations of the restraint by type, size, rating, and other data as
materials appropriate, including the qualification plan, test
(c) Dimensions/Tolerances. Physical dimensions and results, and inspection data. The Functional Qualifica-
tolerances of applicable candidate restraint parts shall tion Report shall also contain a summary of the method-
be considered. ologies used and the parameters established by the
57
ASME QME-1–2007
functional qualification testing and analysis. Any spe- it qualifies for the operating conditions shown in the
cific limitations that restrict qualification shall be stated. Functional Qualification Report. This may be accom-
(b) Where prequalified components of the restraint plished by direct comparison with an identical parent
assembly (e.g., brackets, solenoid restraints) are used as restraint assembly or by supplementary analysis and/or
part of the restraint assembly qualification, the Func- testing. Any supplementary analysis and/or testing
tional Qualification Report shall reference the report(s) shall conform to the requirements of QDR-6300 and
upon which such prequalification is based. In addition, show that the qualification of a given parent restraint
it must be shown that the mounting and integration of assembly constitutes a valid basis for conclusion that
this prequalified component on the restraint assembly the design of the candidate restraint assembly is of at
does not degrade or otherwise interfere with the pre- least an equivalent adequacy for its intended function.
qualification of the component. (d) Where prequalified parts of the restraint assembly
(c) Each Functional Qualification Report shall be cer- (e.g., brackets, solenoids) are used as part of the restraint
tified to be correct, complete, and in compliance with assembly qualification, the Application Report shall ref-
this Standard by one or more Registered Professional erence the report(s) upon which such prequalification
Engineers representing the organization responsible for is based. In addition, it shall be shown that the mounting
the functional qualification. and integration of this prequalified part on the restraint
assembly does not degrade or otherwise interfere with
QDR-7320 Application Report
the prequalification of the part.
(a) An Application Report is required to demonstrate
(e) The Application Report for a qualified candidate
the suitability of any candidate restraint assembly to
restraint assembly shall contain the following, as appli-
meet the requirements of a specific application. An
cable:
Application Report is required for each serial-numbered
restraint assembly; however, restraint assemblies that (1) serial number, tag number, or other unique
have identical construction and service conditions, dif- identification of the candidate restraint assembly.
fering only in serial and tag numbers, may be combined (2) complete description of the candidate restraint
into one Application Report. assembly construction configuration, including an
(b) Candidate restraint assemblies that are identical assembly drawing. This description shall include a com-
in construction to a parent restraint assembly may be plete identification of the restraint by type, size, and
qualified simply by preparing an Application Report rating.
and referencing the appropriate parent restraint Func- (3) a summary of the functional parameters and
tional Qualification Report. Candidate restraint assem- how they are met by the candidate restraint assembly.
blies, which are not identical in construction to a parent (4) reference to the parent restraint Functional
restraint assembly, may have qualification extended to Qualification Report(s) upon which the candidate
them through appropriate analysis and/or testing as restraint qualification is based.
outlined in QDR-6000. In addition, the Application (5) inspection reports, as applicable, for both the
Report shall reference the appropriate parent restraint parent and candidate restraint assemblies.
Functional Qualification Report and further show how (6) all test results and analyses used to show that
each of the specific application requirements of the func- the candidate restraint assembly satisfies the require-
tional specification are appropriately addressed by the ments of QDR-6300.
parent restraint report or other tests and analysis. (7) reference to the Qualification Reports for all pre-
(c) Qualification of a candidate restraint is based on qualified components used per (d) above.
the individual test conditions for a parent restraint and (8) any specific limitations that restrict qualifi-
the guidance for extension of qualification to candidate cation.
restraint assemblies given in QDR-6300. It is the objective (f) Each Application Report shall be certified by one
of the Application Report to verify that the candidate or more Registered Professional Engineers to be correct,
restraint will perform its intended function and that complete, and in compliance with this Standard.
58
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QDR-A

Functional Specification for Dynamic Restraints
QDR-A1000 SCOPE (f) installation requirements (see QDR-A5600)

(g) maintenance and inspection requirements
This Appendix provides guidance for a functional
(see QDR-A5700)
specification for dynamic restraints for applications in
systems important to the safety of nuclear facilities. (h) other requirements (see QDR-A5800)
QDR-A5100 Application Characteristics

QDR-A2000 PURPOSE The application characteristics of each restraint should
The functional specification provides detailed defini- be identified by listing which of the following descrip-
tion of functional requirements applicable to restraints tive terms are appropriate:
for components and piping systems important to safety. (a) seismic restraint
The requirements of the functional specification may be (b) dynamic force restraint
provided as part of the restraint design specification or (c) vibration restraint
as part of an equipment or purchase specification that (d) pipe whip restraint
also includes the design specification. If this functional (e) relief valve restraint
specification is prepared by the restraint manufacturer, (f) others, including combinations of the above
an application report prepared for the Owner shall be
made part of the design specification. The Application QDR-A5200 Design Requirements
Report shall be reviewed and certified by one or more
The following information should be specified:
registered professional engineers to be correct and com-
(a) design operating temperature
plete and in accordance with the functional specification
prepared by the manufacturer. Compliance with these (b) time-temperature data for design thermal tran-
requirements for this functional specification is intended sients with the number of cycles indicated
to ensure that the operating conditions and functions (c) seismic acceleration and dynamic loading that the
of the restraint have been adequately defined. This will restraints must be capable of withstanding transverse
permit the restraint manufacturer to demonstrate the to the line of action without loss of functional capability
adequacy of both the design of the restraint and the (d) seismic acceleration and dynamic loading that the
materials used in its construction for the intended restraints must be capable of withstanding along the
service. line of action without loss of functional capability
(e) limits on the acceptable range of the fundamental
frequency of the restraint assembly
QDR-A3000 REFERENCES (f) limits on acceptable angular offset from the line
To be identified by the Owner. of load action.
QDR-A5300 Operational Requirements

QDR-A4000 DEFINITIONS
Anticipated modes of restraint operation, including
See QDR-3000. those related to seismic events and water hammer,
should be specified. The operating conditions and envi-
QDR-A5000 FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION ronmental conditions should be identified.
CONTENTS QDR-A5310 Operating Conditions. The number of
It is the responsibility of the Owner or the Owner’s operational cycles, the imposed loading or movement
agent to identify the functional requirements of the (number, amplitude, and direction), and environment
restraint and provide for the delineation of the following: (including temperature) for each of the following opera-
(a) application characteristics (see QDR-A5100) tional categories, as a minimum, should include:
(b) design requirements (see QDR-A5200) (a) installation testing
(c) operational requirements (see QDR-A5300) (b) system hydrostatic testing
(d) functional parameters (see QDR-A5400) (c) pre-operational testing
(e) specific material requirements (see QDR-A5500) (d) start-up testing
59
ASME QME-1–2007
(e) normal and abnormal plant operations (including (b) Mechanical Snubbers
postulated accident conditions, shock, or pulsating (1) activation level (when applicable) and tolerance
loads) at rated load at the maximum and minimum working
(f) in-service testing temperatures
(g) vibration (2) release rate and tolerance at 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%,
and 100% of rated load at emergency load for the maxi-
QDR-A5320 Environmental Conditions. A histogram mum and minimum working temperatures
of the environmental conditions that are postulated to
(3) acceptable limits for the break-away force at the
exist should be provided.
maximum and minimum working temperatures
The need of restraints to survive normal and abnormal
(4) acceptable limits for drag force associated with
environmental conditions with or without maintenance
moving under a specified velocity at the maximum and
should be stated. Since the attaching hardware can influ-
minimum working temperatures
ence the survival of the restraint, it should also be consid-
(5) acceptable limits for the dead band at the maxi-
ered. The following factors are considered relevant:
mum and minimum working temperatures for the range
(a) atmosphere, including chemistry, temperature,
of working loads and restraint locations
humidity, and radioactivity, in which the restraints will
(6) load ratings for all service levels
be installed and must operate under normal plant condi-
(7) acceptable range of spring rates at the maxi-
tions.
mum and minimum working temperature at the fre-
(b) atmosphere, including chemistry, temperature,
quency, load range, and classification of the load (i.e.,
humidity, and radioactivity, in which the restraints must
normal or emergency) at which the spring rate is to be
operate under upset, emergency, and faulted plant con-
determined with restraint locations at 1⁄4 , 1⁄2 , and
ditions. The duration of these conditions should be spec- 3
⁄4 stroke locations
ified.
(8) verify availability of full design stroke
(c) vibration environment under normal, upset, emer-
(9) any lubrication degradation may affect other
gency, and faulted conditions.
parameters such as drag
QDR-A5400 Functional Parameters (c) Gap Devices
(1) acceptable limits for the drag force
The functional parameters defined in QDR-5000 (2) inclusion of the range of available gap
should be specified and include QDR-A5400(a) through adjustment
QDR-A5400(c). (3) acceptable range of spring rates, the load range,
(a) Hydraulic Snubbers and the classification of the load (i.e., normal or emer-
(1) activation level (when applicable) and tolerance gency) at which the spring rate is to be determined
at rated load at the maximum and minimum working (4) acceptable number of cycles for spring fatigue
temperatures testing
(2) release rate and tolerance at 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%,
and 100% of rated load at emergency load for the maxi- QDR-A5500 Special Material Requirements
mum and minimum working temperatures Special material requirements of the restraint should
(3) acceptable limits for the break-away force at the be specified. Items to be considered should include, but
maximum and minimum working temperatures not be limited to, the following:
(4) acceptable limits for drag force associated with (a) hydraulic fluid (including its potential for electro-
moving under a specified velocity at the maximum and lytic corrosion)
minimum working temperatures (b) seals
(5) acceptable limits for the dead band at the maxi- (c) springs
mum and minimum working temperatures for the range (d) special surface preparations or coatings
of working loads and restraint locations (e) lubricants
(6) load ratings for all service levels
(7) acceptable range of spring rates at the maxi- QDR-A5600 Installation Requirements
mum and minimum working temperature at the fre- The following requirements for the installation of the
quency, load range, and classification of the load (i.e., restraint should be specified:
normal or emergency) at which the spring rate is to be (a) orientation of the hydraulic restraint and relative
determined with restraint locations at 1⁄4, 1⁄2, and 3⁄4 stroke position of the hydraulic reservoir to the restraint if any
locations limitations exist
(8) verification of availability of full design stroke (b) orientation of the mechanical restraints installa-
(9) fluid loss rate not exceeding that which would tion if any limitations exist
empty the reservoir during the expected service life of (c) the available space for installation and removal if
the component any limitations exist
60
ASME QME-1–2007
(d) travel location in the restraint as installed tests (i.e., drag, activation level, and release rate tests)
(e) the range of transverse movement provided with specific testing equipment.
(f) any special mounting provided or required
QDR-A5800 Special Performance Requirements
QDR-A5700 Maintenance and Inspection Other requirements for special performance or load-
Requirements ing conditions, as applicable, should be specified.
An acceptable hydraulic fluid leakage rate should be

specified for hydraulic restraints. Special provisions for QDR-A6000 FILING REQUIREMENTS
restraint maintenance should be specified, if required. A copy of the functional specification should be filed
Where requirements are established for in situ in-service at the location of the installation and shall be available
testing, requirements should be included for demonstra- to the enforcement authorities having jurisdiction over
ting the feasibility of performing the required inservice the plant installation.
61
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QDR-B

Restraint Similarity
QDR-B1000 SCOPE have the same cross-section thickness. Tolerances for

mating parts should be the same, or the differences
This Appendix provides guidance in determining
should be justified.
whether design similarity exists such that the qualifica-
tion analysis procedure may be applied to candidate QDR-B2400 Similarity of Surface Finish
restraint sizes and ratings without further verification
by testing. Examples are included that illustrate how Wear or aging data obtained by testing restraints of a
design similarity may be established, in terms of specific given model should be applied to other models provided
similarity parameters defined in QDR-7420. that surface finishes between mating parts for which
relative motion exists are representative of the restraints
to which the data are to be applied.
QDR-B2000 EXAMPLES OF DESIGN SIMILARITY
QDR-B2500 Similarity of Fabrication/Assembly
Examples of design similarity in terms of specific
Method
parameters are listed below. These are limited, selected
examples and not intended to be all inclusive. It should Life cycle test data (e.g., data obtained from cyclic
be noted, however, that all similarity parameters defined loading or vibration tests) obtained by testing a specific
in QDR-6420 must be considered when determining the restraint model should be applied to other models, pro-
acceptability of applying a qualification analysis proce- vided that both models were fabricated and assembled
dure without further verification by testing. in the same or a similar manner. Application of data
obtained using a model that is assembled by welding
QDR-B2100 Similarity of Design Configuration to a model that is assembled by bolting would normally
With hydraulic snubbers, activation level and release not be acceptable.
rate may be defined in terms of flow rate and pressure.
For hydraulic snubbers that use the same control valve QDR-B2600 Similarity of Coatings/Plating
or a similar configuration, the effect of temperature on Corrosion resistance data obtained by testing a
these parameters should be determined by extrapolation selected restraint model should be applied to other mod-
or interpolation of data obtained by testing one snub- els or sizes provided that the same or similar plating or
ber size. coatings are used.
QDR-B2200 Similarity of Materials QDR-B2700 Similarity of Production Testing

Wear or aging data obtained by testing a selected Production tests for some snubber models may
restraint model or size should be applied to other models involve quasi-static testing in which activation parame-
or sizes provided that the same or similar materials, (i.e., ters such as activation level, release rate, or acceleration
mechanical, physical, and chemical properties) are used. threshold are measured. For other restraint models,
Justification of differences should be provided. dynamic testing methods may be used for production
tests. Qualification testing, on the other hand, generally
QDR-B2300 Similarity of Dimensions/Tolerances involves dynamic testing. Similarity of production test
Seal-aging data obtained by testing O-rings of a spe- methods should be considered when applying qualifica-
cific size should be applied to other O-ring sizes that tion test data from one restraint model to another.
62
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QDR-C

Typical Values of Restraint Functional Parameters
QDR-C1000 SCOPE (c) Break-away/drag is the force required to initiate

and maintain axial movement of mechanical snubbers
This Appendix is provided to aid both the restraint
and typically restricted to less than 2% or 3% of the
designer and specification writer. It identifies the qualifi-
rated load.
cation functional parameter values that may be consid-
(d) Drag for less than 1 kip rated load, 5% maximum;
ered when establishing a qualification program. The
for 1 kip and above, 3% maximum.
selection of applicable items, either the ones identified
herein or others specified as required, is the option of (e) Dead band (lost motion) generally should not
the Owner. exceed 0.04 in. when measured across the snubber,
excluding end fittings.
(f) For load rating, see QDR-4210(f).
QDR-C2000 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS (g) Spring rate is the peak-to-peak displacement
QDR-C2100 Hydraulic Snubbers under load, excluding end attachments, and should not
exceed 0.12 in. when the input frequency is in the 3 Hz
Typical values for hydraulic snubber functional
to 33 Hz range.
parameters are as follows:
(h) The stroke should be able to accommodate the
(a) activation level 4 in. per minute (IPM) to 20 IPM
thermal and dynamic movements plus an additional
(b) release rate 0 IPM to 6 IPM
1 in. of travel on each end (inclusive of installation toler-
(c) break-away for less than 1 kip rated load, 5% maxi-
ances).
mum; for 1 kip and above, 3% maximum
(i) Any lubrication degradation should not affect
(d) drag for less than 1 kip rated load, 5% maximum;
other parameters such as drag.
for 1 kip and above, 3% maximum
(e) dead band (lost motion) generally should not QDR-C2300 Gap Restraints
exceed 0.04 in. when measured across the snubber,
excluding end fittings (a) Gap (see QDR-6223).
(f) load rating, see QDR-4110(f) (b) Spring rate tolerances should be kept to a plus or
(g) spring rate is the peak-to-peak displacement minus of 20% if no specific value is given from the
under load, excluding end attachments, and should not analysis of the piping system.
exceed 0.12 in. when the input frequency is in the 3 Hz (c) Fatigue life of springs should be greater than the
to 33 Hz range service life of the component.
(h) the stroke should be able to accommodate the (d) Friction developed should be kept to 2% of rated
thermal and dynamic movements plus one additional load of the device.
inch of travel on each end (inclusive of installation toler- (e) Load ratings are the minimum load that the device
ances) will restrain under the given loading condition. How-
(i) fluid loss rate should not exceed that which would ever, for a load-limiting device, the load rating is a maxi-
empty the reservoir during the expected service life of mum load, and the device should be within 10% of the
the component rated load.
QDR-C2200 Mechanical Snubbers

QDR-C3000 AGING AND SERVICE CONDITION
Typical values for mechanical snubber functional
SIMULATION QUALIFICATION
parameters are as follows:
PROGRAM
(a) Activation level — acceleration-limiting snubbers
are generally designed to a maximum value of 0.02 g. The qualification program should specify a steam
(b) Release rate for a snubber that does not have an humidity simulation of 350°F (177°C) saturated steam
active/passive mode should be within 25% of the theo- for 72 hr if the restraint service area is inside the contain-
retical performance curves (unless specifically designed, ment. It should specify submergence in 200°F (93°C)
neither acceleration or velocity-limiting snubbers water for 72 hr if the restraint service is in a water
should have a release rate of zero). environment.
63
ASME QME-1–2007
Section QP
Qualification of Active Pump Assemblies
INTRODUCTION Code (BPVC). Specifically, pumps that operate on veloc-

ity or displacement principles, regardless of the arrange-
Qualification of pumps that must perform a specified ment, are included. Additionally, shaft-sealing systems,
function is an integration of numerous steps that involve drivers, power transmission devices, and auxiliary
many disciplines and authorities. Section QP is to be equipment are also included. Section QP does not apply
used to develop a qualification program designed specif- to electrical equipment such as motors, valve actuators,
ically for the intended application of equipment and instruments, and control devices that are qualified by
the operational requirements of the system in which it conformance with appropriate IEEE standards. How-
resides. The objective is to provide confidence in the ever, qualification of the motor driver mechanical effects
design, engineering, testing, installation, operation, and on the pump assembly is included in Section QP.
maintenance of pumps in nuclear systems, including Detailed design considerations for shaft-seal systems
performance of function for a design basis event. are provided in Nonmandatory Appendix QP-E. These
Section QP supplements General Requirements Sec- guidelines are provided as an aid to the qualification
tion QR, which provides general qualification guidance. specification writer and are not part of this Standard.
Specific requirements applicable to pumps that are not
addressed in QR are identified in this Section in a format
that is cross referenced to QR. Consequently, articles on QP-2000 PURPOSE
definitions, qualification principles, qualification speci-
fication criteria, and program and documentation The purpose of Section QP is to provide qualification
requirements are covered similarly by QR, QP, and QV. requirements and guidelines specific to pump assem-
Mandatory requirements as well as nonmandatory blies to ensure the adequacy of the pump assembly to
guidance are included in this Section to provide a guide perform its specified function.
and framework for pump qualification. Qualification
requirements are provided for the following:
(a) pump assembly/pump QP-3000 REFERENCES
(b) shaft-seal system This Article documents reference documents of signif-
(c) turbine driver icance from which guidance, concepts, principles, prac-
(d) power transmission device tices, criteria, and parameters have been carried forward
(e) auxiliary equipment into Section QP. These references include
API Standard 610, Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum,

QP-1000 SCOPE Heavy Duty Chemicals, and Gas Industry Services,
Feb. 1995, 8th Edition
Section QP contains the qualification requirements API Standard 611, Steam Turbines for General Refinery
and guidelines for active pump assemblies used in Service, Aug. 1988, Reaffirmed May 1991, 3rd Edition
nuclear power plants and that must function for design API Standard 682, Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal
basis events. Pump assembly items may be qualified as and Rotary Pumps, Oct. 1994
part of a single pump assembly or may be qualified Publisher: American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220
separately. It is the responsibility of the Owner or the L Street, NW, Washington, DC 20005-4070
Owner’s designee to specify those pump assemblies to
which this Section will be applied. ASME B73.1M, Specification for Horizontal End Suction
Pump assemblies and pump assembly items qualified Centrifugal Pumps for Chemical Process, 1991
in accordance with this Section shall meet the require- ASME B73.2M, Specification for Vertical In-Line
ments of Section QR. Wherever the requirements of Sec- Centrifugal Pumps for Chemical Process, 1991
tion QP conflict with the requirements of Section QR, ASME OM Code-1995, Subsection ISTB, Inservice
the requirements of Section QP take precedence. Testing of Pumps in Light-Water Reactor Power Plants
Section QP is applicable to all pump types, as defined ASME PTC 8.2-1990, Performance Test Codes—
in Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Centrifugal Pumps
64
ASME QME-1–2007
Publisher: The American Society of Mechanical pump assembly: the pump and grouping of items needed
Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New York, to ensure the operation of the pump.
NY 10016-5990; Order Department: 22 Law Drive, P.O.
shaft seal: a device designed to prevent or limit the leak-
Box 2900, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900
age of fluid between two surfaces of relative motion.
Hydraulic Institute Pump Standards, 1994 This includes mechanical end face seals and packing.
Publisher: Hydraulic Institute (HI), 9 Sylvan Way, Par- shaft-seal system: a system of shaft seals and directly
sippany, NJ 07054 associated appurtenances as required that limits the pro-
SM 23-1979, Steam Turbines for Mechanical Drive cess fluid leakage to the atmosphere or low-pressure
Service systems and collects and directs the leakage.
Publisher: National Electrical Manufacturers turbine driver: a class of machines that converts energy
Association (NEMA), 1300 North 17th Street, Rosslyn, in a fluid stream to rotary motion.
VA 22209
SP-1, Glossary of Seal Terms, March 1995
SP-30, Guidelines for Meeting Emission Regulations for QP-5000 QUALIFICATION PRINCIPLES AND
Rotating Machinery with Mechanical Seals, April 1994 PHILOSOPHY
Publisher: Society of Tribologists and Lubrication The fundamental principles and philosophy per-
Engineers (STLE), 840 Busse Highway Park, IL taining to equipment qualification are provided in Arti-
60068-2376 cle QR-5000 and apply to mechanical equipment in
general. Qualification requirements specific to the pump
QP-4000 DEFINITIONS assembly or pump assembly items are contained in Arti-
cles QP-6000 through QP-8000.
The following definitions establish the meanings of QR-7000 describes qualification by similarity analysis.
words in the context of their use in this Section and Nonmandatory Appendix QP-D contains typical param-
supplement those definitions listed in Section QR: eters to be considered when qualification is to be estab-
auxiliary equipment: items necessary to support the oper- lished by similarity.
ation of the pump, shaft-seal system, driver, or power
transmission device, including any appurtenances as
defined in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, QP-6000 QUALIFICATION SPECIFICATION
Section III, NCA-1260.
The qualification specification for pump assemblies
best efficiency point: the hydraulic flow at which the pump and pump assembly items shall be provided in accor-
assembly achieves its highest efficiency, i.e., the reference dance with QR-6000 and the additional requirements of
point for which the specific speed is calculated for simili- this article. Nonmandatory Appendices QP-A through
tude comparisons. QP-C provide checklists of items for guidance in the
component coolant: a fluid used as a heat removal medium preparation of the qualification specification.
and separated from the process fluid by a barrier. It is the responsibility of the Owner or the Owner’s
injection fluid: a fluid injected into the seal area at a designee to provide the qualification specification and
pressure higher than the process fluid to lubricate and approve the qualification program used to demonstrate
cool the seal and in some instances to prevent leakage that the acceptance criteria established in the qualifica-
of process fluid along the shaft. tion specification have been met.
For a pump assembly qualified to a generic environ-
motor driver: a class of machines that converts electrical
ment, the manufacturer is responsible for the develop-
energy into rotary motion.
ment of both the specification and qualification program.
operating point(s): any hydraulic point at which the pump
is expected to operate, under the various operating con- QP-6100 Equipment-Specified Function
ditions of the plant. Multiple operating points may be
specified for a pump within the flow range from mini- Pump assembly-specified function shall be in accor-
mum flow to the maximum runout condition. dance with QR-6000(a).
Items may be excluded from the qualification process
power transmission device: an item that transmits the
if it can be shown that their malfunctions have no effect
rotary motion from the turbine or motor driver to the
on the pump assembly’s specified function. For example,
pump.
when the pumping function is not a requirement but
process fluid: the fluid pumped. the pressure retention function is, motive power to the
pump: the basic component of the pump assembly that pump need not be qualified, but the shaft-sealing system
transfers the process fluid. shall be qualified.
65
ASME QME-1–2007
QP-6200 Equipment Description and Boundary Nonmandatory Appendix QR-A provides supple-
mentary details associated with dynamic qualification
The qualification specification shall identify those
of mechanical equipment.
items that are part of the pump assembly. The qualifica-
tion specification shall also define the interfaces between
QP-6500 Margins
the pump assembly and external attachments and sup-
ports. When pump assembly items are qualified sepa- Required margin for QP-6700 acceptance criteria shall
rately, the qualification specification shall also define be specified.
interfaces between the pump and driver, shaft-seal sys-
tem, power transmission device, and auxiliary QP-6600 Aging
equipment. The qualification specification shall require that sig-
nificant aging mechanisms along with components
QP-6210 Pump Assembly/Pump. The pump assem-
and/or materials subject to aging be identified. The
bly includes the pump and its shaft-seal system, driver,
effects of the identified aging mechanisms shall be
transmission device, and auxiliary equipment.
assessed and shown to be acceptable during the qualifi-
The pump pressure boundary is defined in ASME
cation process. Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B pro-
BPVC Section III. The pump includes items that
vides supplementary details associated with the
(a) contain the process fluid, such as the casing or
qualification of nonmetallic parts.
barrel, including nozzles, thermal barrier, and closure
members QP-6700 Acceptance Criteria
(b) propel the process fluid, such as the impeller
The required acceptance criteria shall be specified in
(c) are an integral part of the pump, such as the dif-
accordance with the requirements of QR-6000(i) and
fuser or bowl, including the pump shaft, pump bearings,
QP-6710 through QP-6750. The types of performance
and bearing supports
items listed in QP-6710 through QP-6750 shall be
(d) are auxiliary equipment
included in, but may not be limited to, the types of
QP-6220 Shaft-Seal System. The shaft-seal system required acceptance criteria listed.
includes the seal assembly, seal system piping, seal water
QP-6710 Pump Assembly/Pump. The qualification
cooling, filtering devices, and auxiliary equipment.
specification shall specify the performance required
QP-6230 Turbine Driver. The turbine driver includes from the pump assembly/pump during specified ser-
the casing, shaft, blades, wheel, jets, governor, stop vice conditions. Acceptance criteria shall be specified for
valves, shaft seals, bearings, and auxiliary equipment. (a) capacity (flow)
(b) total developed head (or pressure)
QP-6240 Power Transmission Device. Power trans- (c) required net positive suction head (NPSHR)
mission devices include shaft couplings, belt drives,
(d) start-up and operating time based upon plant con-
fluid drives, gear drives, and auxiliary equipment.
ditions
QP-6250 Auxiliary Equipment. Examples of auxil- (e) transients such as thermal or pressure
iary equipment are cooling water systems, lubricating (f) priming time
systems, control valves, instrumentation, and external (g) process fluid conditions
supports, which are supplied as part of the pump (h) environmental parameters
assembly. (i) minimum flow rates and associated time limita-
tions
QP-6300 Description of Interface Attachments and (j) vibration limits
Loads Instrument accuracy for pressure, flow rate, speed,
Location, nature, and magnitude of externally applied vibration, differential pressure, and vibration acceptance
loads and structural characteristics for interface attach- criteria shall not be less than that prescribed in
ments shall be specified. ASME OM, Subsection ISTB.
QP-6720 Shaft-Seal System. The qualification spec-
QP-6400 Service Conditions ification shall specify the performance required from the
Service conditions defining the application of the shaft-seal system during specified service conditions.
pump assembly shall be specified. Service conditions Acceptance criteria shall be specified for
are of two types (a) flow rate of coolant through cooling jacket or seal
(a) operating conditions that tend to stress the pump cavity
assembly (b) start-up and running torque requirements
(b) environmental conditions that define the sur- (c) seal leakage rates under static and dynamic
roundings operating conditions
66
ASME QME-1–2007
QP-6730 Turbine Driver. The qualification specifica- The qualification method shall identify the service
tion shall specify the performance required from the conditions for which the pump is being qualified as
turbine driver during specified service conditions. described in QP-7310(b).
Acceptance criteria shall be specified for The pump qualification program shall include the fol-
(a) speed/output torque at operating steam condi- lowing:
tions (pressure, temperature, flow, and quality) (1) testing over the full range of normal and DBE
(b) required start-up and operating time based upon operating points for hydraulic performance, leak tight-
plant conditions ness, and structural integrity. Testing in the vendor shop
(c) capability of the governor system to regulate or a suitable test facility is preferred in order to reduce
steam flow within specified limits test variables and provide controlled results. If such test-
(d) vibration limits ing is not physically practicable due to size or configura-
tion, in situ testing as part of ASME OM, Subsection
QP-6740 Power Transmission Device. The qualifica-
ISTB preservice test provided with suitably accurate
tion specification shall specify the performance required
instrumentation is acceptable.
from the power transmission device during specified
(2) The test assembly shall include the pump, its
service conditions. Acceptance criteria shall be speci-
auxiliary equipment, and the baseplate if one is pro-
fied for
vided.
(a) torque and horsepower capacities
(3) visual and dimensional inspections at appro-
(b) input/output speeds
priate intervals to identify excessive wear or degradation
(c) vibration limits of pump parts.
(d) total indicated runout (b) Service aspects that shall be considered in formu-
(e) cooling requirements lating a qualification program are
QP-6750 Auxiliary Equipment. The qualification (1) pump functional conditions (flow capacities,
specification shall specify the performance required developed head requirements, suction head provided,
from any uniquely identified auxiliary equipment dur- system fluid conditions including transients, operating
ing specified service conditions. time, and operating frequency anticipated over the life
of the plant, etc.). Functional conditions are to include
periodic in-service testing and anticipated inoperative
QP-7000 QUALIFICATION PROGRAM
periods.
QP-7100 General Requirements (2) environmental conditions.
The qualification program shall be established in (3) starting requirements.
accordance with the requirements of QR-7000 and as (4) normal operating loads.
modified below. (5) externally applied loads (seismic, nozzle, etc.).
(6) aging of nonmetallic materials (Nonmandatory
QP-7200 Review for Potential Malfunctions Appendix QR-B provides supplementary details associ-
Potential malfunctions shall be identified in accor- ated with the qualification of nonmetallic parts and may
dance with the requirements of QR-7200. Examples of or may not be part of the in situ testing above).
potential malfunctions in pump assemblies that shall (7) maintaining design life (maintenance, overhaul,
be reviewed include loss of rated flow/head, rotating replacement, etc.).
element seizure, or rotating element clearance/drag/
QP-7320 Shaft-Seal System. A shaft-seal system
leakage. The effects of wear of critical components shall
normally should not be functionally qualified by analy-
be part of this review.
sis alone. However, analysis may be used to extend pre-
QP-7300 Selection of Qualification Methods vious testing or experience to the specified design
service conditions, provided the analytical techniques
Methods for qualification of pump assemblies and
have been validated through comparison with measured
pump assembly items shall be in accordance with the
performance of comparable shaft-seal system. Types of
requirements of QR-7300.
permitted analysis include heat generation and removal,
QP-7310 Pump mechanical stress, thermal stress, wear rate, interface
(a) Pump qualification shall consider significant velocity, axial movement, radial movement, angular
hydraulic and mechanical design factors that can movement, torsional deflection, and natural frequency.
degrade and impact the ability of the pump to perform In qualification by test, a plan shall be prepared with
its specified function. appropriate inspection and test record forms to define
In addition to aging effects, qualification techniques test objectives, test fluids, conditions of the test, permis-
shall address and incorporate, as necessary, the impact sible maintenance or adjustments, and acceptance crite-
of periodic testing, maintenance, overhaul, and replace- ria. A shaft-seal system test facility shall be used that
ment of essential parts of the pump assembly. provides rotation, appropriate means for pressurization,
67
ASME QME-1–2007
fluid thermal control, and seal leakage measurement. The turbine driver qualification program shall include
Prior to start of a test sequence, all system conditions the following:
shall be recorded as applicable to the test shaft-seal (1) testing over the full range of normal and DBE
assembly and test installation according to the plan. Test operating conditions for steam performance, leak tight-
data shall include face surface finish and flatness, face ness, and structural integrity
loads at installation length, shaft-seal system leakage, (2) the test assembly shall include the turbine and
temperature, pressure, and seal face power require- its auxiliary equipment
ments. Testing sequences shall include all service
(3) visual and dimensional inspections at appro-
conditions.
priate intervals to identify excessive wear or degradation
Qualification on the basis of experience or analysis
of turbine parts
requires that documentation be provided that demon-
strates the performance of a similar shaft-seal system (b) Service aspects considered in formulating a test
equals or exceeds the specified design service condi- qualification program shall include
tions, both normal and DBE, of the proposed application. (1) turbine functional conditions (turbine horse-
Areas that shall be evaluated when determining applica- power/speed including transients, operating time, and
bility of experience are similarity of application, environ- operating frequency anticipated over the life of the plant,
ment, performance data, maintenance, and inspection etc.). Functional conditions are to include periodic in-
records. service testing and anticipated inoperative periods.
Environmental and aging effects on the materials of (2) environmental conditions.
construction may be evaluated on the basis of generic (3) starting requirements.
testing that adequately encompasses the process and (4) normal operating loads.
environmental effects on the material properties. Quali-
(5) externally applied loads (seismic, nozzle, etc.).
fication need not be based on the actual shaft-seal system
components. However, any qualification not based on (6) aging of nonmetallic materials (Nonmandatory
actual tests shall demonstrate that the data used are Appendix QR-B provides supplementary details associ-
appropriate and applicable to the configuration and to ated with the qualification of nonmetallic parts and may
the material used for the application. or may not be part of the in situ testing above).
The manufacturer shall demonstrate the adequacy of (7) maintaining design life (maintenance, overhaul,
the shaft-seal system in either or both of the follow- replacement, etc.).
ing ways: (c) Any electrical controls associated with the turbine
(a) by supplying documentation that the proposed shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements
system had proved itself through a comprehensive test- of IEEE Std 323 and IEEE Std 344. Qualification of any
ing program. The testing program shall have included motor-operated control or block valve actuators in the
full-scale tests at normal and DBE operating conditions. steam supply systems shall be in accordance with the
The documentation shall include a detailed description requirements of IEEE Std 382.
of the tests, test equipment, and actual test results.
(b) by providing documentation showing that the QP-7340 Power Transmission Device
proposed system is similar and has been used success- (a) Power transmission device qualification shall con-
fully for a stated length of time in similar service. This sider significant hydraulic and mechanical design fac-
method shall not be used if the proposed system, or the tors that can degrade and impact the ability of the device
environment in which it is to be used, differs signifi- to perform its specified function.
cantly from the one to which it is being compared or if Qualification shall consider the full range of speed and
service conditions vary significantly from normal horsepower requirements. In addition to aging effects,
operating service conditions. qualification techniques shall address and incorporate,
as necessary, the impact of periodic testing, mainte-
QP-7330 Turbine Driver
nance, overhaul, and replacement of essential parts of
(a) Turbine driver qualification shall consider signifi-
the power transmission device.
cant hydraulic and mechanical design factors that can
degrade and impact the ability of the turbine driver to The qualification program shall include the following:
perform its specified function. (1) The power transmission device shall be tested at
In addition to aging effects, qualification techniques the design conditions of speed and horsepower (torque)
shall address and incorporate, as necessary, the impact over the full range of normal and DBE operating condi-
of periodic testing, maintenance, overhaul, and replace- tions for both mechanical performance and structural
ment of essential parts of the turbine driver. integrity.
The qualification method shall identify the service (2) Visual and dimensional inspections shall be per-
conditions for which the turbine driver is being qualified formed at appropriate intervals to identify excessive
as described in QP-7330(b). wear or degradation.
68
ASME QME-1–2007
(b) Service aspects considered in formulating a test details associated with the dynamic qualification of
qualification program shall include mechanical equipment.
(1) power transmission device functional condi-
tions (speed, horsepower, operating time, and operating
frequency anticipated over the life of the plant). Func- QP-8000 DOCUMENTATION
tional conditions are to include periodic in-service test- The documentation requirements shall be in accor-
ing and anticipated inoperative periods. dance with QR-8000 and the additional requirements of
(2) environmental conditions. this article. In addition to original qualification docu-
(3) starting requirements. mentation, special installation requirements and mainte-
(4) normal operating loads. nance required to maintain qualification shall be
(5) externally applied loads (seismic). documented.
(6) aging of nonmetallic materials (Nonmandatory
Appendix QR-B provides supplementary details associ- QP-8100 Pump Assembly/Pump
ated with the qualification of nonmetallic parts and may Documentation shall include, but is not limited to,
or may not be part of the in situ testing above). dimension of mechanical fits and clearances.
(7) maintaining design life (maintenance, overhaul,
replacement, etc.). QP-8200 Shaft-Seal System
(c) Any electrical controls associated with speed-
Documentation shall include, but is not limited to,
changing devices shall be qualified in accordance with
shaft-seal assembly drawing with appropriate bill of
the requirements of IEEE Std 323 and IEEE Std 344.
materials, service conditions, and precautions noted that
QP-7350 Auxiliary Equipment. When auxiliary would preclude malfunction.
equipment is qualified separately from the pump assem-
bly, pump, shaft-seal system, driver, and transmission QP-8300 Turbine Driver
device, its qualification shall consider significant Documentation shall include, but is not limited to,
hydraulic and mechanical design factors that can dimension of mechanical fits and clearances. The docu-
degrade and impact performance of specified function. mentation for the turbine driver shall also be as specified
The approach to qualification shall identify the service in IEEE Std 323, IEEE Std 344, and IEEE Std 382 where
conditions and interfaces with pump assembly items. these standards are invoked.
QP-7400 Aging
QP-8400 Power Transmission Device
Pump assemblies and pump assembly items shall be
qualified in accordance with QR-7311 or QR-7321. Non- Documentation shall include, but is not limited to,
mandatory Appendix QR-B provides supplementary dimensions of mechanical fits and clearances. The docu-
details associated with the qualification of nonmetal- mentation for the power transmission device shall also
lic parts. be as specified in IEEE Std 323, IEEE Std 344, and IEEE
Std 382 where these standards are invoked.
QP-7500 Dynamic Loading
Pump assemblies and pump assembly items shall be QP-8500 Auxiliary Equipment
qualified in accordance with QR-7312 or QR-7322. Non- Documentation shall include, but is not limited to,
mandatory Appendix QR-A provides supplementary dimension of mechanical fits and clearances.
69
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QP-A

Pump Specification Checklist
QP-A1000 SCOPE (u) support and anchorage requirements and configu-

ration
This Appendix is provided to aid the specification
(v) cooling water piping code requirements
writer. It lists items that may be considered when devel-
(w) maximum input driver horsepower for diesel
oping the qualification specification for pump assembly
generator loading
items.
(x) cooling water; temperature, minimum and maxi-
mum; pressure; and maximum pressure drop
QP-A2000 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS, CODES, (y) entrained material for which the pump is de-
AND STANDARDS signed; dirt, debris, insulation, molten fuel, diesel oil,
fish, etc., under normal and abnormal service condi-
(a) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), tions
Section III (Code) construction class, applicable edition (z) separation of running frequency from shaft natu-
and addenda ral frequency and pump assembly torsional natural fre-
(b) Design Specification quency
(aa) start-up and operating time
(bb) coupling: flexibility, alignment, service life, bear-
QP-A3000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
ing load, balance
REQUIREMENTS
(cc) specific location at plant site (inside or outside
(a) pump type containment)
(b) design life
(c) functional, operating, environmental, and service QP-A4000 STRUCTURAL, SEISMIC, AND
conditions under which the pump must operate ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION
(d) operational modes, including time limit for recir- REQUIREMENTS
culating flow testing
(a) requirements for dynamic analysis or testing
(e) fluid pumped, specific gravity at given tempera-
(b) designation of loads, load combinations, and
tures
related code service conditions
(f) design pressure (c) demonstration of operability by analysis or test
(g) design temperature under all applicable loading conditions
(h) rated flow, maximum required flow (runout flow) (d) seismic loading OBE and SSE
(i) head at rated flow, maximum required flow, and (e) stress limits
shutoff conditions (f) seismic design criteria
(j) suction temperature: minimum, normal, and (g) minimum acceptable force and moment carrying
maximum capability of the pump nozzles, casing, and support
(k) suction pressure: maximum and normal attachments
(l) NPSH available at rated and maximum required (h) seismic acceleration, both horizontal (two orthog-
flows onal directions) and vertical
(m) ambient temperature, humidity, and radiation
(n) water chemical content (pump and/or seal cool- QP-A5000 MATERIAL AND MANUFACTURING
ing water) REQUIREMENTS
(o) minimum operating flow limitations
(a) specific material requirements (if differing from
(p) use of mechanical seals and type of seal cooler, if
the manufacturer’s standards)
applicable
(q) flow restrictor from seal cavity, if applicable
(r) vent and drain from pump casing and types of QP-A6000 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
connections (a) shop performance test and measurements to be
(s) type of pump nozzle connections and details taken, including capacity, total head, power input, effi-
(t) connection requirements to other ancillary piping ciency, NPSH, and vibration at the bearing or on the shaft
70
ASME QME-1–2007
(b) prequalification transient test requirements and (c) operational limits for pump recirculation or opera-
acceptance criteria tion without cooling water
(d) requirement for manufacturer’s provision of val-
ues for minimum flow capability and time limitations
QP-A7000 DOCUMENTATION, INSTRUCTIONS,
(e) requirements for manufacturer’s provision of bolt-
AND LIMITATIONS
ing material requirements, torque values, and washer
(a) documentation requirements configuration
(b) requirement for manufacturer’s provision of val- (f) quantified acceptable limits for wear of bearings
ues of maximum allowable forces and moments to establish minimum service life
71
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QP-B

Pump Shaft-Seal System Specification Checklist
QP-B1000 SCOPE (1) pressure

(2) temperature
writer. It lists items that may be considered when devel- (3) flow rate
oping the qualification specification for pump shaft-seal (4) chemistry
system items. (5) pressure drop
(f) availability of seal injection, including the quantity,
temperature, chemistry, and solids particle size
QP-B2000 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS, CODES, (g) possible inaccessibility of pump during operation
AND STANDARDS that restricts opportunities for visual inspection and pre-
(a) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), ventive maintenance to the seal system
Section III (Code) construction class, applicable edition, (h) the need for assembly and maintenance features
and addenda to limit personnel exposure time in radiation fields
(b) Design Specification (i) shaft direction or rotation as viewed from the
(c) ASME B73.1M, ASME B73.2M, API 610, API 682, drive end
and STLE SP-30 (j) specific location at plant site (inside or outside
containment)
QP-B3000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REQUIREMENTS QP-B4000 STRUCTURAL, SEISMIC, AND
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION
(a) type of seal or seal system to be provided
REQUIREMENTS
(b) design life
(1) static (a) qualification acceptance criteria
(2) dynamic (b) environmental qualification requirements
(c) post-design basis event design life
(1) number of cycles
QP-B5000 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURING
(2) duration of cycles
REQUIREMENTS
(d) conditions at seal cavity
(1) fluid pumped, specific gravity at given temper- (a) specific material requirements (if differing from
ature the manufacturer’s standards)
(2) design pressures
(3) design temperature
QP-B6000 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
(4) thermal and pressure transient (rate, range,
direction) intentionally left blank
(5) thermal and pressure transient duration
(minutes)
QP-B7000 DOCUMENTATION, INSTRUCTIONS,
(6) allowable leakage
AND LIMITATIONS
(7) radiation
(8) shaft speed (a) documentation requirements
(9) maximum entrained material size under normal (b) requirements for manufacturer’s provision of bolt-
and abnormal service conditions ing material requirements, torque values, and washer
(e) component coolant conditions configuration
72
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QP-C

Pump Turbine Driver Specification Checklist
QP-C1000 SCOPE (d) interface requirements (control system, utilities

available, flanged connections, etc.)
(e) shaft vibration limits
writer. It lists items that may be considered when devel-
(f) specific location at plant site (inside or outside
oping the qualification specification for pump turbine
containment)
driver items.
QP-C4000 STRUCTURAL, SEISMIC, AND

QP-C2000 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS, CODES, ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION
AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS
(a) applicable turbine design standard: NEMA, API, (a) seismic qualification requirements (specification
etc. must include definition of seismic environment)
(b) Design Specification (b) environmental qualification requirements
(c) design qualification requirements (i.e., pressure
vessel analysis, low-cycle fatigue analysis, etc.)
QP-C3000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
(d) qualification acceptance criteria
REQUIREMENTS
(a) required design life of major components (noncon- QP-C5000 MATERIAL AND MANUFACTURING
sumables) REQUIREMENTS
(b) functional, operating, environmental, and design
conditions under which the turbine must operate (a) specific material requirements (if differing from
(1) design pressures and temperatures (maximum, the manufacturer’s standards)
normal, and minimum) for inlet and exhaust
(2) operating pressures and temperatures (maxi- QP-C6000 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
mum, normal, and minimum) for inlet and exhaust
(a) requirement for demonstration that the unit will
(3) operating conditions (bhp, rpm) at correspond-
operate through all modes of operation for duration
ing design/operating conditions
specified (i.e., shop or field test, analysis, and/or expe-
(4) ambient temperature, pressure, humidity, and rience)
radiation
(5) maximum horsepower
(6) cooling water: minimum, normal, and maxi- QP-C7000 DOCUMENTATION, INSTRUCTIONS,
mum temperature and pressure AND LIMITATIONS
(7) process fluid analysis (chlorides, etc.) (a) document requirements
(c) operational modes, including operating and (b) requirements for manufacturer ’s provisions of
design process fluid conditions, and duration and fre- bolting material requirements, torque values, and
quency of operation washer configuration
73
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QP-D

Pump Similarity Checklist
QP-D1000 SCOPE (13) single or multistage

(14) metallurgy of wetted parts
This Appendix is provided to aid both the pump
designer and specification writer. It lists items that may
be considered when establishing rules of similarity QP-D3000 PROCESS DESIGN
between either pump designs or process conditions. The
selection of applicable items, either the ones identified (a) pumped fluid
herein or others specified as required, is at the option (1) start-up conditions
of the Owner. (2) normal and abnormal conditions
(3) transient conditions of flow, temperature, fluid
chemistry, and pressure
QP-D2000 PUMP DESIGN (4) test conditions
(a) hydraulic capability (b) external conditions
(1) rating of pump, discharge size, NPS (DN) (1) start-up conditions
(2) best efficiency point as percentage of condition (2) normal and abnormal conditions
(3) rise-to-shutoff from condition (3) transient conditions of flow, temperature, fluid
(4) NPSHR at condition chemistry, and pressure
(5) specific speed (4) amplitude and duration of seismic excitation
(6) suction specific speed (5) transient piping interaction
(7) speed(s) of rotation (6) cooling water for seal or bearing cooling
(8) tip speed Similarity can be undertaken only within pumps of
(9) number of vanes the same class and type.
The collection of the above parameters provides a
(b) mechanical capability
means of narrowing the differences between pumps. To
(1) size of suction and discharge nozzles, NPS (DN)
establish similarity, it must be shown that when exposed
(2) impeller diameter, in. (mm)
to like internal and external loads, expressed as casing
(3) vane treatment, finish and filing (over and under)
stress and assembly strain in response to normal and
(4) stationary to rotating fit clearances abnormal loads, similar pumps will exhibit congruent
(5) rotation performance — hydraulic and mechanical. They will
(6) method of support (frame, foot, and centerline) equally be expected to withstand like aging effects and
(7) speed control (constant/variable) retain their ability to perform their specified design
(8) type and size of bearing system function.
(9) type and size of drive coupling Exceptions will be considered if documentation dem-
(10) stiffness of pump and driver support on base onstrates similarity of performance, notwithstanding
(11) arrangement (vertical or horizontal) the above criteria.
(12) open or closed impeller
74
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QP-E

Guidelines for Shaft-Seal System
Material and Design Consideration
QP-E1000 SCOPE (c) Material with a stress index greater than 0.1, used
for springs, bolts, pins, and other metallic or brittle parts,
This Appendix contains guidelines for the special
should meet an ASME, ASTM, or AMS specification that
material and design considerations for shaft-seal sys-
controls the quality of the material.
tems that are intended to be qualified in accordance
(d) Proprietary material with a stress index greater
with the requirements of Section QP.
than 0.1, used for springs, bolts, pins, and other metallic
or brittle parts that do not have a suitable national speci-
QP-E2000 PURPOSE fication available, should be qualified by testing in accor-
This Appendix provides material and design guid- dance with Section QP. Such proprietary materials are
ance to the qualification specification writer. designated by a specific identification number by the
material manufacturer and certified to meet all the qual-
ity assurance requirements of the originally qualified
QP-E3000 DEFINITIONS material.
The following definition establishes the meaning of
a term in the context of its use in this Appendix and QP-E5000 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
supplements those found in Sections QR and QP:
QP-E5100 General
stress index: the ratio of the design stress to the minimum
ultimate strength of the material (S/Su). For normal operating conditions, the shaft-seal system
is designed to operate without maintenance for the
design life listed in Table QP-E1.
QP-E4000 MATERIAL CONSIDERATIONS
For service conditions other than normal, the shaft-
QP-E4100 Pressure-Retaining Material seal system is designed to operate without maintenance
Gland plates and associated bolting are defined as for a specified duration and specified number of cycles.
pressure-retaining material by the ASME Boiler and If only one cycle of a specific operating condition is
Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section III. Requirements specified, then it is understood that replacement or
to be included in the qualification specification for mate- maintenence may occur before resuming normal opera-
rial used in pressure-retaining applications are to be in tion, unless other design considerations are specified in
accordance with the appropriate ASME BPVC Section III the qualification specification.
classification and its associated material requirements. Special shaft-seal systems, such as double seals, tan-
dem seals, bellows, and/or cartridged seals, are to be
QP-E4200 Nonpressure-Retaining Material specified in the qualification specification.
(a) Considerations to be included in the qualification
specification for material used for seal-mating faces
QP-E5200 Design Input
applications are (a) The pump manufacturer will supply the seal man-
(1) no detrimental physical property changes ufacturer with the following general design criteria:
occurring when subjected to the seal cavity fluids for (1) applicable edition and addenda of Section III
the times listed in Table QP-E1 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(2) no detrimental physical property changes (2) service conditions and associated duty cycles as
occurring when subjected to the maximum seal cavity listed in Table QP-E1
temperature listed in Table QP-E1 (b) The pump manufacturer will supply the seal man-
(3) no detrimental wear rate when subjected to the ufacturer with the following arrangement and interface
conditions listed in Table QP-E1 conditions:
(b) Material with a stress index less than 0.1, used for (1) type of seal to be provided (i.e., packing,
retainers, bolts, pins, bushings, and other parts, may be mechanical, bellows, double tandems, cartridged, etc.)
manufactured from any material suitable for the (2) shaft or sleeve diameter at seal
intended service. (3) shaft or sleeve material
75
ASME QME-1–2007
Table QP-E1 Shaft-Seal System Specification

Design Basis Condition
Normal Design Basis In-Service Hydrostatic Other
[Note (1)] Events Tests [Note (2)] [Note (3)]
Fluid [Note (4)]
Pressure, psia (MPa)
Temperature, °F (°C) NA
Thermal transient
rate, range, and NA
direction, °F/min (°C/s)
Conditions at
Seal Cavity Thermal transient
NA
duration, min
Allowable leakage
[Note (5)]
Radiation, rads NA
Speed, rpm NA
Abnormal Number of cycles NA

Condition Info
(Design Life) Duration of cycles, hr NA
Pressure, psia (MPa) NA

Component
Coolant Temperature, °F (°C) NA
Conditions 3
Flow rate, gpm (mm /s) NA
Static, hr NA NA NA
Design
Life Dynamic, hr NA NA NA
GENERAL NOTE: NA indicates not applicable.

NOTES:
(1) Normal conditions refer to seal conditions in pump that are required to function during normal plant operation.
(2) Include this information if seal is to be used during hydrostatic tests.
(3) Other refers to conditions that may affect the seal cavity environment, such as external loads and loss of component coolant or injec-
tion, and to conditions that are not covered in the other categories.
(4) If fluid is water, specify quantity of chemicals present as additives or impurities and solids particle size.
(5) Allowable leakage refers to that leakage which can be collected as liquid at the seal-operating conditions.
(4) shaft orientation (i.e., vertical or horizontal) ASME B73.2M, API 610, API 682, and STLE SP-30
(5) direction of rotation (2) availability of component coolant, including the
(6) seal cavity maximum diameter at seal quantity, maximum temperature, pressure, available
(7) seal cavity length pressure drop, and chemistry
(8) shaft-to-seal cavity misalignment conditions (3) availability of seal injection, including the quan-
(i.e., static eccentricity, static angularity, range of axial tity, temperature, chemistry, and solids particle size
travel, etc.)
(d) The pump manufacturer will supply the seal man-
(9) shaft motions (i.e., radial, axial, and angular)
ufacturer with the following special provisions:
relative to the seal cavity during seismic and design
(1) maintenance provisions
basis conditions as listed in Table QP-E1
(c) The pump manufacturer will supply the seal man- (2) inaccessibility of the pump during operation
ufacturer with the following shaft-seal system external that would restrict visual inspection and preventive
conditions: maintenance
(1) seal system piping arrangements and seal flush- (3) necessary assembly and maintenance features
ing systems shall conform to ASME B73.1M, that limit personnel exposure time in radiation fields
76
ASME QME-1–2007
Table QP-E2 Limits for Unbalanced Seals by the packing manufacturer. The minimum packing
Seal Max. Sealing
size is 1⁄4 in.2 (160 mm2 ); however, a packing size of
3
Diameter, Max. Shaft Pressure, ⁄8 in.2 (240 mm2 ) or greater is preferred.
in. (mm) Speed, rpm psig (MPa) (b) Pump-stuffing boxes are to be provided with a
1
lantern ring for fluid injection directly into the packing.
⁄2 to 2 (13 to 51) Up to 1,800 100 (0.69)
Inlet and outlet connections must be provided for the
1,801 to 3,600 50 (0.35)
lantern ring.
Over 2 to 4 (51 to 102) Up to 1,800 50 (0.35) (c) Sufficient space is to be provided for the packing
1,801 to 3,600 25 (0.17) to be replaced without removing or dismantling any
part other than the gland and lantern ring if split.
(d) If the stuffing box of a vertical pump is subjected
QP-E5300 Mechanical Face Seals to discharge pressure and a bleedoff to suction is used,
(a) Mechanical face seals should be of the hydrau- the bleedoff should be by means of internal rather than
lically balanced type, except as provided for in external piping.
Table QP-E2. (e) Adequate seal draining is to be provided so that
(b) Either a sliding gasket (i.e., O-ring, V-ring, or no liquid can collect in the driver support piece.
U-ring) or a metal or rubber bellows should be used
QP-E5500 Shaft Sleeves
between the axially moving seal face and shaft sleeve
or housing. (a) Shaft sleeves, when used, are to be sealed to pre-
(c) For applications involving seal face velocities over vent leakage between the sleeve and shaft and machined
5,000 fpm (25 m/s), it is preferred that the axially mov- for concentric rotation.
able seal face be mounted on the stationary housing (b) Ends of shaft sleeve assemblies or nuts, when used
rather than on the shaft. on pumps arranged for packing, are to extend beyond
the outer face of the packing gland.
QP-E5400 Packings (c) Shaft sleeves are to extend beyond the external
(a) Stuffing boxes on all pumps should be packed seal gland plate on pumps employing an auxiliary seal
with a sufficient amount of packing as recommended other than a throttle bushing.
77
ASME QME-1–2007
(07) Section QV
Functional Qualification Requirements for Active Valve
Assemblies for Nuclear Power Plants
QV-1000 SCOPE active valve assembly: a valve assembly that is required to

change obturator position to perform its Nuclear Safety
Section QV contains the qualification requirements
Function.
and guidelines for active valve assemblies that perform
a nuclear safety function used in nuclear power plants. bending stress (Pb): the variable component of normal
Valve assembly items may be qualified as part of a single stress.
assembly or may be qualified separately, provided their cold working pressure: the valve pressure rating at 100°F
combination into a single unit is addressed. It is the (38°C).
responsibility of the Owner to specify those valve assem-
diagnostic test: a test of a valve assembly where valve
blies that require qualification to this Section.
and actuator performance parameters, fluid system con-
Section QV provides a number of ways to qualify a
ditions, ambient environmental conditions, and motive
valve assembly. The Qualification Specification that has
power supply parameters are obtained from calibrated
been generated (QV-6000) is required to specify those
instrumentation.
parameters for which the assembly is to be qualified.
In case of conflicts, Section QV takes precedence over expansion stress (Pe): stresses resulting from the restraint
Section QR for specific valve assembly qualification of free end displacement of the piping system. In a pip-
requirements. Design of the pressure-retaining bounding system, this is commonly considered to be the stress
ary of the valve is addressed by the Owner-specified resulting from constraint of the free thermal expansion
code of record and is excluded from the scope of of the piping system (thermal expansion stress). How-
Section QV. ever, it may also include various types of piping system
anchor movement effects, such as seismic anchor
motions, equipment or building thermal anchor move-
QV-2000 PURPOSE ments, etc.
It is the purpose of Section QV to provide require- extended structure: the portion of a valve assembly that
ments for the qualification of the design of valves, actua- extends outward from the centerline of the pipeline, as
tors, and the combination thereof (valve assemblies) to measured from the mating surface on the valve body;
perform in service as required under all specified e.g., on a sliding-stem valve assembly, the extended
operating and design-basis conditions. structure would include, as a minimum, the valve bon-
net, yoke, actuator, and all accessories mounted on the
actuator assembly.
QV-3000 REFERENCES
local primary membrane stress (PL): a membrane stress
References are as listed in QR-3000. produced by pressure or other mechanical load and asso-
ciated with a discontinuity, if not limited, would produce
excessive distortion in the transfer of the load to other
QV-4000 DEFINITIONS
portions of the structure.
The following definitions apply specifically to valve membrane stress: the component of normal stress, which
assemblies. Other definitions pertinent to valves will be is uniformly distributed and equal to the average value
found in Mandatory Appendix QV-I. Definitions that of stress across the thickness of the section under consid-
also apply to other types of mechanical equipment can eration.
be found in Section QR. Where there are conflicting
definitions between QR and QV, the definitions in QV motive power: the electrical, fluid, or mechanical power
take precedence with regard to application of Section or system flow required to operate the valve assembly.
QV. normal stress: component of stress normal to the plane
active check valve assembly: a valve assembly that is self- of reference.
actuating in response to system conditions to allow flow obturator: valve closure element (e.g., disk, plug, ball,
in only one direction. etc.).
78
ASME QME-1–2007
operating cycle: the movement of a valve assembly QV-5000 QUALIFICATION PRINCIPLES AND
through its full stroke under defined operating condi- PHILOSOPHY
tions, terminating with a return to the starting position.
The fundamental principles and philosophy per-
power-operated valve assembly: a valve assembly that taining to equipment qualification are provided in Arti-
requires external power such as provided by a motor, cle QR-5000 and apply to mechanical equipment in
air piston or diaphragm, solenoid, or electro hydraulic general. Qualification requirements specific to valve
operator to perform its safety function. assembles are contained in the Guide to ASME QME-1
pressure relief valve assembly: a valve assembly that is Standard, Section QV-G, “Determination of Valve
designed to open to prevent a rise of internal fluid pres- Assembly Performance Characteristics.” This Guide is
sure, in excess of a specified value, and re-close. Pressure included with this Standard.
relief valve assemblies may be further classified as
follows: QV-6000 QUALIFICATION SPECIFICATION
self-actuated: one that is actuated by inlet static
pressure. It is the responsibility of the Owner or Owner’s desig-
externally actuated: one that is actuated by external nee to identify the functional requirements for a valve
motive power. assembly. These requirements shall be provided in a
combined self- and externally actuated: one that is actu- Qualification Specification prepared in accordance with
ated by external motive power and, in the event of failure Mandatory Appendix QV-I.
of the external motive power, will open automatically The manufacturer has the option to qualify the valve
at the set pressure due to inlet static pressure. assembly for more stringent parameters than provided
in the Qualification Specification but shall ensure that
primary membrane stress (PM): the component of primary the parameters to which the valve assembly is qualified
normal stress that is uniformly distributed and equal to envelop those in the Qualification Specification.
the average value of stress across the thickness of the
section under consideration.
QV-7000 QUALIFICATION PROGRAM
primary stress: any normal or shear stress developed by
an imposed loading that is necessary to satisfy the laws QV-7100 General Requirements
of equilibrium of external and internal forces and An Application Report, as described in QV-8320, is
moments. required to provide documentation and additional
shear stress: component of stress tangent to the plane of requirements as necessary to ensure that each of the
reference. production valve assemblies is qualified for the applica-
tion specified in the Qualification Specification required
stress intensity: the difference between the algebraically
by QV-6000. The qualification program shall account for
largest principal stress and the algebraically smallest
dimensional variations of critical clearances of essential-
principal stress.
to-function parts. Further, any analytical techniques
valve assembly: a valve-actuator combination, including applied in the qualification of valve assemblies require
those functional accessories that are directly mounted verification to ensure that the analysis techniques are
thereon. The term valve assembly should be broadly inter- valid for the variations of the design being qualified.
preted to include power-operated, self-operated, and This program shall demonstrate that the performance
pressure relief valve assemblies. of valve assemblies, predicted by these analytical tech-
production valve assembly: a valve assembly that is man- niques, is applicable to all allowable variations of the
ufactured with the intent of being identical within valve clearances being qualified for the flow conditions
allowed manufacturing tolerances and clearances to the specified by the valve Qualification Specification. Even
qualified valve assembly to which its qualification is though valve assemblies may satisfy the requirements of
based. A production valve assembly consists of a pro- the manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Program (during
duction valve and production actuator. the normal manufacturing process), the qualification
qualified valve assembly: a valve assembly consisting of program shall demonstrate that the design limiting
a specific valve (e.g., including type, size, rating, mate- allowable variation in the critical clearances between
rial, and drawing) and a specific actuator (e.g., including essential-to-function parts during the manufacturing
type, size, rating, gear ratio, voltage, speed, and stem phase shall not render a valve assembly incapable of
nut, as applicable), which has been qualified by all consistent performance due to binding, blockage, etc.
appropriate testing and analysis as required by QV-7000. Section QV provides for qualification of a valve assem-
A qualified valve assembly consists of a qualified valve bly by a combination of testing and analysis. The func-
and qualified actuator. tional qualification of a qualified valve assembly may
test valve assembly: a valve assembly selected for quali- be extended to another valve assembly through limited
fication testing. testing and demonstration of design similarity. This
79
ASME QME-1–2007
Table QV-7300 Valve Assembly Qualification Requirement Matrix

Power Actuated Self Actuated Relief
QV Category
Parameter QV Category A QV Category B QV Category A QV Category B A QV Category B
Seismic QV-7450 QV-7450 NR [Note (1)] NR [Note (1)] NA [Note (2)] QV-7650
End load QV-7440 NR [Note (3)] QV-7540 NR [Note (1)] NA [Note (2)] NR [Note (3)]
Functional QV-7460 QV-7460 QV-7560 QV-7560 NA [Note (2)] QV-7660

[Note (4)] [Note (4)]
Environmental QV-7420 QV-7420 QV-7520 QV-7520 NA [Note (2)] QV-7620
Sealing QV-7430 QV-7430 QV-7530 QV-7530 NA [Note (2)] QV-7630

capability [Note (4)] [Note (4)]
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) NA p not applicable
(b) NR p not required
NOTES:
(1) Seismic evaluation of self-actuated valves is not required due to the lack of an extended structure.
(2) Relief valves, by function of their purpose (i.e., pressure relief), cannot be QV Category A.
(3) End-load testing is not required by the definition of QV Category B.
(4) Self-actuated valves that are closed in normal operation and remain closed in an accident scenario due to pressure forces acting on
the obturator need only show proof of sealing capability by way of a production seat leak test.
extension of qualification is based upon the condition QV-7400 Qualification Requirements for Power-
that both the valve assemblies utilize the same design Operated Valve Assemblies
concept and that critical dimensional clearances are
maintained. Diagnostic testing shall be performed dur- QV-7410 Initial Considerations. The ranges of the
ing the qualification testing covered by this Standard. pressure, temperature, and flow for the valve and the
maximum seat-sealing differential pressure shall be
QV-7200 Analysis Guidelines
defined in the Qualification Plan and documented in
(a) Analysis is permissible provided that sufficient the Functional Qualification Report (see QV-8310). In
test verification exists to justify the analysis used over addition, the valve is to be identified as bidirectional or
the qualification conditions involved. unidirectional, in which case the direction of pressuriza-
(b) Analysis methods may be used for ensuring acces- tion must be defined. The valve body pressure and the
sories and associated attachments are rigid (see
seat-sealing test pressure used for qualification may be
QR-A6500).
equal to or less than the rated pressure of the valve, but
(c) Analysis methods based on extensive valve assem-
these test pressures shall determine the qualification
bly testing programs may be used in conjunction with
pressure rating for the valve assembly. Pressure locking
focused flow testing to demonstrate functional capabil-
and thermal binding should also be addressed. Where
ity. The user should be cautioned that, because of diffi-
culties associated with identifying and predicting factors production valve assemblies may have different
that affect operating loads for certain types of valves operating requirements, the qualification plan shall
(e.g., flexible wedge gate valves), even when those valve envelop the requirements for the production valve
assemblies are identical, it may be necessary to limit assemblies.
the use of analysis in functional capability qualification. The orientation of the valve assembly shall be as
Analysis methods may be used in the accelerated envi- required by the Qualification Specification; however, the
ronmental aging process per the requirements of Non- valve assembly may be mounted in a more conservative,
mandatory Appendix QR-B. worst-case orientation, provided that a satisfactory justi-
fication for the worst-case orientation decision is pre-
QV-7300 Specific Qualification Requirements for sented in the Functional Qualification Report. Design
Valve Assemblies limiting orientation may be different based on various
Valve requirements are based on the valve assembly qualification attributes, e.g., seismic capability versus
type and category as delineated by Table QV-7300. functional capability.
80
ASME QME-1–2007
Throughout the following sections of QV, it should leakage, the test shall be performed so as to demonstrate
be noted that the actuator used when testing the per- the pressure integrity of the bellows or diaphragm seal.
formance of the valve does not need to be the actuator In all cases, regardless of the stem/shaft-seal construc-
that was tested for the actuator portions of the testing. tion, the intent of this test is to demonstrate the pressure
Use of other than a qualified actuator for valve testing integrity of the primary stem/shaft-seal arrangement.
does, however, require special attention be paid to the The initial primary stem/shaft-seal leakage test shall be
valve and actuator interface as discussed below in performed after fully cycling the valve assembly ten
QV-7461.3, QV-7462.3, and QV-7463.3. times. The test shall be as long as required to determine
the leakage rate but not fewer than 5 min. Document
QV-7420 Environmental and Aging. Friction of valve
the relationship between stem-seal leakage and pres-
internal sliding surfaces can increase with age until a
sure. The qualification plan shall consider whether tem-
plateau is reached. Further, inspections and disassem-
perature and fluid conditions for the application of the
bly/reassembly of valves that expose valve internal sur-
valve assembly result in the need for further qualifica-
faces to air can result in a temporary reduction in friction
tion testing.
coefficients. Qualification of functional capability must
address these phenomena when establishing valve QV-7440 End Loading. The pressure-containing por-
operating requirements. tions of valves that are to be qualified to this document
Environmental Qualification of actuators is performed shall be designed to the applicable code selected by the
in accordance with IEEE Std 323 and IEEE Std 382. Quali- plant Owner.
fication of other nonmetallic parts, critical to valve End-loading qualification is not required if
assembly performance, may be performed in accordance (a) the intended application for the valve does not
with Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B. impose significant end-load reactions (e.g., a drain valve
QV-7430 Sealing Capability with piping attached to one end of the valve does not
impose significant loading) or
QV-7431 Main-Seat Leakage. For measurement of (b) the valve is designed to be installed in piping by
main-seat leakage, a valve closure shall be effected by bolting the valve between pipe flanges, and the valve
the actuator using minimum motive power, and the body has a generally cylindrical cross section (except
maximum seat-sealing differential test pressure shall be for through bolting holes and a provision for actuator
established. Pressure on one side of the closure shall mounting and entrance of the valve stem/shaft) of such
be relieved to establish a differential pressure in the proportions that the length of the valve body parallel
specified flow direction or in the most adverse direction to the pipe run is equal to or less than the inside diameter
for bidirectional valves (e.g., a globe valve with an unbal- of the valve (e.g., a wafer style butterfly valve)
anced disk, where the design is such that flow tends to
open the valve disk) shall be seat-leak tested with pres- QV-7441 End-Loading Qualification for QV Category
sure applied on the upstream side of the disk. Leakage A Valve Assemblies. For QV Category A valve assem-
shall be collected from the low-pressure side of the clo- blies, one of the following is required:
sure or otherwise measured by appropriate means. The (a) Qualify analytically the maximum load (forces
test shall be as long as required to determine the leakage and moments) that can be placed on the valve body
rate but not fewer than 5 min. For double-disk gate such that operation is not adversely affected. In turn,
valves, the selected seat-sealing test pressure may be this load is to be supplied to the piping system designer
applied to the bonnet cavity with the leakage rates being who must design his system such that the load cannot
measured for each main seat. Document the relationship be exceeded.
between seat leakage and applied thrust and/or torque (b) Qualify by test for the maximum load that can be
and differential pressure. The qualification plan shall placed on the valve body such that operation is not
consider whether temperature and fluid conditions for adversely affected. In turn, this load is to be supplied to
the application of the valve assembly result in the need the piping system designer who must design his system
for further qualification testing. such that the load cannot be exceeded.
(c) Require that the maximum stress intensity in the
QV-7432 Stem-Seal Leakage. The primary stem/ attached piping at the pipe to valve junction resulting
shaft-seal leakage shall be observed at the rated cold from the combination of the primary or local membrane
working pressure with the valve in the partially open stress (PM or PL) plus the bending stress (Pb) plus the
position to ensure pressurization of the valve in the area expansion stress (P e ) shall be limited to a value of
of the primary stem/shaft seal. For valves without leak- (Gb/Fb) ⴛ Sy (Gb, Sb defined below). That is,
off connections, primary stem/shaft-seal leakage shall
be observed and the leak rate estimated. For valves with Gb
leak-off connections, leakage at the leak-off connections (PM or PL ) + Pb + Pe ≤ S
Fb y
shall be measured and recorded. For valves utilizing
冢 F 冣 may be taken as 1.
Gb
diaphragms or bellows to achieve zero stem/shaft-seal If Gb is unknown, then
b
81
ASME QME-1–2007
where performance may be used to supplement the testing in

Fb p bending modulus of connecting pipe order to minimize the amount of testing needed to qual-
Gb p valve body section modulus at the crotch ify the valve assembly. The following activities shall be
region performed to justify the qualification of the functional
Pb p bending stress capability of the qualified valve assembly.
Pe p expansion stress QV-7461.1 Qualified Valve
PL p local primary membrane stress
(a) Identify the manufacturer, type, size, materials
PM p primary membrane stress
(including internal parts), and rating; stem packing; and
The determination of the maximum stress intensity corrosion inhibitor (as applicable) for the valve to be
shall be based on the highest combination of concurrent qualified.
loads considering all concurrent loads defined in the (b) Perform an internal inspection of the valve for
Qualification Specification. The value of Sy shall be taken material, surface condition, and critical internal dimen-
at the highest metal temperature of the attached piping sions (including valve internal clearances and edge
for the concurrent load combination under radii). Evaluate design limiting tolerance combinations
consideration. in the manufacturing process, and verify that the valve
will behave predictably during the evaluation described
QV-7442 End-Loading Qualification for QV Category in the following:
B Valve Assemblies. End-loading qualification is not (1) Establish any orientation requirements and any
required for QV Category B valve assemblies. system piping constraints that are applicable to the qual-
QV-7450 Seismic Qualification ification of the valve.
(a) Seismic qualification is intended to demonstrate (2) Establish fluid conditions (including blow-
the ability of a valve assembly to withstand a loading down) and stroke time requirements for which the valve
that is representative of the specified seismic load quali- is being qualified.
fication level. (3) Determine the seat leakage limitations (includ-
(b) Qualification of valve assemblies shall be in accor- ing directional sealing) of the valve.
dance with IEEE Std 344 as addressed in NRC Regula- (4) Determine the stem leakage limitations of the
tory Guide 1.100 (Revision 2) or Nonmandatory valve.
Appendix QR-A. (5) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
(c) All essential-to-function accessories shall be valve stem thrust and/or torque, fluid pressure and
attached to the valve assembly. The essential-to-function temperature, and stroke time), cycle the valve under
accessories that have not been previously qualified in static fluid conditions throughout the valve stroke in
accordance with IEEE Std 344 as part of the actuator both the opening (including unseating) and closing
assembly shall be seismically qualified in accordance (including seating) directions, and verify proper valve
with IEEE Std 344 or Nonmandatory Appendix QR-A. assembly.
(6) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
QV-7460 Functional Qualification. The functional valve stem thrust and/or torque, fluid pressure and
qualification of a valve assembly is made up of several temperature, and stroke time), cycle the valve in both
different activities. the opening and closing directions until the coefficient
(a) Establish a qualified valve assembly by qualifying of friction has stabilized and baseline performance
a valve assembly to function under a specified set of parameters have been established.
conditions. This is discussed below in QV-7461. (7) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
(b) Develop a methodology to extrapolate the qualifi- stem thrust and/or torque, fluid pressure and tempera-
cation to another valve assembly. (It is desirable to not ture, and stroke time), cycle the valve under applicable
have to individually qualify each specific valve for its fluid temperature, pressure, and flow conditions (from
individual operating conditions.) This effort involves the ambient to hot water and steam conditions); environ-
analysis of the critical characteristics of how the valve mental conditions; and stroke-time requirements
assembly under consideration compares with the quali- throughout the valve stroke (including seating and
fied valve assembly. This is described below in QV-7462. unseating), and verify the functional capability of the
(c) Ensure the production valve assembly performs valve under design-basis conditions.
in the manner predicted by the qualified valve assembly. (8) Determine whether the valve is susceptible to
This is described below in QV-7463. pressure locking and/or thermal binding. If so, establish
QV-7461 Qualified Valve Assembly. The qualifica- design limitations to prevent pressure locking and/or
tion of the functional capability of a valve assembly thermal binding.
shall be justified using a combination of analysis and QV-7461.2 Qualified Actuator
diagnostic test data. Test-based methodologies that have (a) Identify actuator manufacturer, type, size, and rat-
been demonstrated to reliably predict valve assembly ing; lubricants used for gearboxes and sliding friction
82
ASME QME-1–2007
points; and corrosion inhibitor (as applicable) for the Guide to Section QV: Determination of Valve Assembly
power actuator to be qualified. Performance Characteristics for Guidance.
(b) Perform an internal inspection of the actuator for
material, surface condition, and critical internal dimen- QV-7462 Extrapolation of Qualification to Another
sions. Evaluate design limiting tolerance combinations Valve Assembly. The extrapolation of the qualification
in the manufacturing process, and verify that the actua- of the functional capability of a qualified valve assembly
tor will behave predictably during the evaluation in the to another valve assembly shall be justified using a com-
following: bination of analytical comparison of physical attributes
and diagnostic test data. Test-based methodologies that
(1) Establish any orientation requirements that are
applicable to the qualification of the actuator. have been demonstrated to reliably predict valve assem-
bly performance may be used in lieu of the testing
(2) Establish the output thrust and/or torque ver-
needed to extrapolate the qualification to another valve
sus stem position, environmental conditions, and motive
assembly. The following activities shall be performed to
power sources for which the actuator is being qualified.
justify the extrapolation of the qualification to another
(3) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
valve assembly.
actuator output thrust and/or torque; environmental
conditions; stroke time; gearbox efficiency; motor QV-7462.1 Valve
torque, voltage, and current for motor-powered actua- (a) Establish applicability of valve type, size, material
tors; and operating air pressures and current signals for (including internal parts), and rating; orientation; sys-
air-powered actuators, as applicable), cycle the actuator tem piping constraints; stem packing; and any corrosion
under nominal motive power source conditions inhibitor of the valve being qualified to the qualified
throughout the actuator stroke in both the opening and valve.
closing directions, verify proper assembly, and establish (b) Perform an internal inspection of the valve for
baseline performance parameters. material, surface condition, and critical internal dimen-
(4) While collecting diagnostic test data (including sions (including valve internal clearances and edge radii)
actuator output thrust and/or torque; environmental in order to establish applicability of construction to the
conditions; stroke time; gearbox efficiency and motor qualified valve (see QV-7461.1) and to evaluate design-
torque, voltage, and current for motor-powered actua- limiting tolerance combinations in the manufacturing
tors; and operating air pressures and current signals for process, and verify that the valve will behave
air-powered actuators, as applicable), cycle the actuator predictably.
under applicable thrust and/or torque loads, environ-
(c) Establish applicability of fluid conditions and
mental conditions, stroke-time requirements, and
stroke-time requirements for the valve to be qualified
motive-power conditions throughout the actuator stroke
to the qualified valve.
in both the opening and closing directions, and verify
(d) Determine the seat leakage limitations (including
the functional capability of the actuator under design-
directional sealing) of the valve.
basis conditions.
(e) Determine the stem leakage limitations of the
QV-7461.3 Valve and Actuator Interface valve.
(a) Identify the interface between the valve and actua- (f) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
tor for the valve assembly to be qualified. valve stem thrust and/or torque; fluid pressure and
(b) Verify that the qualified thrust and/or torque out- temperature; and stroke time), cycle the valve under
put of the actuator equals or exceeds the required thrust static fluid conditions throughout the valve stroke in
and/or torque demands of the valve throughout the both the opening (including unseating) and closing
valve assembly stroke. (including seating) directions, and verify proper valve
(c) For a motor-powered actuator with a rising stem assembly.
valve, do the following: (g) Applying the qualification and test information
(1) Identify any lubricants used on the valve stem. obtained under QV-7461.1, with supplemental testing as
(2) While collecting diagnostic test data (including necessary, collect diagnostic data (including stem thrust
valve stem thrust and/or torque), cycle the valve assem- and/or torque, fluid pressure and temperature, and
bly throughout the valve assembly stroke until the fric- stroke time) for applicable fluid temperature, pressure,
tion between the stem and the stem-nut has stabilized. and flow conditions (from ambient to hot water and
(3) While collecting diagnostic test data (including steam conditions) and stroke time throughout the valve
valve stem thrust and/or torque), cycle the valve assem- stroke (including seating and unseating), and verify the
bly throughout the valve assembly stroke under repre- functional capability of the valve under design-basis
sentative fluid and environmental conditions and conditions.
determine the stem-to-stem-nut coefficient of friction (h) Determine whether the valve is susceptible to
and load sensitive behavior. Refer to Section QV-G, pressure locking and/or thermal binding. If so, establish
83
ASME QME-1–2007
design limitations to prevent pressure locking and/or (2) Applying the qualification and test information
thermal binding. obtained under QV-7461.3, with supplemental testing
as necessary, collect diagnostic data (including valve
QV-7462.2 Actuator stem thrust and/or torque) for the valve assembly
(a) Establish applicability of actuator type, size, and throughout the valve assembly stroke at representative
rating (including internal parts and material); orienta- fluid conditions, and determine the stem-to-stem-nut
tion; lubricants; and any corrosion inhibitor of the actua- coefficient of friction and load sensitive behavior. Refer
tor being qualified to the qualified actuator. to Section QV-G, Guide to Section QV: Determination
(b) Perform an internal inspection of the actuator for of Valve Assembly Performance Characteristics for
material, surface condition, and critical internal dimen- Guidance.
sions. Evaluate design-limiting tolerance combinations
in the manufacturing process, and verify that the actua- QV-7463 Demonstration of Functional Capability of
tor will behave predictability. Production Valve Assemblies. The functional capability
of the production valve assembly shall be demonstrated
(c) Establish the output thrust and/or torque-versus-
by verification of the physical attributes, application,
stem position for which the actuator is being qualified.
and diagnostic test data of the production valve assem-
(d) Establish applicability of environmental condi-
bly to its qualified valve assembly. At the discretion of
tions, stroke-time requirements, and motive power
the Owner, the production valve assembly testing may
source conditions (such as air pressures for air-powered
be performed following final installation of the valve
actuators and motor current and voltage for motor-pow- assembly. The following activities shall be performed
ered actuators, as applicable) for the actuator to be quali- to demonstrate the functional capability of production
fied to conditions applicable to the qualified actuator. valve assembly.
(e) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
actuator output thrust and/or torque; environmental QV-7463.1 Production Valve
conditions; stroke time; gearbox efficiency; motor (a) Verify applicability of the production valve type,
torque, voltage, and current for motor-powered actua- size, material (including internal parts), and rating; ori-
tors; and operating air pressures and current signals for entation; piping system constraints; stem packing; and
air-powered actuators, as applicable), cycle the actuator any corrosion inhibitor to the qualified valve.
under nominal motive power source conditions (b) Perform an internal inspection of the production
throughout the actuator stroke in both the opening and valve for material, surface condition, and critical internal
closing directions, verify proper assembly, and establish dimensions (including verifying that valve internal
baseline performance parameters. dimensions, clearances, and edge radii are within manu-
(f) Applying the qualification and test information facturing tolerances) to establish applicability to the
obtained under QV-7461.2, with supplemental testing as qualified valve.
necessary, establish diagnostic data (including actuator (c) Verify applicability of fluid conditions and stroke-
output thrust and/or torque; environmental conditions; time requirements for the production valve to the quali-
stroke time; gearbox efficiency and motor torque, volt- fied valve.
age, and current for motor-powered actuators; and (d) Verify that the seat leakage limitations (including
operating air pressures and current signals for air-pow- directional sealing) of the qualified valve are applicable
ered actuators, as applicable) for applicable thrust to the production valve.
and/or torque loads, stroke time, and motive-power (e) Verify that the stem leakage limitations of the qual-
conditions throughout the actuator stroke in both the ified valve are applicable to the production valve.
opening and closing directions, and verify the functional (f) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
capability of the actuator under design-basis conditions. valve stem thrust and/or torque, fluid pressure and
temperature, and stroke time), cycle the production
QV-7462.3 Valve and Actuator Interface valve under static fluid conditions throughout the valve
(a) Identify the interface between the valve and actua- stroke in both the opening (including unseating) and
tor for the valve assembly to be qualified. closing (including seating) directions in order to verify
(b) Verify that the qualified thrust and/or torque out- proper assembly.
put of the actuator equals or exceeds the required thrust (g) Verify applicability of the functional capability
and/or torque demands of the valve throughout the (including stroke time) of the production valve for open-
valve assembly stroke. ing and closing under fluid conditions to the qualified
(c) For a motor-powered actuator with a rising stem valve through the use of specific test data or a test-based
valve, do the following: qualification methodology.
(1) Identify any lubricants, and establish the appli- (h) Verify that the production valve addresses any
cability under environmental conditions of the lubri- pressure locking and/or thermal binding limitations of
cants, used on the valve stem. the qualified valve.
84
ASME QME-1–2007
QV-7463.2 Production Actuator data (including valve stem thrust and torque; fluid pres-
(a) Verify applicability of the production actuator sure and temperature; stroke time; MOV motor torque,
type, size, and rating (including internal parts and mate- voltage, and current; and AOV operating air pressures
rials); orientation; lubricants; and any corrosion inhibitor and current signals, as applicable) throughout the valve
to the qualified actuator. stroke to verify the production valve assembly meets
(b) Perform an internal inspection of the Production the functional requirements of the Qualification Specifi-
Actuator for material, surface condition, and critical cation. The requirements of QV-7470 are the responsibil-
internal dimensions (including verifying that internal ity of the Owner.
dimensions, clearances, and edge radii are within manu-
facturing tolerances) to establish applicability to the QV-7500 Qualification Requirements for Self-
qualified actuator. Actuated Check Valve Assemblies
(c) Verify applicability of environmental conditions,
stroke-time requirements, and motive power source con- QV-7510 Initial Considerations. The ranges of the
ditions (such as air pressures for air-powered actuators test pressure, temperature, and flow for the valve and
and motor current and voltage for motor-powered actua- the maximum test seat-sealing differential pressure shall
tors) of the production actuator to the qualified actuator. be defined in the qualification plan and documented in
the functional qualification report. The valve-body and
(d) While collecting diagnostic test data (including
seat-sealing test pressures used in this test may be equal
stem thrust and/or torque; environmental conditions;
to or less than the rated pressure of the valve, but in any
stroke time; motor torque, voltage, and current for
motor-powered actuators; and operating air pressures event, these test pressures determine the qualification
and current signals for air-powered actuators, as applica- pressure rating for the valve assembly. Where produc-
ble), cycle the production actuator under nominal tion valve assemblies may have different operating pres-
motive power source conditions throughout the actuator sure requirements, the qualification of the qualified
stroke to verify proper assembly. valve assembly must include a range of test pressures
encompassing the requirements for the production valve
(e) Verify applicability of the functional capability
assemblies.
(including stroke time) of the production actuator for
opening and closing under environmental and power Those check valves with actuating means involving
conditions to the qualified actuator through the use of external weights, springs, or a power actuator whose
specific test data or a test-based qualification purpose is to provide positive closure or to assist in
methodology. closure may be qualified by analysis that verifies that
the actuating device cannot degrade the function or
QV-7463.3 Production Valve and Actuator operability during and after a seismic event. Addition-
Interface ally, those check valves with an external actuating device
(a) Verify applicability of the production valve and whose sole purpose is to provide a means for in-service
production actuator interface to the qualified valve testing of operability may be qualified by analysis that
assembly. verifies the actuating device cannot degrade the function
(b) Verify that the thrust and/or torque output of the or operability during and after a seismic event.
production actuator equals or exceeds the required
thrust and/or torque demands of the production valve QV-7520 Environmental and Aging. The qualifica-
throughout the valve assembly stroke. tion of nonmetallic parts that are critical to valve assem-
(c) For a motor-powered actuator with a rising stem bly performance may be performed in accordance with
valve, do the following: Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B.
(1) Verify that the lubricants used are applicable to QV-7530 Sealing Capability
the qualified valve assembly.
(2) Verify applicability of the stem-to-stem-nut QV-7531 Main-Seat Leakage. The valve shall be
coefficient of friction and the load sensitive behavior of pressurized in the flow direction tending to seat the
the production valve assembly to the qualified valve disk. Leakage shall be collected from the opposite side
assembly through the use of specific test data or a test- of the closure or otherwise measured by appropriate
based qualification methodology. means. The test shall be a minimum of 5 min or a longer
(3) Cycle the production valve assembly under period deemed adequate to measure the leakage rate.
static conditions throughout the valve stroke to verify
QV-7532 Shaft-Seal Leakage. For check valves
proper assembly.
having sealed shafts, shaft-seal leakage shall be observed
QV-7470 Post-Installation Verification and IST at cold working pressure applied to the seal. For valves
Baseline After the production valve assembly has been with leak-off connections, leakage at the leak-off connec-
installed in the plant, it shall be cycled under representation shall be measured and recorded. For valves without
tive fluid conditions as necessary to collect diagnostic leak-off connections, shaft-seal leakage shall be observed
85
ASME QME-1–2007
and the leak rate estimated. If the sealed shaft is a mov- The determination of the maximum stress intensity
ing part, the initial shaft-seal leakage test shall be per- shall be based on the highest combination of concurrent
formed after fully cycling the valve assembly ten times. loads considering all concurrent loads defined in the
The leakage rate test duration shall be adequate to mea- Qualification Specification. The value of Sy shall be taken
sure the leakage rate but not fewer than 5 min. at the highest metal temperature of the attached piping
for the concurrent load combination under consider-
QV-7540 End Loading. The pressure-containing por-
ation.
tions of valves that are to be qualified to this document
shall be designed to the applicable code selected by the QV-7542 End Loading for QV Category B Valve
plant Owner. Assemblies. End-loading qualification is not required
The end-loading test is not required if for QV Category B valve assemblies.
(a) the intended application for the valve does not
impose significant end-load reactions (e.g., a drain valve QV-7550 Seismic Qualification. Seismic qualifica-
with piping attached to one end of the valve does not tion of check valves is not required under this Standard
impose significant loading) or and may be covered by applicable design codes.
(b) the valve is designed to be installed in piping by Those check valves with actuating means involving
bolting the valve between pipe flanges, and the valve external weights, springs, or a power actuator whose
body has a generally cylindrical cross section (except purpose is to provide positive closure or to assist in
for through bolting holes and a provision for actuator closure may be qualified by analysis that verifies the
mounting and entrance of the valve stem/shaft) of such actuating device cannot degrade the function or opera-
proportions that the length of the valve body parallel bility during and after a seismic event. Additionally,
to the pipe run is equal to or less than the inside diameter those check valves with an external actuating device
of the valve (e.g., a wafer style butterfly valve) whose sole purpose is to provide a means for in-service
testing of operability may be qualified by analysis that
QV-7541 End Loading for QV Category A Valve verifies the actuating device cannot degrade the function
Assemblies. For QV Category A valve assemblies, one or operability during and after a seismic event.
of the following is required:
(a) Qualify analytically the maximum load (forces QV-7560 Functional Qualification
and moments) that can be placed on the valve body
such that operation is not adversely affected. In turn, QV-7561 Valve Assembly to Be Qualified. The
this load is to be supplied to the piping system designer valve functional qualification establishes key perform-
who must design his system such that the load cannot ance parameters necessary for the evaluation of proper
be exceeded. valve sizing to maintain the valve disk in the full open
(b) Qualify by test for the maximum load (forces and position under normal flow conditions and the evalua-
moments) that can be placed on the valve body such tion of valve adequacy for service applications involving
that operation is not adversely affected. In turn, this flow reversal and resulting pressure surge produced by
load is to be supplied to the piping system designer valve closure. The following activities shall be per-
who must design his system such that the load cannot formed to justify the qualification for functional capabil-
be exceeded. ity of the valve assembly:
(c) Require that the maximum stress intensity in the (a) Identify manufacturer, type, size, material (includ-
attached piping, at the pipe-to-valve junction resulting ing internal parts), and rating; stem packing; and corro-
from the combination of the primary or local membrane sion inhibitor (as applicable).
stress (PM or PL) plus the bending stress (Pb) plus the (b) Establish orientation and system piping appli-
expansion stress (P e ), shall be limited to a value of cation.
(Gb/Fb) ⴛ Sy (Gb, Sb defined below). That is, (c) Establish applicable fluid and system flow condi-
tions.
Gb
(PM or PL ) + Pb + Pe ≤ S (d) Establish sealing capability requirements for
Fb y
valve.
冢 F 冣 may be taken as 1.0

Gb (e) Establish stem shaft leakage limitations for valve.
If Gb is unknown, then
b Test-based methodologies that have been demon-
when strated to reliably predict valve assembly performance
Fb p bending modulus of connecting pipe may be used to supplement valve-specific testing to min-
Gb p valve body section modulus at the crotch imize the range of flow testing in qualifying the valve
region assembly.
Pb p bending stress
Pe p expansion stress QV-7561.1 Valve Qualification for Forward Flow.
PL p local primary membrane stress Perform internal inspection of the valve assembly to be
PM p primary membrane stress qualified for material and surface condition and critical
86
ASME QME-1–2007
internal dimensions (including valve internal clear- If valve design is to be qualified for applications at
ances), and evaluate design-limiting tolerance combina- elevated temperature [above 212°F (100°C)], provision
tion in manufacturing process to assess valve predictable will be required for heating the assembly to the desired
behavior. qualification temperature for this testing.
The valve assembly shall be installed in a piping sys- For the evaluation of valve adequacy to handle flow
tem capable of incrementally increasing volumetric and reversals, it is required that an analytical model, a test, or
mass flow rates to determine valve disk position at vari- a combination of both be developed and demonstrated.
ous flows, including the full open, stable position against
a stop. A sufficient number of test runs shall be per- QV-7562 Extrapolation of Qualification for Func-
formed to verify the full open, stable characteristics of tional Capability. The extrapolation of the qualification
the valve. The valve shall be protected against system of the functional capability of a qualified valve assembly
turbulence. The test fluid shall be of equal or less density to another valve assembly shall be justified using a com-
than the fluid of the valve application, or appropriate bination of analytical comparison of physical attributes
momentum corrections shall be made. and diagnostic test data. The following activities shall
The test valve shall include a means to verify the be performed to justify the extrapolation of the qualifica-
valve disk position. The valve shall be protected against tion for functional capability:
unstable flow conditions. (a) Establish applicability of valve type, size, and rat-
The mass flow rate required ensuring full travel of ing (including internal parts and seat material); orienta-
the disk to stable contact with a stop shall be determined. tion; and any corrosion inhibitor of the valve assembly
At the full open, stable flow condition, the flow velocity being qualified to the applicable qualified valve
and fluid condition (data to determine the mass flow assembly.
rates) shall be recorded. A sufficient number of test runs (b) Perform internal inspection of valve assembly for
shall be performed to verify the full open, stable charac- material and surface condition and critical internal
teristics of the valve. dimensions, and evaluate design-limiting tolerance
combination to assess valve predictable behavior and to
QV-7561.2 Valve Qualification for Closing. The establish applicability of construction to the qualified
test valve assembly shall be installed in a piping system valve assembly.
for water flow testing. Tests shall be performed by estab- (c) Establish applicability of fluid and environmental
lishing full forward flow or full opening of the valve, conditions for the valve assembly to be qualified to con-
stopping forward flow at various rates, and observing ditions applicable to the qualified valve assembly.
the valve closure. (d) Determine applicability of sealing capability
If flow reversal can occur prior to valve closure, a test requirements.
shall be performed to simulate the reverse flow and the
(e) Cycle the valve assembly to be qualified under
valve open position to verify that sealing parts remain
static conditions with collection of diagnostic data to
intact and that seat wedging cannot occur. Typically,
verify proper assembly and establish baseline param-
flow reversal can occur prior to valve closure when the
eters.
check valve closes to isolate a line break or when one
(f) Establish applicability of functional capability of
of a group of parallel pumps trips and a check valve
the valve assembly to be qualified for opening and clos-
closes to prevent pump short circuiting.
ing under fluid flow and environmental conditions to
NOTE: Free closing valves, in which there is no quantifiable the qualified valve assembly through use of specific test
restraint on the closure element as it approaches the seated position
data or a test-based qualification methodology.
other than its inertia, will produce significant pressure surge during
a reverse flow test. QV-7563 Demonstration of Functional Capability of
As soon as conditions permit, following completion Production Valve Assemblies. The functional capability
of the valve closure, an observation shall be made of of production valve assemblies shall be demonstrated
the seat leakage under differential pressure. based on verification of the physical attributes, applica-
Valves having a body and/or disk seating taper angle tion, and diagnostic data for the production valve assem-
greater than 29 deg (cone angle greater than 58 deg) are blies consistent within manufacturing tolerances to its
not susceptible to seat wedging and need not be quali- qualified valve assembly. The following activities shall
fied for seat wedging. be performed in demonstrating the functional capability
Valves shall be subjected to a static closed pressure of production valve assemblies:
differential equal to the maximum static-plus-dynamic (a) Verify applicability of the production valve assem-
pressure differential for which the valve is to be quali- bly, e.g., including valve type, size, and rating; internal
fied. The pressure shall then be removed and a determi- parts; seat material; orientation; and any corrosion inhib-
nation made that the valve can open normally with the itor, to its qualified valve assembly.
minimum differential pressure in the normal flowing (b) Perform internal inspection of production valve
direction. assembly for material and surface condition and critical
87
ASME QME-1–2007
internal dimensions (including valve internal clear- QV-7650 Seismic Qualification

ances) to assess valve predictable behavior and to estab- (a) Seismic qualification is intended to demonstrate
lish applicability to its qualified valve assembly. the ability of a valve assembly to withstand loading
(c) Verify applicability of fluid and environmental representative of the specified seismic load qualifica-
conditions, for the production valve assembly to condition level.
tions for which its qualified valve assembly was (b) Qualification of valve assemblies shall be in accor-
qualified. dance with IEEE Std 344 as addressed in NRC Regula-
(d) Verify applicability of sealing capability require- tory Guide 1.100 (Revision 2) or Nonmandatory
ments for the production valve to its qualified valve Appendix QR-A.
assembly. (c) All essential-to-function accessories shall be
(e) Cycle the production valve under static conditions attached to the valve assembly. The essential-to-function
with collection of diagnostic data (disk position, etc.) to accessories that have not been previously qualified in
verify proper assembly and establish baseline accordance with IEEE Std 344 as part of the actuator
parameters. assembly shall be seismically qualified in accordance
(f ) Verify applicability of functional capability with IEEE Std 344 or Nonmandatory Appendix QR-A.
(including stroke time) of the production valve assembly
for opening and closing under fluid, environmental, and QV-7660 Functional Qualification. Functional quali-
system flow conditions to its qualified valve assembly fication for pressure relief valve assemblies shall be as
through use of specific test data or a test-based qualifica- delineated in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
tion methodology. Section III, Subsections NB, NC, or ND 7000. The rules
of Section III also govern the extrapolation of test results,
QV-7564 Post-Installation Verification and IST
as well as the extension of test results to production
Baseline. After the valve has been installed in the plant,
valves.
the valve shall be cycled under representative fluid flow
conditions as necessary to collect diagnostic data (disk QV-7661 Tests Prior to Initial Operation. Valve
position, etc., as applicable) for use in future perform- assemblies shall be tested prior to initial installation
ance monitoring. The requirements of QV-7564 are the as delineated in ASME OM Code OM-1, Appendix 1,
responsibility of the Owner. Subsection 1-3100, or 1-7100.
QV-7600 Qualification Requirements for Safety and QV-7662 Post-Installation Verification and IST
Relief Valve Assemblies Baseline. After the valve assembly has been installed
QV-7610 Initial Considerations. The ranges of the in the plant, the valve shall be tested as required by
test pressure, temperature, and flow for the valve shall ASME OM Code OM-1, Appendix 1, Subsection 1-3200,
be defined in the Qualification Plan and documented in or 1-7200. The requirements of QV-7662 are the responsi-
the Functional Qualification Report. bility of the Owner.
QV-7620 Environmental and Aging. For power-actu-
ated pressure relief valve assemblies, the actuator must QV-8000 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
be environmentally qualified if the actuator is relied
upon for the active safety function of the valve. Environ- QV-8100 Documentation Scope
mental qualification of actuators is performed in accor- (a) Qualification documentation is intended to verify
dance with IEEE Std 323 and IEEE Std 382. Qualification that each valve assembly used in a nuclear power plant
of other nonmetallic parts that are critical to valve assem- application is qualified to perform its designated func-
bly performance may be performed in accordance with tion when used for its intended service. Qualification is
Nonmandatory Appendix QR-B. substantiated by showing and explaining the relation-
QV-7630 Seat Tightness ship between the service requirements and the testing
and analysis that is conducted as part of the qualification
QV-7631 Seat Leakage. Seat leakage shall be
program.
determined at 90% of set pressure. Allowable leak rate
shall be as stipulated in the Qualification Specification. (b) A Qualification Plan, as described in QV-8200, is
required to translate the Qualification Specification into
QV-7640 End Loading. The pressure-containing por- a step-by-step qualification program and the testing and
tions of valves that are to be qualified to this document analysis that is conducted as part of the qualification
shall be designed to the applicable code selected by the program.
plant Owner.
(c) A Functional Qualification Report, as described in
QV-7641 End Loading for QV Category A Valve QV-8310, is required to document compliance of the
Assemblies. Not applicable to pressure relief valves. qualified valve assembly and its production valve
QV-7642 End Loading for QV Category B Valve assemblies with Section QV.
Assemblies. End-loading qualification is not required (d) An Application Report, as described in QV-8320,
for QV Category B relief valves. is required to document the suitability of any qualified
88
ASME QME-1–2007
valve assembly and its production valve assemblies for associated production valve assemblies to meet the
a specific nuclear plant application. requirements of a specific application. An Application
Report is required for each serial-numbered valve
QV-8200 Qualification Plan
assembly, except that valve assemblies whose construc-
A Qualification Plan, which may be part of the Func- tions and service conditions are identical, differing only
tional Qualification Report, shall be prepared with in serial numbers and tag numbers, may be combined
appropriate inspection and test record forms to define into one Application Report.
test objectives, test fluids, test instrumentation, condi-
tions of the test, orientation, permissible maintenance (b) The Application Report shall reference the appro-
or adjustments, and acceptance criteria. The plan shall priate Functional Qualification Report and shall further
also specify the activities to ensure that production valve show how each of the specific application requirements
assemblies will perform consistently with their applica- of the Qualification Specification are appropriately
ble qualified valve assembly. See Guide to ASME QME-1 addressed by the Functional Qualification Report or
Standard, Section QV, “Determination of Valve Assem- other tests and analysis as outlined in this Section.
bly Performance Characteristics,” for information on (c) Where prequalified parts of the valve assembly
preparing the section of a Qualification Plan addressing (i.e., valve, actuator, solenoids, limit switches, etc.) are
functional capability demonstration for valve assemblies utilized as part of the valve assembly qualification, the
to be qualified and their production valve assemblies. Application Report shall reference the report(s) upon
which such prequalification is based. In addition, it must
QV-8300 Reports
be shown that the mounting and integration of this pre-
QV-8310 Functional Qualification Report qualified part on the valve assembly does not degrade or
(a) A Functional Qualification Report shall be pre- otherwise interfere with the prequalification of the part.
pared for each qualified valve assembly qualified in (d) The Application Report shall contain the follow-
accordance with this Section of the standard directly or
ing, as applicable:
by extrapolation. This Functional Qualification Report
shall provide complete identification of the valve by (1) Serial number, tag number, or other unique
type, size, pressure rating, actuator type and size, and identification of the valve assembly.
other data as appropriate, including the Qualification (2) Complete description of the valve assembly
Plan, test results, and inspection data. The Functional construction configuration, including an assembly
Qualification Report shall also contain a summary of the drawing. This description shall include a complete iden-
parameters established by the functional qualification tification of the valve by type, size, pressure rating, and
testing and analysis for both the qualified valve assem- actuator type and size.
bly and its production valve assemblies. Any specific (3) A summary of the functional parameters and
limitations that restrict qualification shall be stated. See how they are met by the valve assembly.
Guide to ASME QME-1 Standard, Section QV, “Determi-
(4) Reference to the Functional Qualification
nation of Valve Assembly Performance Characteristics,”
for information on preparing the section of a Functional Report(s) upon which qualification is based.
Qualification Report addressing functional capability (5) All test results and analyses used to show that
demonstration of the qualified valve assembly and its the valve assembly satisfies the requirements of this
production valve assemblies. Section for the specific application.
(b) Where prequalified components of the valve (6) Reference to the qualification reports for all pre-
assembly (i.e., valve, actuator, solenoids, limit switches, qualified components used per above.
etc.) are utilized as part of the valve assembly qualifica-
(7) Any specific limitations that restrict application
tion, the Functional Qualification Report shall reference
shall be stated.
the report(s) upon which such prequalification is based.
In addition, it must be shown that the mounting and (8) Additional information as may be necessary to
integration of this prequalified component on the valve support the demonstration of functional capability for
assembly does not degrade or otherwise interfere with the qualified valve assembly and its production valve
the prequalification of the component. assemblies. See Guide to ASME QME-1 Standard, Sec-
(c) Each Functional Qualification Report shall be cer- tion QV, “Determination of Valve Assembly Perform-
tified to be correct and complete and to be in compliance ance Characteristics,” for information on preparing the
with this Standard by one or more registered profes- section of an Application Report addressing functional
sional engineers representing the organization responsi- capability demonstration.
ble for the functional qualification. (e) Each Application Report shall be certified by one
QV-8320 Application Report or more registered professional engineers to be correct
(a) An Application Report is required to demonstrate and complete and to be in compliance with Section QV
the suitability of any qualified valve assembly and its of this Standard.
89
ASME QME-1–2007
(07) Mandatory Appendix QV-I

Qualification Specification for Active Valves
QV-I1000 SCOPE packing; and stem lubricant, corrosion inhibitor, and

critical internal dimensions for predictable performance
This Appendix establishes requirements for a Qualifi-
(including valve internal clearances and edge radii) for
cation Specification for active valves as required by
the valve
ASME QME-1, QR-6000 and QV-6000.
(b) valve end connection
(c) connecting pipe size and wall thickness or
QV-I2000 PURPOSE schedule
This Appendix provides details of functional require- (d) valve orientation and system piping application
ments that supplement piping and valve codes and stan- if other than piping horizontal with stem vertical
dards applicable to active valves. The information above pipe
requested in this Appendix must be provided as part (e) type (motor, pneumatic piston, electro-hydraulic,
of the Design Specification or as a separate document. etc.), size, rating, and gearbox lubricant for the actuator
Compliance with the requirements of this Appendix is (f) desired position of the valve assembly in the event
intended to ensure that the operating conditions and of actuator power loss shall be specified (e.g., fail open,
safety functions of the valve have been adequately con- fail closed, fail as is)
sidered and defined by the Owner as necessary for (g) valve design pressure and temperature
which the valve must be qualified to Section QV. The (h) valve normal position (open, closed, throttled,
Functional Specification is required to ensure that the modulating, etc.)
Owner has provided the qualification parameters for the (i) valve nuclear safety function or functions (e.g.,
active valve to the valve manufacturer or qualification wide open to permit flow, closed to stop flow, flow
facility. control, modulating, reverse flow prevention, excess
flow prevention, overpressure protection, and required
QV-I3000 REFERENCES number of actuations)
(j) applicable fluid and system flow conditions,
References are as listed in QR-3000. including design pressure and flow rate and coincident
temperature for each nuclear safety function, and the
QV-I4000 DEFINITIONS maximum differential pressure across the closed
obturator
QV Category A valve assembly: valve assemblies that are
(k) valve qualification category (QV Category A or B
required to isolate flow, under conditions associated
as defined in Section QV)
with pipe rupture within the pipeline in which it is
located. This flow includes blowdown flow (e.g., isolat- (l) sealing capability and stem/shaft leakage require-
ing a line break with a flow regime that exhibits two ments
phase flow or flow velocities above those experienced (m) normal and accident environmental conditions,
in a pumped flow application). including the range of temperatures, pressures, and
humidity, and significant aging mechanisms (radiation),
QV Category B valve assembly: valve assemblies that are
where known
not QV Category A.
(n) frequency response spectra for the operating basis
earthquake and the safe shutdown earthquake
Other definitions are as listed in QV-4000.
(o) minimum fundamental frequency requirements
(p) required considerations to prevent pressure lock-
QV-I5000 FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION CONTENTS ing and thermal binding (i.e., flexible wedges, spring-
The Functional Specification shall identify the follow- compensated actuators, valve body connections for
ing as applicable: relief valves or rupture disks, or connections to upstream
piping)
QV-I5100 Valve Assemblies (q) diagnostic data to be collected during qualifica-
(a) type (gate, globe, check, relief, etc.), size, and rat- tion, including valve stem thrust and torque; fluid pres-
ing (including internal parts and seat material); stem sure and temperature; stroke time; MOV motor torque,
90
ASME QME-1–2007
voltage, and current; and AOV operating air pressures (e) control signal: type and range of signal (electric,
and current signals pneumatic, etc.) and required valve response with
(r) test cycles necessary to verify stable valve internal increasing and decreasing signal
friction coefficients
(s) externally applied forces and moments
QV-I7000 SELF-OPERATED CHECK VALVE
CHARACTERISTICS
QV-I6000 ACTUATOR REQUIREMENTS For check valves, the following shall be specified:
QV-I6100 Electrical Power for Valve Actuators and (a) system fluid
Control Elements (b) system flow range (including minimum system
flow for which valve is required to be fully open)
Electrical power available shall be identified as AC
(c) system pressure range
single phase, AC three phase, or DC. Applicable voltage,
(d) system temperature range
current, and frequency operating ranges shall be speci-
fied. Motor manufacturer, type, size, rating, output (e) maximum test seat-sealing pressure and minimum
torque, and current shall be specified. The controlling test seat-sealing pressure for containment isolation
element(s) for opening and closing shall be specified valves
(e.g., torque and limit switches). (f) leakage limits
The power supply conditions shall be specified as (g) valve body test pressure
follows: (h) production pressure test ranges
(a) normal voltage, current, and electrical frequency (i) production temperature test ranges
under normal operating conditions (j) identification of whether closure requirements are
(b) high-voltage limit, current, and electrical fre- prior to flow reversal or after flow reversal
quency under the most severe functional requirement For check valves that are required to close upon flow
(c) low-voltage limit, current, and electrical frequency reversal, the designer shall specify detailed dynamic
under the most severe functional requirement requirements. Typical requirements include, but are not
(d) acceptable operating time requirement and toler- limited to, flow rate, temperature, inlet and differential
ances for operating time in each case pressures, and time history related to the flow reversal.
(e) motor duty cycle time requirements
QV-I8000 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
QV-I6200 Pneumatic Power for Valve Actuators and CHARACTERISTICS
Control Elements
For pressure relief valves, the following shall be
The following characteristics of actuator power avail-
specified:
ability, signal source availability, and valve response
shall be identified: (a) fluid (or fluids, if applicable)
(a) minimum and maximum available air supply (b) system operating pressure and temperature
ranges
(b) control signal type (i.e., electrical, pneumatic, etc.)
(c) set pressure
(c) control signal range (minimum, maximum)
(d) set pressure range
(d) solenoid requirements, if any
(e) set pressure tolerance
(e) special stroking requirements in each direction (if
(f) discharge capacity with due allowance for the
needed)
effect of the back pressure on the capacity
(f) manual operator requirements (if any)
(g) percent overpressure (pressure increase over the
set pressure)
QV-I6300 Hydraulic Power for Valve Actuators and
Signal Elements (h) blowdown (difference between set point pressure
and reseating pressure)
The following listed characteristics of the actuator (i) static and dynamic back pressure, minimum and
fluid, availability, and valve response shall be identified: maximum
(a) type of fluid and brand name, if available (j) response time (maximum time delay between
(b) fluid pressure and temperature range attainment of set pressure or reception of the energizing
(c) limitation of flow rate signal by the solenoid and valve lift)
(d) type and degree of filtration, including micron (k) identification of use of rupture disks in series with
size, particulates, dew point, etc., as applicable the relief valve
91
ASME QME-1–2007
Nonmandatory Appendix QV-A

Functional Specification for Active Valves for
QV-A1000 SCOPE NPS (400 mm3/h/PN) of nominal valve size, or other

leakage rate specified by the Owner.
This Appendix establishes requirements for a func-
tional specification for active manual, self-operated, or NOTE: The leakage requirements defined above are not applica-
power-operated valves for applications in a nuclear ble to those flow control valves that are not intended to also serve
as isolation or stop valves. For such control valves, the leakage
power plant.
requirements of ANSI/FCI 70-2-1976 (R1982) may be specified by
the Owner.
QV-A2000 PURPOSE
This Appendix provides detailed definitions of func- QV-A5000 FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION CONTENTS
tional requirements that supplement piping and valve Compliance with this Standard requires that the
codes and standards applicable to active valves in piping Owner provide or cause to be provided a functional
systems whose safety function is to open, close, or regu- specification that identifies the safety function(s) of the
late fluid flow or perform any combination of these valve and provides for the delineation of the following
tasks. The requirements of this Appendix may be pro- as applicable:
vided as part of the valve Design Specification, or as
(a) structural requirements
a separate document that references the valve Design
(b) operational requirements
Specification. Compliance with the requirements of this
(c) leakage limits
Appendix is intended to ensure that the operating condi-
(d) pressure relief valve characteristics
tions and safety functions of the valve have been ade-
quately considered and defined by the Owner; (e) special material requirements
compliance will also permit valve and actuator manufac- (f) installation requirements
turers to identify designs of products and materials to (g) maintenance requirements
be used in the manufacture of those products that will (h) qualification requirements
be adequate for the service conditions. (i) in-service test requirements
(j) unique or extended storage requirements
QV-A3000 REFERENCES QV-A5100 Valve Characteristics
See Section QR-3000. As a minimum, the application characteristics of each
valve shall be identified by listing whichever of the
QV-A4000 DEFINITIONS following descriptive terms are appropriate:
(a) valve function or functions, e.g., wide open to
obturator: valve closure element (disk, plug, ball, etc.). permit flow, closed to stop flow, flow control, modulat-
use, frequent: requiring functional operations, including ing, reverse flow prevention, excess flow prevention,
exercising and testing, in excess of 500 times over the overpressure protection
life of the valves. (b) power-operated
valves, active: see Section QR definition of equipment, (c) self-operated
active. (d) manually operated
(e) pressure relief
valves, low leakage: valves for which the manufacturer’s (f) frequent use
main seat leakage acceptance test limit is 0.1 in.3/hr/
(g) infrequent use
NPS (80 mm3/h/PN) of nominal valve size, or other
(h) low leakage
leakage rate specified by the Owner.
(i) nominal leakage
valves, manual: valves that are only operated physically (j) normally open or normally closed
by a person. (k) modulating (including characteristic, e.g., linear
valves, nominal leakage: valves for which the manufactur- equal percentage)
er’s main seat leakage acceptance test limit is 0.6 in.3/hr/ (l) qualification requirements
92
ASME QME-1–2007
(m) acceptable in-service leakage (b) system hydrostatic testing

(n) in-service test category (c) preoperational testing
(d) start-up testing
(e) in-service testing and exercising
QV-A6000 FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION DETAILS
(f) normal and abnormal plant operation including
QV-A6100 Structural Requirements postulated accident conditions and events covered by
plant operational modes or plant operational conditions
The following information shall be specified:
Other operational conditions, such as the likelihood
(a) design pressure and temperature.
of bonnet pressurization caused by volumetric expan-
(b) design loads and appropriate service levels A, B,
sion of contained fluid, identification of all flowing
C, and D limits (see ASME BPVC Section III, NCA-2142).
media for all conditions, and dry operation shall be
(c) flow rate at specified conditions of pressure and
identified.
temperature.
(d) for ASME BPVC Section III Class 1 only, the time– QV-A6220 Electrical Power for Valve Actuators and
temperature for significant thermal transients with num- Control Elements. Electrical power available shall be
ber of cycles. This shall also include the interdependence identified as AC single phase, AC three phase, or DC.
and number of cycles, if applicable, of time–temperature Applicable voltage and frequency operating ranges shall
and any coincident pressure and loading (see ASME be specified. The controlling element(s) for opening and
BPVC Section III, NB-3500). closing shall be specified (e.g., torque switch, limit
(e) time histories of design basis dynamic loads on the switch).
valve, if not otherwise specified in QV-A6100(f) or (g). The power supply conditions shall be specified as
(f) frequency response spectra for the operating basis follows:
earthquake and the safe shutdown earthquake, as well (a) normal voltage and electrical frequency under
as other potential forcing functions such as those from normal operating conditions
attached piping, pumps, restraints, or other equipment (b) high-voltage limit and electrical frequency under
as applied to valves, if not otherwise specified in the most severe functional requirement
QV-A6100(e) or (g). (c) low-voltage limit and electrical frequency under
(g) seismic acceleration and other dynamic loadings the most severe functional requirement
that the valve assembly shall be capable of withstanding (d) acceptable operating time requirement and toler-
without loss of functional capability. ances for operating time in each case of QV-A6220(a)
(h) loadings from structural supports and restraints through (c)
acting directly on the valve, if any. (e) motor duty cycle time requirements
(i) any minimum fundamental frequency require-
ments. QV-A6221 Pneumatic Power for Valve Actuators and
(j) maximum static and dynamic pressure (including
Control Elements. The following characteristics of actu-
ator power availability, signal source availability, and
all plant operating conditions) that can exist across the
valve response shall be identified:
obturator, including potential water hammer, for which
the valve assembly operation is to be ensured. (a) minimum and maximum available air supply
(b) control signal type (i.e., electrical, pneumatic, etc.)
QV-A6200 Operational Requirements (c) control signal range (minimum, maximum)
Anticipated modes of valve operation, including (d) solenoid requirements, if any
safety function(s) during and after the specified event (e) special stroking requirements in each direction (if
(i.e., open, close, remain as is, etc.), shall be specified. The needed)
operating conditions, power versus manual operation (f) manual operator requirements (if any)
condition, and environmental conditions shall be identi- QV-A6222 Hydraulic Power for Valve Actuators and
fied. The desired position of the valve assembly in the Signal Elements. The following listed characteristics of
event of actuator power loss shall be specified (e.g., fail the actuator fluid, availability, and valve response shall
open, fail closed, fail as is). be identified:
QV-A6210 Operating Conditions. Frequent or infre- (a) type of fluid, and brand name, if available
quent operational cycles, differential pressure (amount (b) fluid pressure and temperature range
and direction), system fluid, flow (quantity and direc- (c) limitation of flow rate
tion), imposed loads, temperature, and pressure condi- (d) type and degree of filtration, including micron
tions for each of the following operational categories size, particulates, dewpoint, etc., as applicable
shall be specified (the maximum, nominal, and mini- (e) control signal: type and range of signal (electric,
mum flow for check valves shall be specified): pneumatic, etc.) and required valve response with
(a) installation testing increasing and decreasing signal
93
ASME QME-1–2007
QV-A6230 Environmental Conditions. The environ- (d) set pressure range

mental conditions1 that are postulated to exist prior to (e) set pressure tolerance
and at the time safety function is required shall be iden- (f) discharge capacity with due allowance for the
tified. effect of the back pressure on the capacity
The need and minimum frequency of valve, actuator, (g) percent overpressure (pressure increase over the
and actuator accessories to perform within normal and set pressure)
abnormal environmental conditions,2 with or without (h) blowdown (difference between set point pressure
maintenance, shall be stated. and reseating pressure)
The following factors are considered relevant: (i) static and dynamic back pressure, minimum and
(a) the atmosphere, including chemistry, pressure, maximum
temperature, humidity, and radioactivity, in which the (j) response time (maximum time delay between
valves and actuators will be installed and must operate attainment of set pressure or reception of the energizing
under normal conditions. signal by the solenoid and valve lift)
(b) the atmosphere, including chemistry, pressure,
temperature, humidity, and radioactivity, in which the QV-A6500 Special Material Requirements
valves and actuators must operate under abnormal Unique material requirements of the valve, actuator,
(including accident) conditions. The duration of these and actuator controls shall be specified. Items to be con-
conditions shall be specified. sidered shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(c) any other parameters that must be defined to (a) unacceptable part or trim materials
ensure the qualification basis is maintained (e.g., pneu- (b) halogen limits for gaskets and packing
matic or electrical terminations, conduit sealing).
(c) limitations on nonferrous materials, internal (wet-
QV-A6300 Leakage Limits ted) or external
(d) special surface preparations or coatings required
QV-A6310 Seat Leakage. Limits shall be specified (e) unusual process fluid chemistry
based on the fluid flowing through the valve, the fluid
temperature, the direction of leakage, and differential QV-A6600 Installation Requirements
pressure.
The valve orientation shall be specified. Pressure relief
(a) For overpressure protection valves, the acceptance valve piping arrangements and, where used, details of
leakage limits shall be specified as limits at percentage water seal arrangements shall be described. Check
of set point. valves and control valves in close proximity to source
(b) Acceptance leakage limits for valves whose leak- of turbulence, such as elbows and pump discharges,
age is defined as low or nominal shall be as defined in should be indicated. The method of installation shall
QV-A4000. be specified, i.e., butt weld, socket weld, screwed, or
(c) Acceptance leakage limits for backseat leakage flanged. Sufficient detail shall be provided to ensure
shall be specified where applicable if such leakage can compatibility with the Owner’s installation method.
be measured separately from main seat leakage.
(d) Acceptance leakage limits for flow control valves QV-A6700 Maintenance Requirements
that are not intended to serve as isolation valves or stop
Special provisions for valve maintenance shall be
valves shall be as indicated in QV-A4000.
specified.
QV-A6320 Other Leakage. If valve assembly func-
tion requires a limit on overall leakage (e.g., leakage in QV-A6800 Qualification Requirements
addition to that of the main seat, such as stem packing The extent and acceptable methods of seismic and
and flange), such overall leakage limit shall be specified. environmental qualification shall be specified.
QV-A6400 Pressure Relief Valve Characteristics QV-A6900 In-Service Testing
For pressure relief valves, the following, as applicable, Any special feature or valve assembly configuration
shall be specified: requirements to facilitate planned in-service diagnostic
(a) fluid (or fluids, if applicable) testing should be clearly identified for the valve manu-
(b) system operating pressure facturer.
(c) set pressure
QV-A7000 FILING REQUIREMENTS
1
The term environmental conditions shall be interpreted to be the A copy of the functional specification shall be filed
environment external to the valve assembly.
2 at the location of the installation and shall be available
The terms normal and abnormal environmental conditions
should be interpreted to mean the environmental conditions that to the enforcement authorities having jurisdiction over
will exist as a result of specific conditions. the plant installation.
94
ASME QME-1–2007
Section QV-G
Guide to Section QV: Determination of Valve Assembly
Performance Characteristics
QV-G1000 SCOPE and incomplete or inaccurate specification of perform-

ance requirements.
(a) This Guide provides general information regard- (b) One of the strengths of Section QV is its ability to
ing the determination of valve assembly performance extend the qualification of a parent valve to a wide
characteristics and guidance concerning the application range of candidate valves that have different service
of those performance characteristics for all applicable conditions. As discussed in QV-7000, test-verified valve
service conditions, loads, and load combinations. It pro- and actuator sizing procedures must be used to show
vides recommendations, based on lessons learned from that the candidate valve will correctly function for all
government and industry test programs, for developing specified service conditions that the candidate valve will
an understanding of performance characteristics of experience.
valve assemblies. It also provides information or guid- (c) As stated in the Introduction of Section QV, Section
ance for applying that understanding in predicting the QV provides a method for the qualification of active
performance of similar valves or predicting the perform- valve assemblies that will provide an acceptable level
ance of the same valve under different operating and of assurance of functional operability. Section QV is part
environmental conditions. of a three-step process to show that valve assemblies
(b) The information provided in this Guide is installed in nuclear facilities will be capable of per-
intended to be used so the performance capabilities of forming the equipment’s specified safety-related func-
the parent equipment are established prior to beginning tions under all conditions outlined in the valve
a candidate valve qualification as outlined in Section functional specification. ASME Operations and
QV. By first establishing a parent valve assembly’s per- Maintenance Committee (O&M) requirements provide
formance characteristics, specific areas of performance for on-going monitoring of qualified equipment to
ensure that any degradation of performance (as the
will be identified that might need to be monitored to
equipment ages) will not impact the equipment’s ability
ensure that the candidate valve is correctly configured
to perform its safety-related function. Information
for its intended service.
gained from the O&M process may result in refined
(c) This Guide also provides references to help the functional specification requirements discussed in Non-
reader locate background documents and additional mandatory Appendix QV-A, “Functional Specification
information on the various topics discussed. for Active Valves for Nuclear Power Plants.”
QV-G2000 INTRODUCTION QV-G3000 REFERENCES

ASME Code Case OMN-1, Alternative Rules for
(a) As discussed in the Introduction of Section QV, Preservice and Inservice Testing of Certain Electric
government and industry test and evaluation programs Motor-Operated Valve Assemblies in LWR Power
have been conducted to identify valve functional per- Plants, OM Code 1995 Edition; Subsection ISTC
formance characteristics of different types of valve
Publisher: The American Society of Mechanical
assemblies installed in nuclear power plants. These test
Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New York,
programs were justified because some equipment (e.g.,
NY 10016-5990; Order Department: 22 Law Drive, P.O.
specific motor-operated gate valves) were found to be Box 2900, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900
incapable of performing their safety-related functions
as required by nuclear plant Technical Specifications. IEEE Std 382-1985, IEEE Standard for Qualification of
Many of these problems, but not all, regarding this Actuators for Power-Operated Valve Assemblies with
equipment can be attributed to the use of non-test-veri- Safety-Related Functions for Nuclear Power Plants
fied equipment selection/application procedures, the Publisher: Institute of Electrical and Electronics
improper selection of equipment for the specified service Engineers, Inc. (IEEE), 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ
conditions, incomplete performance prediction models, 08854-1331
95
ASME QME-1–2007
EPRI TR-103237-R2, EPRI MOV Performance Prediction ments. This Guide provides information for determining
Program Topical Report valve assembly functional performance characteristics
Publisher: Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), 3420 to help ensure that the resulting Parent Valve qualifica-
tion is substantial and accurate.
Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94304
NOTE: The hot and cold cycle testing outlined in Section QV is
NRC Generic Letter (GL) GL 89-10, Safety-Related assumed to provide adequate demonstration that the candidate
Motor-Operated Valve Testing and Surveillance and valves will be capable of functioning as required for the specified
supplements service conditions (the parent valve and actuator performance char-
acteristics should have been previously determined through test-
NRC GL 95-07, Pressure Locking and Thermal Binding
ing). The Section QV testing is also intended to provide assurance
of Safety-Related Power-Operated Gate Valves that seismic loading of a valve assembly’s extended structure will
NRC GL 96-05, Periodic Verification of Design-Basis not impair the ability of the valve to stroke as freely as it would
Capability of Safety-Related Motor-Operated Valves without the seismic loading.
NRC Information Notice (IN) 96-48 and 96-48, Supple-
ment 1, Motor-Operated Valve Performance Issues
QV-G6000 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
NRC Regulatory Guide 1.89 (Revision 1, dated June
1984), Environmental Qualification of Certain Electric QV-G6100 Dimensional Variations Within a Qualified
Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Valve Design
Plants The qualification process should account for dimen-
NRC Regulatory Guide 1.100 (Revision 2, dated June sional variations of critical dimensions of essential-to-
1988), Seismic Qualification of Electric and function parts. Furthermore, any analytical techniques
Mechanical Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants applied in the qualification of the valves require verifica-
NRC Letter dated March 15, 1996, from tion by a testing and analysis program to ensure that
Ashok C. Thadani, NRC, to Thomas E. Tipton, Nuclear the analysis techniques are valid for the variations of
Energy Institute, forwarding Safety Evaluation by the the design being qualified. This program should demon-
Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation of Electric Power strate that the performance of the valves, predicted by
Research Institute Topical Report TR-103237, EPRI these analytical techniques, is applicable to all allowable
Motor Operated Valve Performance Prediction variations of the valve tolerances being qualified for
Program, and Supplement 1, dated February 20, 1997 the flow conditions specified by the valve functional
NUREG/CP-0152 (July 1996), Proceedings of the Fourth specification. Even though valves may satisfy the
NRC/ASME Symposium on Valve and Pump Testing requirements of the manufacturer’s Quality Assurance
NUREG/CR-6100 (May 1995), Gate Valve and Motor- Program (during the normal manufacturing process),
Operator Research Findings the worst-case allowable stack-up of tolerances in the
Publisher: U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC), critical dimensions of essential-to-function parts during
the manufacturing phase can render a valve incapable
One White Flint North, 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville
of consistent performance. The performance problems
MD 20852
associated with these manufacturing tolerances become
apparent under flow conditions when combined with
operating conditions, service history, and environmental
QV-G4000 DEFINITIONS effects.
See QV-4000. QV-G6200 Valve Thrust/Torque Requirements and

Actuator Capability
(a) During the qualification program, the Section QV
QV-G5000 VALVE ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE stroke-time measurement requirement should be sup-
CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENTS plemented with torque measurements for rotary valves,
torque and thrust for motor-operated rotating-rising-
Paragraph QVP-7000 provides detailed requirements stem and rising-stem valves, and thrust for all other
to verify the functional performance characteristics of a rising-stem valves, including air-operated valves. The
parent valve assembly. The procedures of QVP-7300 shall data collected would be significantly enhanced if the
be followed to ensure that these characteristics are based testing were performed with the valve under docu-
on testing, combined with the application of accepted mented loading conditions.
engineering practices. Paragraphs QVP-7400, QVC-
NOTE: Measuring torque and/or thrust performance, depending
7300, QVC-7400, and QVC-7500 all require the applica-
on the valve design, has been shown in test programs to be a far
tion of test-verified functional performance characteris- better indicator of valve performance than measuring stroke time.
tics to ensure that the equipment will perform as Functional margins can be determined from torque and thrust
required by the specification of performance require- measurements, but not from stroke time. This is consistent with
96
ASME QME-1–2007
the ASME Operation & Maintenance Committee (O&M) Code for anti-rotation devices) and their effect on actuator mar-
Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants Code Case gins, including quantification of the measured coeffi-
OMN-1, which gives alternatives for the stroke-time test as part
cients of friction and any effect caused by the speed of
of the Inservice Testing requirements. The code case recommends
monitoring more valve parameters on a less frequent basis. (This
closure operation or internal pressure. Where packing
does not alter Technical Specification stroke-time requirements.) friction has a significant effect on valve actuator margins,
test programs for parent valve assemblies should be
(b) Existing valve-specific data (that is based on ven- planned to provide reliable bases for prediction of candi-
dor-developed, application guidelines relating to the date valve requirements under anticipated service
prediction of valve thrust/torque requirements) should conditions.
be reviewed before using the data in a qualification (b) Although the standard allows a corrosion inhibi-
program. Critical review of the information will ensure tor to be present in testing water, any changes to the
that the methodology adequately accounts for the friction characteristics of the sliding surfaces caused by
dynamic forces imposed by the service conditions speci- the corrosion inhibitor should be addressed and
fied by the valve functional specification. The friction accounted for in both the parent valve qualification
forces created by guide surfaces, disc seating, stem/ report and candidate valve application report.
stem-nut combinations, butterfly valve seat hardness, (c) Friction and the operating conditions that influ-
and packing are examples of variables that can influence ence friction should be addressed in qualification pro-
prediction of the required thrust and torque. grams. For example, friction can be influenced by
(c) Existing actuator-specific data (e.g., stem factors temperature, cycle history, load, and internal parts
for motor-operated rising-stem actuators, based on ven- geometry.
dor-developed application guidelines, that predict actu-
ator thrust/torque capability) should be reviewed to QV-G6400 Margins
ensure that the methodology accounts for the environ- (a) The qualification plan and report(s) should
mental conditions and variations of power and/or sup- address margin requirements at all operating conditions
ply pressures specified by the valve functional noted in the valve functional specification including an
specification. appropriate combination of conditions (e.g., maximum
(d) When opening or closing a valve is required under pressure and minimum actuator voltage or maximum
high differential-pressure conditions, the valve func- pressure and maximum environmental conditions) that
tional specification should characterize the flow or the will demonstrate that the parent/candidate valve is
energy level of the fluid release, such as a high energy capable of achieving the required disc position under
line break (HELB), if applicable. Valve type and thrust design-basis conditions.
requirement characteristics should be considered in
flow-interruption or other tests involving high-energy NOTE: The Parent Valve Qualification Report and the Candidate
Valve Application Report should establish and critically review
release, particularly if the results will be extrapolated all methods used to determine the capabilities of both the parent
to larger valve sizes. and candidate equipment being qualified. The valve functional
NOTE: In many systems, during normal operation, the flowing specification should identify the extra capability required for the
resistance of the piping system will create a differential pressure parent/candidate valve. This extra capability or margin is the dif-
across the valve that might only be significant when the valve is ference between what torque and/or thrust are required and what
nearly closed. Under accident, “line-break” conditions, choked- is available. The required margin should be stated in the applicable
flow and high-differential pressures might exist at all open valve report as it applies to the specific valve assembly and its specified
positions. operating conditions. The determination of the margins should be
based on assumptions identified in the valve functional specifica-
(e) Where opening of a valve is required, the tion or test-determined variables.
unseating load should be considered in addition to the Valve service life and aging mechanisms (such as corrosion,
other loads. erosion, fatigue, and wear) can affect the margin available to oper-
ate the valves between maintenance cycles. Service life and aging
NOTE: For many valves, especially gate and butterfly valves, the can increase the thrust/torque required to operate valves and also
load during opening is highest at the beginning of the stroke, when decrease the thrust/torque output of an operator. This can cause
both the unseating load and the differential pressure load can valves that operate acceptably for qualification to possibly fail
contribute to the total load. However, under high differential pres- later. Qualification margin should consider these effects on valve
sure and high flow velocities, the fluid dynamic forces (due to performance. For example, the stem factor of a motor-operated
Bernoulli effects) might contribute enough to the total stem load valve can change as the stem grease dries out over time. Other
when the valve is open to cause the load after unseating to be forms of valve degradation can occur in valves installed in severe
greater than the load at unseating. operating conditions such as in a steam tunnel. The qualification
plan should define margins based on all loads affecting valve
QV-G6300 Friction performance over time.
(a) The Parent Valve Qualification Report and Candi- (b) Test equipment accuracy should be considered.
date Valve Application Report should address any Test equipment uncertainties need to be applied to mea-
assumptions of packing and bearing loads (including sured values in a conservative manner when evaluating
97
ASME QME-1–2007
valve capability margin and weak-link structural (9) actuator power and/or current
capability. (10) stem position signal (voltage, current, or
pressure)
QV-G6500 Valve Assembly Internal Component (11) actuator supply pressure
Analyses (12) actuator port(s) pressure(s)
(13) vibration
The Parent Valve Qualification Report and Candidate
(14) rotation angle or stroke position
Valve Application Report should address any valve
(15) spring forces and/or displacements
functional specification requirements for internal com-
ponent evaluations of essential-to-function parts. The (b) The data acquisition system should be capable of
valve functional specification should clearly define how sampling rates sufficient to ensure that rapidly changing
the results of the evaluations will be used to ensure that events are not masked or lost. Care should be taken to
the correct type of analysis is provided. minimize any signal noise prior to amplifying the signal.
(c) A data acquisition system’s methodology should
EXAMPLES: be well defined with assumptions verified and stated
(1) “weak-link” analytical evaluations of highly stressed compo- accuracy validated. The data acquisition system’s soft-
nents (e.g., pins or keys) to represent a one-time overload that ware programs should also be verified and validated.
a valve can withstand under improper actuator operation When data files are calculated by system software, all
(faulted condition) assumptions should be identified and documented. The
(2) a fatigue or endurance calculation (e.g., springs) to determine test system should provide repeatable results, within
an endurance load or cycle life capability that the valve can
the limits of the equipment being tested. This can typi-
withstand repeatedly with the maximum actuator output for
its intended operating life (normal operating condition)
cally be accomplished with a range of test cases with
end-to-end calibration of the individual transducers to
known standards.
QV-G6600 Binding (d) Testing equipment should be as nonintrusive as
The valve qualification program should include a possible, to prevent the testing equipment from unduly
review of the manufacturer’s worst-case internal valve influencing the performance of the equipment being
tolerances to ensure that binding resulting, for example, tested. Direct measurements should be made whenever
from thermal expansion or contraction, disc tipping, possible. Signal-to-noise ratios should be maximized,
excessive or insufficient clearances, and sharp internal especially for low signal outputs that are amplified. Sig-
edges is prevented for the qualified service conditions nal processing should allow for variable gain settings
of the valve assembly. and for maximum bit resolution of analog-to-digital con-
versions. Raw data should be preserved. Filtering of
NOTE: It is not intended that this Standard justify the qualifica- raw data should be an option (not normally performed).
tion of valve designs for service conditions that would cause inter- Filtering of data can influence time and data events.
nal components to deflect, wedge, or expand to the extent that the All filtering should be checked for time shifts. All data
ability of the valve to stroke is significantly impaired. The use of should be on the same time base. Filtering some data
excessive force from oversized actuators needed to overcome these
binding situations could create more serious problems that could
and not others can change event relationships.
impair the ability of the valve assembly to perform its specified (e) Calibration of equipment should consider the
safety-related functions. Excessive, permanent deformation or fail- entire data acquisition process as well as individual com-
ure of internal components and linkages are further indications ponents. Individual components should be traceable to
that the equipment is incorrect for the specified operating condi- known standards. Equipment calibration should be doc-
tions and should not be qualified. umented and follow established procedures. The accu-
racy of the test equipment should be reflected in any
QV-G6700 Data Acquisition analysis or interpretation of the collected test data.
(f ) Testing should be performed by individuals
(a) Data acquisition systems should include the fol-
knowledgeable in both the testing equipment and the
lowing measurements as applicable:
test procedures.
(1) time
(g) Data acquisition systems and test equipment are
(2) temperature
normally calibrated and/or validated in a given configu-
(3) thrust and/or torque ration. When used in a configuration different from the
(4) control signals normal operating configuration(s), these alternate con-
(5) line pressures (two of the following three: figurations should be reviewed to show that the results
upstream, downstream, or differential) would be applicable for the installed configuration.
(6) flow rate (h) The parameter “time” should be as accurately
(7) switch signals recorded as other measured parameters. If a parameter is
(8) voltages rapidly changing, a few-millisecond error in a reference
98
ASME QME-1–2007
time base could significantly affect the analysis of the The efficiency in converting operator torque-to-stem
test results. thrust is unique for an individual stem, stem nut and
(i) Excitation voltages and/or current should be regu- lubricant combination. This would require that the
lated or monitored for correct values at the transducer. thrust/torque capabilities of each valve assembly be
(j) Sensors should be calibrated in both directions if determined as part of the production or installation pro-
an accurate reading is required for different stroke direc- cess (or bounded based on a statistically valid sample
tions; e.g., thrust sensors should be calibrated in tension of tests) to ensure that the actuator’s torque capability
and compression if both seating and unseating forces exceeds the valve thrust requirements for the specific
are required to be measured. service conditions and does not exceed any structural
(k) Strain gage considerations should include the limits of the valve and actuator. As a result, the stem-
following: nut lubricant condition should be controlled and docu-
(1) Material properties of structural elements mented in parent and candidate valve testing.
should be accurately known before they are used to (b) The qualification plan should
calculate mechanical forces. Using “general reference (1) address motor-operator gearing efficiencies and
numbers” for the Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson’s Ratio, the use of any application factors.
and the Modulus of Rigidity could lead to large errors. (2) address the effect of stem load on the stroke
(2) The effective diameter of a valve stem can be time. For example, when a specific stroke time is
affected by its proximity to stress concentrations such required for the function of a valve, the capability to
as radii, back seats, threads, key ways, etc. stroke in the specified time should be determined under
(3) The use of strain gages on threaded sections of the design-basis operating conditions of the valve.
valve stems should be discouraged unless the calibration
(3) address minimum-voltage values due to power
techniques compensate for the unpredictable parasitic
cable voltage losses from the Motor Control Center
effect of torque on thrust.
(MCC) to the MOV if required by the actuator functional
(4) After installation, strain gages should be cali-
specification.
brated to a known standard.
(4) address electric motor performance degrada-
(5) All permanently mounted strain gages should
be reverified before use. tion under elevated temperature conditions, as identi-
(6) Care should be taken to minimize any signal fied by the actuator functional specification.
noise prior to amplifying the signal because strain gage (5) address design-basis MOV operating margins
outputs are very small (millivolts). relative to operating margins later in life, as identified
(7) Strain gages should be installed in the correct by the actuator functional specification.
orientation to allow for accurate data acquisition. (6) address the structural limits of the motor
(8) Thermal effects on strain gages should be mini- operator.
mized or compensated for during data acquisition. (7) address stem friction coefficient and load-sensi-
NOTE: In QV-G6700(k)(1) through (3), strain gage concerns can tive behavior (including rate of loading effects).
be offset if a strain-gaged stem is properly calibrated as in (8) address (in the aging section of QVP-7350) cold-
QV-G6700(k)(4); QV-G6700(k)(5) is intended to offset concerns set problems (associated with coil springs and Belleville
regarding whether strain gage accuracy could be affected by degra- spring packs that remain in a compressed state over
dation from mechanical damage, moisture, or temperature
long periods). Typically, the spring becomes shorter, but
between tests.
the rate does not change.
(9) address any performance issues that may be
QV-G7000 POWER-ACTUATED VALVE ASSEMBLY related to the orientation of the valve and actuator
CONSIDERATIONS assembly with respect to the piping system.
Both the Parent Valve Qualification Report and Candi- (10) address any issues concerning performance
date Valve Application Report need to address any spe- due to minimum and maximum voltages.
cific information that is determined during the
configuration of the candidate valve prior to shipment. QV-G7200 Air-Operated Valves (AOVs)
This information could be related to the effect on mar-
gins from factors, such as assumed packing loads, actua- (a) The thrust output of the air operator should be
tor bench set values, pressure regulator set points, torque addressed by testing. The testing should determine the
switch settings, and actuator thrust/torque capabilities. output of the spring or air operator, together and/or
separately, as identified by the valve functional specifi-
QV-G7100 Motor-Operated Valves (MOVs) cation.
(a) Qualification plans involving motor-operated (b) The qualification plan should
actuators should address quantifying the operator (1) address the effect of stem load on the stroke
torque-to-stem thrust conversion in rising-stem valves. time. When a specific stroke time is required for the
99
ASME QME-1–2007
function of a valve, the capability to stroke in the speci- NOTE: Cobalt alloys are used extensively for hard-facing wear
fied time should be determined under the design-basis surfaces on the valve disc and seat. Testing has shown the fol-
lowing:
operating conditions of the valve.
(1) Cobalt alloy friction coefficients typically increase with time
AOV stroke time may be influenced by changing the and cycle history (a phenomenon known as preconditioning).
bench set values or the maximum air supply pressure Under room-temperature conditions, it might take hundreds of
to the diaphragm case. Stroke time should be deter- differential-pressure cycles for the coefficient of friction to reach a
mined as part of the final configuration of the valve plateau. At high-temperature conditions, only a few differential-
assembly prior to shipment and whenever maintenance pressure cycles are usually required to achieve the same effect. If
is performed on the valve assembly, including packing the valve sliding surfaces are exposed to the atmosphere during
the qualification process, the friction factor will decrease. Typically,
adjustments. Different packing configurations can sig-
cold water qualification tests require preconditioning for conserva-
nificantly affect AOV stroke time and operating margins. tism, but hot water and steam testing do not require this step.
(2) address minimum supply pressure values due (2) The coefficient of friction for cobalt alloys might be as high as
to line losses, if required by the actuator functional speci- 0.6 to 0.7 when fully preconditioned under cold water conditions.
fication. (3) Cobalt alloy friction coefficients generally decrease at higher
(3) address the structural limits of the air operator. temperatures and loads, but the friction coefficients for other mate-
rials can increase at higher temperatures and loads.
(4) address (in the aging section of QVP-7350) cold-
set problems (associated with coil springs that remain (b) For motor-operated gate valves, the effects of load-
in a compressed state over long periods of time). Typi- sensitive behavior (including rate of loading) should
cally, the spring becomes shorter, but the rate does not be addressed. The use of limit-switch or torque-switch
change. actuator control should be included as part of the specifi-
cation of performance requirements. Qualification test-
ing should identify what method of control is used (limit
QV-G8000 VALVE CONSIDERATIONS or torque switch) and address the applicable results.
Valve testing should determine full opening and/or
closing capability under specified differential-pressure
QV-G8100 Gate Valves
and flow conditions when required. Valve testing may
QV-G8110 General Considerations. The following also ensure that internal weak-link components are not
concerns should be addressed when qualifying gate exceeded during any static testing because of the rate-
valves: of-loading phenomenon.
(a) Valve disc, seat, and guide surface coefficient of NOTE: Rising-stem valves and rotating-rising-stem valves,
friction should be determined. whether controlled by a torque switch or a limit switch, are subject
to the rate-of-loading phenomenon. It is seen most clearly at the
(1) The qualification plan should define the mathe-
end of the closing stroke of a torque-switch-controlled valve. Here,
matical and test procedures used to determine friction the stem force at a torque-switch trip under static conditions (with
coefficients. no pressure or flow) is higher than the stem force at a torque switch
(2) The equations and default values used in calcu- trip under flow and pressure load conditions. It is caused by a
lating all operating parameters should be defined. change in the coefficient of friction at the stem/stem nut interface.
Limit-switch-controlled valves also tend to have a different
(3) For valves being qualified for low-flow and
stem/stem nut coefficient of friction under loaded conditions than
pressure loads, the flow test-derived coefficient of fric- under static conditions. Both EPRI and NRC have published
tion between the disc and the seat may be low because reports (see QV-G3000, References) on this phenomenon; the expla-
cobalt alloys have a wide scatter band at low contact nations provided in these reports can make this complicated subject
stress loads. easier to understand.
(a) A minimum coefficient of friction value (c) The qualification plan should address through
should be established for margin considerations when testing that the valve will not be damaged and will
determining dynamic flow coefficients. exhibit predictable behavior under all fluid conditions
(b) A maximum coefficient of friction value for which it is qualified. Internal clearances, manufactur-
should be established when determining minimum ing tolerances, edge radii, and manufacturing proce-
available actuator margin. dures of the valve body guides and disc guides should
(4) To the maximum degree possible, valve stem be considered in the qualification process (see also
load should be measured throughout the valve stroke QV-G6600).
for the entire range of pressure, temperature, fluid Valves can perform in a significantly different manner
media, and fluid flow qualification conditions. The dif- depending on the differential pressure, flow, and fluid
ferential pressure of the fluid should be maintained to temperature. The qualification plan should address the
the extent possible during the full opening and closing full range of potential operating conditions for the valve.
strokes for flow interruption capability demonstration Industry and NRC-sponsored valve testing has revealed
to reveal any changes in valve performance. that valves (principally gate valves) can be damaged
100
ASME QME-1–2007
under high flow or blowdown conditions. Valve damage Most of the typical disc load equations do not account
has ranged from guide bending to severe metal removal for any additional force required for a seating load in
on body or disc guides, and on seating surfaces. The the closing direction or an unseating load in the opening
damage can cause the thrust and torque requirements direction. Seating and unseating loads tend to be valve-
for operating the valve to be unpredictable. For example, specific, and should be determined for the individual
(1) The worst-case (large) clearance between the valve.
disc and guides can allow the disc to tip during the
NOTE: For flexible-wedge and solid-wedge gate valves, the
valve stroke. The tipping of the disc changes the load wedge is exposed to fluid dynamic forces that tend to counteract
distribution around the disc. This change can influence the stem rejection force in both the opening and closing directions.
the force required to close the valve. If the disc tips far For valves larger than 6 in. in diameter, the fluid-induced vertical
enough and has sharp edges, the edge of the disc can forces might be a dominant factor in calculating the vertical loads
gouge the seat, or the edge of the guide slot can gouge under high-flow conditions. Disc tipping might reverse the trend
the body guide surfaces. The physical damage increases (or tendency). The tipped disc condition might cause additional
stem-force requirements that are sufficient to cause the peak stem
the stem force required to close the valve. Excessive
force to occur before flow isolation.
disc tipping can lead to disc binding (wedged in the
downstream seat) under high loads. QV-G8120 Parallel-Disc Gate Valves. In some paral-
(2) For gate valves with carbon steel or stainless lel-disc gate valves (particularly in conduit designs), the
steel guides and disc slots, it is expected that galling maximum stem thrust occurs before flow isolation. This
will occur under high loads and temperature conditions. peak thrust before flow isolation is a normal response
When the tolerances between the disc guide slots and for this type of valve, but the magnitude is specific to
the body guide are too close, even mild galling under the valve. Normal stem thrust equations might not be
high loads can fill the clearance area and cause the disc applicable for these valves. Extrapolation of a specific
to bind. response to valves of other sizes should not be
(3) For gate valves with welded body guides, the attempted.
lack of weld reinforcement on the lower part of the guide
QV-G8130 Flexible-Wedge and Solid-Wedge Gate
can cause the guide to bend under high loads. The bent
Valves. Methods used in extrapolation of stem loads
guides can bind the disc near the closed position, requir-
in wedge-type gate valves should be critically reviewed.
ing more stem force to close and open the valve.
The extrapolation of stem loads in wedge-type gate
(d) The qualification plan should address the effects
valves requires special consideration. This is particularly
of pressure locking and thermal binding (see QV-G6600
true in extrapolating the results from small valves to
and NRC Generic Letter 95-07).
larger valves (and vice versa), in extrapolating the results
NOTE: In the opening direction, gate valve stem force require- from low differential pressures to higher differential
ments can be influenced by pressure-locking forces. Merely
pressures, and in extrapolating between temperatures.
depressurizing the inlet and outlet of a closed gate valve can trap
pressure in the bonnet. This trapped pressure can increase the stem
In wedge-type gate valves of the same design and manu-
force required to open the valve. facturer, the stem load typically has a linear relationship
with respect to pressure in the opening and closing direc-
(e) The Parent Valve Qualification Report should tion (except for unseating and seating loads). The follow-
identify the value of all variables and model equations ing exceptions can cause extrapolation between valve
used to qualify the valve. sizes and pressure conditions to be inaccurate:
NOTE: Variables can include the coefficient of friction in the disc/ (a) Wedge-type gate valves typically require the maxi-
seat interface, the packing load, and any unexpected event in the mum thrust at flow isolation in the closing direction. In
stem force history (e.g., if the maximum force occurs before flow
the atypical response, the maximum thrust occurs before
isolation). Identification of the model equations used in the qualifi-
cation of the parent valve is important because the same equations flow isolation. This condition can be caused by the fol-
are needed in the candidate valve qualification. Of particular lowing:
importance is the valve seat diameter used in the area calculation (1) Many guide materials have higher friction coef-
to determine friction forces. The mean seat diameter is used as a ficients than the most common disc/seat materials.
standard term in most new stem-force equations. For the actuator, Therefore, greater friction forces are created as the disc
these variables can include (depending on type) any variable spe-
nears flow isolation if the disc is riding on the guides
cific to the design, including the actual motor torque compared
with the rated torque, the gear-box efficiency under various load instead of on the seat.
scenarios, the stem speed for inertia considerations, and the stem (2) Tipping of the disc can occur as it approaches
factor (stem/stem nut coefficient of friction). Because margin is flow isolation. The distribution of fluid pressure around
valve-specific, all of these variables should be considered in the the disc, especially the bonnet pressure on the top of
qualification of a valve and its operating margin for a particular the disc and the downstream pressure on the down-
design-basis requirement.
stream face, is such that the valve experiences greater
(f) The qualification plan/report(s) should critically resistance to closing than if the disc does not tip. The
review any model used to calculate gate valve disc loads. contact stress loads at the disc-guide/valve-body-guide
101
ASME QME-1–2007
interface are also altered. A decrease in the load can All modern stem force equations have been validated
occur when the disc contacts the seat, causing the tipped for valve positions after flow isolation in the closing
disc to become realigned just before flow isolation. The direction and before flow initiation in the opening
effect is to cause the highest stem force to occur before direction.
flow isolation.
(b) Wedge-type gate valves typically create a maxi- QV-G8200 Rotary Valves
mum thrust requirement at unseating in the opening (a) The use of scale modeling to predict full-size fluid
direction. Extrapolation of opening forces (extrapolating dynamic operating torque generation and requirements
the results from small valves to larger ones and extrapo- should be based on truly dimensionless flow and torque
lating the results from low differential pressures to coefficients. The flow and torque coefficients should be
higher differential pressures) requires some precautions, from the same model test and should be treated as a
such as matched set and never mixed with data from other
(1) In high-flow conditions, Bernoulli forces can valves. Scale modeling methods should be validated in
cause the stem force to be greater after flow initiation the full-scale valve qualification tests.
than at unseating. This can make extrapolations of open- (b) Determination or extrapolation of fluid dynamic
ing test data difficult. torque response should include and address all relevant
(2) Unseating loads are a product of the disc stiff- factors.
ness, the disc/seat coefficient of friction, and how hard NOTE: The dynamically induced flow forces acting on a valve
the disc was forced into the seat in the preceding closing disc apply an active (fluid dynamic) torque to the valve disc and
stroke. shaft during valve operation. This torque generation is a function of
disc geometry, disc aspect ratio (thickness/diameter), disc angular
(3) Unseating loads cannot be extrapolated; they orientation in the flow stream, direction of flow through the valve,
can be determined from valve-specific testing. In the pressure and velocity of the fluid approaching the disc, and any
absence of such testing, they can be bounded by calcula- flow field eccentricities or discontinuities caused by upstream sys-
tions based on the closing load and the differential tem piping (presence of elbows, etc.). For example, butterfly valves
pressure. with offset discs generate more or less hydrodynamic torque during
operation than similar symmetrical-disc butterfly valves,
(4) Direct extrapolation of small-valve test results
depending on flow direction (seat upstream or downstream).
to larger valves, without the use of a detailed model,
should be avoided because some load ratios do not (c) Any increase in bushing friction due to aging and
extrapolate linearly between valve sizes. On wedge-type degradation should be accounted for in the functional
gate valves, there is a vertical area created by a projection margin calculations.
of the wedge angle. A vertical force is created by the (d) The effect of aging of elastomeric seats should be
difference between the bonnet pressure and the down- accounted for in the functional margin calculations.
stream pressure acting across the projected area. This NOTE: QV-G8200(c) and (d) refer to candidate valves, where
force counteracts the stem rejection force in both the functional margin can be affected by aging concerns that might
opening and closing directions. The ratio between these not have been accounted for in the parent valve qualification.
two forces is different for smaller valves than for larger Functional margin in the parent valve should include all the loads
specified in the valve functional specification. Candidate valves
valves. It is conservative to ignore this difference in the
may be installed in different environmental conditions where these
closing direction, but not in the opening direction. If the concerns would apply (e.g., in service water, where dirt might
disc/seat coefficient of friction is known, the current increase bearing friction).
stem force equations that consider all internal pressure
loads will make an adequate prediction of the pressure- QV-G8300 Globe Valves
dependent opening load, which then should be com- (a) Dynamic testing of globe valves should include a
bined with the unseating load and flow loads created full range of differential pressure and flow conditions
by the Bernoulli forces. for qualification.
(5) In wedge-type gate valves of the same manufac- Balanced globe valves might experience maximum
ture and type that experience large fluid forces after closing force requirements at intermediate lifts due to
flow initiation, test results can be reliably extrapolated downstream pressure acting on valve stem and plug
using a linear methodology. After removing stem rejec- areas. Therefore, a blowdown test of a large valve should
tion and packing forces from the stem force, a disc factor maintain high differential pressures throughout as much
can be calculated using the area and differential-pressure of the valve stroke as possible in order to provide mean-
test data. This disc factor can be used for extrapolating ingful test results.
the results from lower differential-pressure tests to (b) For unbalanced globe valves, the parent valve
higher differential-pressure applications, and from qualification report should note whether the calculation
smaller to larger valves. In this instance, a disc factor of the stem force requirement used a guide-based or
should be used rather than the friction factor because seat-based area term. Candidate valves should use the
fluid forces are not accounted for with the friction factor. same area term in calculating stem loads and margins.
102
ASME QME-1–2007
(c) Globe valve designs being considered for high NOTE: Typical industry stem force calculations for globe valves
flow and high temperature applications should be tested have been 1.1 times the pressure area calculation. The additional
at conditions that create the maximum-expected stem 10% has not been sufficient in some high-flow cases tested to date.
loads.
NOTE: Tests in both the U.S. and Europe have shown that globe (e) Any problems associated with rotating discs used
valves at severe service conditions have required higher stem forces for high-flow rate (turbulent) applications should be
than predicted by typical industry stem force prediction equations. addressed, if applicable, in the valve qualification
(d) Globe valve tolerances and plug side-loading program.
forces that can increase stem force loads, under high- (f) The galling potential of globe valve disc and disc
flow conditions, should be addressed in the valve quali- guiding materials should be addressed in the valve qual-
fication program. ification program.
103

Page intentionally blank
104
ASME QME-1–2007
QME CODE CASES
A code case is a method of processing a reply to an inquiry when study indicates that the
wording of the Standard needs clarification, when the reply modifies the existing requirements
of the Standard, or to grant permission to use alternative methods.
ASME publishes cases issued by the QME Committee concerning QME-1 as part of the update
service to that standard. Public notice of new, revised, reaffirmed, and annulled cases appear in
Mechanical Engineering when they are approved. New and revised cases, as well as announcements
of reaffirmed Cases and annulments appear in the next updated edition. Cases currently in effect
at the time of publication of a new edition of the standard are included with it as a supplement.
Code Case QME-001, which was last published in QME-1–2000, has been incorporated into
the code. Further action regarding this code case is pending.
The cases included in this supplement are as follows: QME-002 through QME-005.
C-1
ASME QME-1–2007
CODE CASE QME-002

Flow Reversal Tests for Active Self-Operated Check Valves
(Applicability: ASME QME-1-1994 and Later)
Inquiry (1): If the test prescribed in Inquiry (4): Is the Flow Reversal Test intended to
QVP-7391.2(a)(4)(a) (“instant-of-closure” velocity deter- establish closure velocity, structural integrity, or both?
mination) is performed, is it also required that a math
model be generated as described in QVP-7391.2(a)(4)(b)? Reply (4): Refer to QVP-7390.2.
Reply (1): No. Inquiry (5): What is the purpose of the seat leakage
observation under differential pressure specified in
Inquiry (2): Is it required that either the test described QVP-7391.2(a)(6)?
in QVP-7391.2(a)(4)(a) be performed or the three tests
with an accompanying math model be performed as Reply (5): Refer to QVP-7390.2.
described in QVP-7391.2(a)(4)(b)?
Reply (2): Yes.
Inquiry (3): What is the intended purpose of the Flow

Reversal Test and what are its intended objectives?
Reply (3): Refer to QVP-7390.2.
C-2
ASME QME-1–2007
CODE CASE QME-003

Qualifying a Candidate Relief Valve
Inquiry: Is it a requirement of QME-1, when qualify-

ing a candidate relief valve in accordance with the sim-
plified extension approach of QVC-7600, that the valve
must meet the similarity requirements of QVC-7220.3?
Reply: No.
C-3
ASME QME-1–2007
CODE CASE QME-004

Qualifying a Candidate Relief Valve
Inquiry: Can qualification that has been performed in

accordance with ANSI B16.41 be applied as part of a
qualification in accordance with ASME QME-1?
Reply: Yes, provided that all applicable requirements

of QME-1 are complied with.
C-4
ASME QME-1–2007
CODE CASE QME-005

Pressure Differential Across the Valve for the Entire Valve Travel Cycle
Inquiry: Is a requirement of QVP-7391.1(c) that, to the

extent practical, the pressure differential across the valve
for the entire valve travel cycle should be maintained
at the maximum pressure differential for which the valve
is to be qualified?
Reply: Yes, within the context of the entire

QVP-7391.1.
C-5

C-6
ASME Services
ASME is committed to developing and delivering technical information. At ASME’s Information Central, we make every
effort to answer your questions and expedite your orders. Our representatives are ready to assist you in the following
areas:
ASME Press Member Services & Benefits Public Information

Codes & Standards Other ASME Programs Self-Study Courses
Credit Card Orders Payment Inquiries Shipping Information
IMechE Publications Professional Development Subscriptions/Journals/Magazines
Meetings & Conferences Short Courses Symposia Volumes
Member Dues Status Publications Technical Papers
How can you reach us? It’s easier than ever!

There are four options for making inquiries* or placing orders. Simply mail, phone, fax, or E-mail us and an Information
Central representative will handle your request.
Mail Call Toll Free Fax—24 hours E-Mail—24 hours

ASME US & Canada: 800-THE-ASME 973-882-1717 Infocentral@asme.org
22 Law Drive, Box 2900 (800-843-2763) 973-882-5155
Fairfield, New Jersey Mexico: 95-800-THE-ASME
07007-2900 (95-800-843-2763)
Universal: 973-882-1167
* Information Central staff are not permitted to answer inquiries about the technical content of this code or standard. Information as to
whether or not technical inquiries are issued to this code or standard is shown on the copyright page. All technical inquiries must be
submitted in writing to the staff secretary. Additional procedures for inquiries may be listed within.


Copyrighted material licensed to Stanford University by Thomson Scientific (www.techstreet.com), downloaded on Oct-05-2010 by Stanford University User. No further reproduction or distribution is permitted. Uncontrolled when printed
A13607

ASME QME-1–2007

QME-1 Edtn 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QME-1 Edtn 2007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

QME-1 Edtn 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What topics does this document cover?

What topics does this document cover?

Copyrighted material licensed to Stanford University by Thomson Scientific (www.techstreet.com), downloaded on Oct-05-2010 by Stanford University User.

No further reproduction or distribution is permitted. Uncontrolled when printed

Copyright c 2007 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

Three Park Avenue • New York, NY 10016

Copyright c 2007 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Copyright c 2007 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

SUBCOMMITTEE ON QUALIFICATION OF VALVE ASSEMBLIES

SUBCOMMITTEE ON QUALIFICATION OF ACTIVE DYNAMIC RESTRAINTS

SUBGROUP ON QDR DEVELOPMENT

SUBCOMMITTEE ON GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SUBCOMMITTEE ON DYNAMIC QUALIFICATION

The numbering of the articles and the material con-

Following approval by the ASME Committee on Qualification of Mechanical Equipment Used

QME-1–2007 includes the following changes identified by a margin note, (07).

QUALIFICATION OF ACTIVE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

QR-1000 SCOPE Publisher: Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Nonmandatory Appendix QR-A (07)

Seismic Qualification of Active Mechanical Equipment

QR-A1000 SCOPE IEEE Standard 344-87, Recommended Practices for

QR-A7123 Time Histories. When three compo- QR-A7220 Types of Tests

Nn p number of independent equipment items at Table QR-A7422-1 Reduction Factors

A-1 GENERAL parameter for the parent component, an assessment of

Table A-1 List of Input Parameters

6. Maximum leakage rate

10. Other parameters (list as applicable)

Resolution of any significant differences:

Table A-2 Comparative List of Physical Parameters

1. Component physical dimensions

2. Component weight, its distribution, and center of

4. Cross-sectional and length data to characterize stiff-

5. Mounting with respect to:

Size and length

Bolts and nuts material, grade

Number and size

Geometry (bolt circle or pattern info.)

Holes in baseplates (circular or oval)

7. Other interfaces with adjacent items such as cables,

Resolution of any significant differences:

head barrel section

Copyright c 2007 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.

Fig. B-2 Finite Element Formulation of Pump Assembly

Motor housing Rotor

Pump housing Impeller

10 0.6421 + 02 ASME Service Level C Condition:

The pressure boundary components of this 3

Table B-2 Evaluation of Behavior at Critical Locations

Motor stand stress 5,221 psi 19,250 psi 3.70

Suction barrel shell 8,195 psi 16,500 psi 2.0

Pump first stage casing 2,446 psi 8,250 psi 3.33